DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder Getting Started Guide

User’s
Manual
DL850E/DL850EV
ScopeCorder
Getting Started Guide
IM DL850E-03EN
8th Edition
Product Registration
Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products.
YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services.
Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form
accessible from our website.
http://tmi.yokogawa.com/
PIM 103-04E
Thank you for purchasing the DL850E ScopeCorder or DL850EV ScopeCorder Vehicle Edition
(hereinafter, “DL850E/DL850EV” will refer to both of these products).
This getting started guide primarily explains the handling precautions and basic operations of the
DL850E/DL850EV. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before operation.
Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event that a question arises.
List of Manuals
The following manuals, including this one, are provided as manuals for the DL850E/DL850EV. Please
read all manuals.
Manual Title
Manual No.
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder IM DL850E-01EN
Features Guide
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Getting Started Guide
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Communication Interface
User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Real Time Math/Power Math
User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Acquisition Software
User’s Manual
IM DL850E-02EN
IM DL850E-03EN
IM DL850E-17EN
IM DL850E-51EN
IM DL850E-61EN
Precautions Concerning the
IM 701250-04E
Modules
Model DL850E ScopeCorder,
IM DL850E-04Z2
Model DL850EV ScopeCorder
Vehicle Edition
Radio Equipment Directive(RED)
User’s Manual
Model DL850E ScopeCorder,
IM DL850E-92Z1
Model DL850EV ScopeCorder
Vehicle Edition, User’s Manual
Description
The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual.
The manual explains all the DL850E/DL850EV features
other than the communication interface features. You can
view the same information in the DL850E/DL850EV help
files.
The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual.
The manual explains how to operate the DL850E/DL850EV.
This guide. The guide explains the handling precautions
and basic operations of the DL850E/DL850EV.
The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual.
The manual explains the DL850E/DL850EV communication
interface features and instructions on how to use them.
The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual.
The manual explains the features of the DL850E/DL850EV
Real Time Math/Power Math option and how to use them.
The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual.
The manual explains all the features of the acquisition
software, which records and displays data measured with
the DL850E/DL850EV on a PC.
The manual explains the precautions concerning the
modules.
Document for RE directive(for /C30 option).
Document for China
The “EN”, “E”, “Z1” and “Z2” in the manual numbers are the language codes.
Refer to the “Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)” about the accessory’s manual No..
Contact information of Yokogawa offices worldwide is provided on the following sheet.
Document No.
PIM 113-01Z2
Description
List of worldwide contacts
Notes
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing
improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions. The figures given in this manual may
differ from those that actually appear on your screen.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its
contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of
YOKOGAWA is strictly prohibited.
• The TCP/IP software of this product and the documents concerning it have been developed/created
by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software, Release 1 that has been licensed from
the Regents of the University of California.
8th Edition: November 2017 (YMI)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2013 Yokogawa Test & Measurement Corporation
IM DL850E-03EN
i
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Windows, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• Adobe and Acrobat are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PIEZOTRON is a registered Trademark of Kistler Instrumente AG.
• PCB and ICP are registered trademarks of PCB Group, Inc.
• Isotron is a registered trademark of Meggitt Group, PLC.
• VJE is a registered trademark of Yahoo Japan Corporation.
• MATLAB is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Inc. in the United States.
• GIGAZoom ENGINE is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• In this manual, the ® and TM symbols do not accompany their respective registered trademark or
trademark names.
• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
Revisions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ii
1st Edition:
2nd Edition:
3rd Edition:
4th Edition:
5th Edition:
6th Edition:
7th Edition:
8th Edition:
December 2013
July 2014
March 2015
October 2015
February 2016
March 2016
July 2017
November 2017
IM DL850E-03EN
Regarding the Conventional DL850 and DL850V
The DL850E/DL850EV manuals also cover how to use the conventional DL850/DL850V (firmware
version 3.0 and later).
In the explanations, the model is indicated as DL850E/DL850EV, but if you are using the DL850/DL850V,
read “DL850E” as “DL850” and “DL850EV” as “DL850V.” The following options are available only for the
DL850E/DL850EV. They cannot be used with the DL850 or DL850V.
• Power math (/G5 option)
• GPS interface (/C30 option)
Note
If modules that were released after the discontinuation of the DL850 and DL850V (December 31, 2013) are
installed in the DL850 or DL850V, the compliance conditions of the standards that the DL850 and DL850V
comply with will no longer be met. For details, see the Precautions Concerning the Modules (IM 701250-04E)
included with the module.
IM DL850E-03EN
iii
Checking the Contents of the Package
Unpack the box, and check the contents before operating the instrument. If the wrong items have been
delivered, if items are missing, or if there is a problem with the appearance of the items, contact your
nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
DL850E/DL850EV
Check that the product that you received is what you ordered by referring to the model name and suffix
code given on the name plate on the left side panel.
MODEL
Suffix1
DL850E/DL850EV
Power cord2
-D
-F
-Q
-R
-H
-N
Language
-HJ
-HE
-HC
-HK
-HG
-HF
-HL
-HS
Options
Description
Main device, 8 slots, 250 Mpoint memory
UL/CSA Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 125 V
VDE Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 250 V
BS Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 250 V
AS Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 250 V
GB Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 250 V
NBR Standard power cord, Maximum rated voltage: 250 V
Japanese
English
Chinese
Korean
German
French
Italian
Spanish
/B5
Built-in printer3
/DC
12 VDC Power (10 to 18 VDC) (DL850EV only)4
/M1
Memory expansion to 1 Gpoint5
/M2
Memory expansion to 2 Gpoint5
/HD0
External HDD interface6
/HD1
500 GB internal HDD6
/C1
GP-IB interface7
/C20
GP-IB interface + IRIG7
/C30
GPS interface7
/G2
User-defined computation
/G3
Real Time Math8
/G5
Power math8
/P4
Probe power supply, four outputs
1For products whose suffix code contains “Z,” an exclusive manual may be included. Please read it along with the
standard manual.
2Make sure that the attached power cord meets the designated standards of the country and area that you are
using it in.
3 Includes one roll of paper (B9988AE)
4The /DC option can only be installed on the DL850EV. The /DC and /B5 options cannot be installed on the same
instrument.
5 The /M1 and /M2 options cannot be installed on the same instrument.
6 The /HD0 and /HD1 options cannot be installed on the same instrument.
7 The /C1, /C20, and /C30 options cannot be installed on the same instrument.
8 The /G3 and /G5 options cannot be installed on the same instrument.
iv
IM DL850E-03EN
Checking the Contents of the Package
No. (Instrument Number)
When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument, please give them the instrument
number.
IM DL850E-03EN
v
Checking the Contents of the Package
Standard Accessories
The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument. Check that all contents are present
and undamaged.
Item
Power cord1
Front-panel protection cover
Soft case
Printer roll paper2
Panel sheet
DC power connector3
Cover panels
Rubber feet
GPS antenna4
Manuals
Printed manuals
Manual CD
Model or Part No.
A1006WD
A1009WD
A1054WD
A1024WD
A1064WD
A1088WD
B8074EA
B8059GG
B9988AE
See below.
Quantity
1
B8023WZ
B8073CY
B9989EX
A1058ER
1
8
1
1
IM DL850E-03EN
IM 701250-04E
IM DL850E-04Z2
IM DL850E-92Z1
PIM 113-01Z2
B8074XT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Specifications and Notes
UL, CSA, and PSE standard
VDE standard
BS standard
AS standard
GB standard
NBR standard
—
—
—
Japanese, Chinese, Korean, German, French,
Italian, or Spanish
—
—
—
—
Getting Started Guide (this guide)
Precautions Concerning the Modules
Document for RE directive(for /C30 option).
Document for China
List of worldwide contacts
Contains PDFs of the user’s manuals,
Acquisition Software and USB driver
(For the types of manuals that CD contains,
see the next page.)
Standard accessories are not covered by warranty of this instrument.
Power cord (one cord that matches the suffix code is included)1
UL/CSA Standard VDE Standard BS Standard
A1009WD
A1054WD
A1006WD
D
F
One of the following panel sheets:
DL850E
B8074GP (Japanese; -HJ)
B8074GQ (Chinese; -HC)
B8074GR (Korean; -HK)
B8074GS (German; -HG)
B8074GT (French; -HF)
B8074GV (Italian; -HL)
B8074GW (Spanish; -HS)
DL850EV
B8074HP (Japanese; -HJ)
B8074HQ (Chinese; -HC)
B8074HR (Korean; -HK)
B8074HS (German; -HG)
B8074HT (French; -HF)
B8074HV (Italian; -HL)
B8074HW (Spanish; -HS)
AS Standard
A1024WD
GB Standard
A1064WD
R
H
Q
Soft case
B8059GG
Rubber feet
B9989EX,
1 sheet
(4 feet)
Printer roll paper2
B9988AE, 1 roll
GPS antenna4
A1058ER
NBR Standard
A1088WD
Front-panel
protection cover
B8074EA
N
DC power connector3
B8023WZ
Manuals
• Printed manuals
Cover panels
B8073CY,
8 panels
• Manual CD
1 Make sure that the attached power cord meets the designated standards of the country and area that you
are using it in.
2 Only included with models that have a built-in printer (/B5)
3 Only included with DL850EVs that have the 12 VDC power supply (/DC option)
4 Only included with models that have a GPS interface (/C30)
vi
IM DL850E-03EN
Checking the Contents of the Package
Manual CD
The English folder in the manual CD contains the PDF files shown below. The CD also contains
Japanese manuals.
File Name
Features Guide & Users Manual.pdf
Communication Interface.pdf
Real Time Math & Power Math.pdf
Acquisition Software.pdf
Manual Title
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Features Guide
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Communication Interface User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Real Time Math/Power Math User’s Manual
DL850E/DL850EV ScopeCorder
Acquisition Software User’s Manual
Manual No.
IM DL850E-01EN
IM DL850E-02EN
IM DL850E-17EN
IM DL850E-51EN
IM DL850E-61EN
To view the PDF files above, you need Adobe Reader 5.0 or later.
WARNING
Never play this manual CD, which contains the user’s manuals, in an audio CD player.
Doing so may cause loss of hearing or speaker damage due to the large sounds that may be
produced.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
Ce CD contient les manuels d’utilisation. Ne jamais insérer ce CD dans un lecteur de CD
audio. Cela pourrait entraîner une perte d’audition ou l’endommagement des enceintes en
raison du volume potentiellement élevé des sons produits.
IM DL850E-03EN
vii
Checking the Contents of the Package
Input Modules (Sold Separately)
To make sure that an input module is the module that you ordered, check the module name written on
it.
MODEL
701250
720250
701251
701255
701267
720268
701261
701262
701265
720266
701270
701271
701275
701281
720281
720210
720211
720220
720221
720230
720240
720241
720243
720254
Name
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module
High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS)
High-Voltage 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with AAF and RMS)
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module (with AAF)
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (low noise)
Strain Module (NDIS)
Strain Module (DSUB, Shunt-Cal)
Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF)
Frequency Module
Frequency Module
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
16-CH Voltage Input Module
16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
Logic Input Module
CAN Bus Monitor Module*
CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module*
SENT Monitor Module*
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
Abbreviation
HS10M12
HS10M12
HS1M16
NONISO_10M12
HV (with RMS)
HV (AAF, RMS)
UNIVERSAL
UNIVERSAL(AAF)
TEMP/HPV
TEMP/HPV
STRAIN_NDIS
STRAIN_DSUB
ACCL/VOLT
FREQ
FREQ
HS100M12
HS100M12
16CH VOLT
16CH TEMP/VOLT
LOGIC
CAN MONITOR
CAN & LIN
SENT
4CH 1M16
*The CAN bus monitor, CAN&LIN bus monitor, and SENT monitor modules can be used on the DL850EV. They
cannot be used on the DL850E.
701250
HS10M12
Nameplate
Top line:
Model
Bottom line: Abbreviation
The location varies depending on the module.
In this manual, input modules are referred to by their model names and abbreviations.
For example, the High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module is referred to as the 701250 (HS10M12).
However, if a module has already been referred to previously, it may be referred to only by its model
name (for example, 701250).
Note
To use the DL850E/DL850EV with 701250 and 701255 modules shipped between August 2006 and June
2007, you must update the module firmware. If error code 916 appears when you turn on the DL850E/
DL850EV, it may be necessary to update the firmware of the aforementioned modules. Prepare the module
serial numbers, and contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. The dealer will update the module firmware
for a fee.
viii
IM DL850E-03EN
Checking the Contents of the Package
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
The optional accessories below are available for purchase separately. Check that all contents are
present and undamaged.
• Use the accessories specified in this manual. Moreover, use the accessories of this product only
with Yokogawa products that specify them as accessories.
• Use the accessories of this product within the rated range of each accessory. When using several
accessories together, use them within the specification range of the accessory with the lowest
rating.
Name
Isolated probe
Model
700929
1:1 BNC safety
adapter lead
701901
1:1 safety adapter
lead
701904
Measurement lead
758933
Alligator clip (dolphin
type)
Safety mini-clip
(hook type)
Alligator clip adapter
Alligator clip adapter
701954
Note
10:1 safety probe for the 701250, 720250, 701251,
701281, 720281, 720210, 720211, and 720254
1000 Vrms CAT II
100:1 safety probe for the 701250, 720250, 701251,
720210, 720211, and 720254
300 Vrms CAT III
150 Arms, DC to 10 MHz. Used by connecting to a
probe power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power
supply (701934; sold separately).
300 Vrms CAT III
500 Arms, DC to 2 MHz. Used by connecting to a
probe power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power
supply (701934; sold separately).
300 Vrms
30 Arms, DC to 100 MHz. Used by connecting to a
probe power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power
supply (701934; sold separately).
300 Vrms
30 Arms, DC to 50 MHz. Used by connecting to a
probe power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power
supply (701934; sold separately).
Vrms
5 Arms, DC to 50 MHz. Used by connecting to a probe
power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power supply
(701934; sold separately).
Vrms
5 Arms, DC to 120 MHz. Used by connecting to a
probe power terminal (/P4 option) or a probe power
supply (701934; sold separately).
300 Vrms CAT III
AC 0 to 50 Arms, (10 mV/A)
600 Vrms CAT III
AC 0 to 200 Arms, (2.5 mV/A)
—
For non-isolated input on the 701255: 600 V or less
For isolated input other than above: 42 V or less
1000V (DC+ACpeak) 10:1 safety probe, wide temperature range, for isolated
CAT II
BNC input, for the 701250, 720250, 701251, 720210,
720211, and 720254
1000 Vrms CAT III
Switchable between 1000:1 and 100:1
Measurable voltage: 1400 Vpeak (1000 Vrms)
1000V (DC+ACpeak) Switchable between 100:1 and 10:1
CAT III
Measurable voltage: 500 Vpeak (350 Vrms)
1000 Vrms CAT III
Switchable between 1000:1 and 100:1
Measurable voltage: 7000 Vpeak (5000 Vrms)
1000 Vrms CAT II
For use with the 701250, 720250, 701251, 720210,
720211, and 720254. Used with the following items
(which are sold separately): the 701954, B9852MM,
B9852MN, 758922, 758929, or 758921.
1000 Vrms CAT II
For use with the 701267 and 720268. Used with
600 Vrms CAT III
the following items (which are sold separately): the
701954, B9852MM, B9852MN, 758922, 758929, or
758921.
1000 Vrms CAT III
1 m in length; for use with the 701267 or 720268. Used
with the following items (which are sold separately):
the 701954, B9852MM, B9852MN, 758922, 758929, or
758921.
1000 Vrms CAT III
Two pieces in one set (red/black)
B9852MM
B9852MN
758922
758929
1000 Vrms CAT III
1000 Vrms CAT III
300 Vrms CAT II
1000 Vrms CAT II
701947
Current probe
701930
701931
701932
701933
701917
701918
Clamp-on probe
10:1 passive probe
720930
720931
701940
702902
Differential probe
700924
700925
701926
IM DL850E-03EN
Safety standard
1000 Vrms CAT II
Black
Red
Two pieces in one set
Two pieces in one set
Manual No.
IM 700929-01E
—
—
—
—
IM 701947-01E
IM 701930-01E
IM 701931-01E
IM 701932-01E
IM 701933-01E
IM 701917-01EN
IM 701917-01EN
IM 720930-01EN
IM 720930-01EN
IM 701940-01E
IM 702902-01EN
IM 700924-01E
IM 700925-01E
IM 701926-01E
—
—
—
—
ix
Checking the Contents of the Package
Name
Fork terminal
adapter
Cable1
Model
758921
Safety standard
1000 Vrms CAT II
Note
Two pieces in one set (red/black). For 4 mm screws.
Manual No.
—
366926
—
—
Banana–alligator clip 366961
cable
High-speed logic
700986
probe
Isolated logic probe 700987
—
1 m logic probe
3 m logic probe
Isolated logic
measurement lead
External I/O cable
1 m safety BNC
cable
2 m safety BNC
cable
Safety BNC-tobanana adapter
Probe power supply
702911
702912
758917
—
—
1000 Vrms CAT II
720911
701902
—
1000 Vrms CAT II
For measuring low voltage of less than or equal to 42
V
For measuring low voltage of less than or equal to 42
V for the 701261, 701262, 701265, or 720266
42 V or less, 8 bits, non-isolated, response speed of 1
μs
8 bits, each channel isolated, response speed of 20 ms
(for AC)
8 bits, non-isolated
8 bits, non-isolated
Two pieces in one set. Used with the 758922 or
758929 adapter. The adapters are sold separately.
For external I/O
—
701903
1000 Vrms CAT II
—
—
758924
500 Vrms CAT II
Shunt resistor
16-CH scanner box
Cable
Bridgehead
—
250 Vrms CAT II
—
—
IM 700987-01E
—
—
—
—
—
For the 701250, 720250, 701251, 701255, 720210,
—
and 720211
701934
—
High current output power supply for external probes IM 701934-01E
(four outputs)
438920
—
250 Ω ± 0.1%
—
438921
—
100 Ω ± 0.1%
—
438922
—
10 Ω ± 0.1%
—
Accessory: Protection cover 1, Protection cover screw 1, Attaching plate 1, Binding screw 2
701953- —
For the 720221; cable length: 1 m
—
L1
701953- —
For the 720221; cable length: 3 m
—
L3
705926
—
1 m in length; for connecting the 720221 and 701953 —
705927
—
3 m in length; for connecting the 720221 and 701953 —
701955
—
NDIS, bridge resistance: 120 Ω
IM 701955-01E
701956
—
NDIS, bridge resistance: 350 Ω
701957
—
DSUB, bridge resistance: 120 Ω, shunt-cal support
IM 701957-01E
701958
—
DSUB, bridge resistance: 350 Ω, shunt-cal support
701948
1000Vrms CAT II
For the 700929/701947
IM 701948-01E
701906
1000Vrms CAT III
For the 700924/701926
IM 701906-01E
701963
Has three pockets
—
701970
—
For the DC power supply model (/DC)
—
Plug-on clip
Long test clip
Soft carrying case
DC power cord
(Cigarette lighter
plug type)
DC power cord
701971
—
For the DC power supply model (/DC)
—
(Alligator clip type)
GPS antenna
A1058ER —
GPS interface model (/C30)
—
Optional accessories (sold separately) are not covered by warranty of this instrument.
Sold individually.
1 Use cables (366926) that YOKOGAWA has been shipping since February 4, 1998. Cables (366926) shipped before this date
cannot be used in combination with the DL850E/DL850EV input modules.
x
IM DL850E-03EN
Checking the Contents of the Package
Isolated probe
700929
Isolated probe
701947
Current probe
701917
Current probe
701918
Differential probe
700924
Measurement lead
7589331
Clamp-on probe
720930
Safety miniclip
(hook type)
B9852MM
B9852MN
High-speed logic probe
700986
Clamp-on probe
720931
Current probe
701932
10:1 passive probe
701940
Differential probe
701926
Differential probe
700925
Alligator clip
(dolphin type)
701954
Banana–alligator
clip cable
366961
Current probe
701931
Current probe
701930
Alligator clip
adapter
758922
Isolated logic probe
700987
Current probe
701933
10:1 passive probe
(wide temperature range)
702902
1:1 safety
adapter lead
7019041
1:1 BNC safety
adapter lead
7019011
Alligator clip
adapter
758929
Fork terminal
adapter
758921
Logic probes
702911 (1 m)/702912 (3 m)
Probe power supply
701934
POW
ER
PRO
BE
Isolated logic
measurement lead
758917
External I/O cable
720911
Safety BNC cable
(1 m) 701902
Cable
366926
1
PRO
BE
SUP
PLY
OUT
PUT
2
PRO
BE
3
PRO
BE
4
Safety BNC cable
(2 m) 701903
Soft carrying case
701963
Safety
BNC-to-banana
adapter
758924
Plug-on clip
701948
16-CH scanner box
7019532
Long test clip
701906
Cable
705926 (1 m)
705927 (3m)
Bridgehead
701955 (NDIS, 120 Ω)
701956 (NDIS, 350 Ω)
Bridgehead
701957 (DSUB, 120 Ω)
701958 (DSUB, 350 Ω)
DC power cable
DC power cable
(Cigarette lighter plug type) (Alligator clip type)
701970
701971
GPS antenna
A1058ER
1 The 1:1 BNC safety adapter lead (701901), the 1:1 safety adapter lead (701904), and the measurement lead (758933)
must be used with one of the following accessories (which are sold separately): alligator clip (dolphin type: 701954),
safety miniclip (hook type: B9852MM and B9852MN), alligator adapter (758922 or 758929), or fork terminal adapter
(758921).
2 The length of the 16-CH scanner box (701953) cable varies depending on the 16-CH scanner box suffix code.
IM DL850E-03EN
xi
Checking the Contents of the Package
Spare Parts (Sold Separately)
The spare parts below are available for purchase separately. Check that all contents are present and
undamaged.
For information about ordering spare parts, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Name
Printer roll paper
Terminal block
xii
Part No.
B9988AE
A1800JD
Minimum Q’ty
10
1
Note
Thermo-sensitive paper, 111 mm × 10 m
For the 720220 input module
IM DL850E-03EN
Safety Precautions
This product is designed to be used by a person with specialized knowledge.
This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument (provided with a terminal for protective earth
grounding).
The general safety precautions described herein must be observed during all phases of operation.
If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by the
instrument may be impaired. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply
with these requirements.
This manual is part of the product and contains important information. Store this manual in a safe place
close to the instrument so that you can refer to it immediately. Keep this manual until you dispose of
the instrument.
The following symbols are used on this instrument.
Handle with care. Refer to the user’s manual or service manual. This symbol appears on
dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling
or use. The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those
instructions.
Risk of electric shock
Protective ground or protective ground terminal
Ground or the functional ground terminal (do not use as the protective earth ground terminal)
Alternating current
ON (power)
OFF (power)
French
À manipuler délicatement. Toujours se reporter aux manuels d’utilisation et d’entretien. Ce
symbole a été apposé aux endroits dangereux de l’instrument pour lesquels des consignes
spéciales d’utilisation ou de manipulation ont été émises. Le même symbole apparaît à l’endroit
correspondant du manuel pour identifier les consignes qui s’y rapportent.
Risque de choc électrique
Mise à la terre de protection ou borne de mise à la terre de protection
Borne de terre ou borne de terre fonctionnelle (ne pas utiliser cette borne comme prise de terre.)
Courant alternatif
Marche (alimentation)
Arrêt (alimentation)
IM DL850E-03EN
xiii
Safety Precautions
Failure to comply with the precautions below could lead to injury
or death or damage to the instrument.
WARNING
Use the Instrument Only for Its Intended Purpose
This instrument is a waveform measuring device that monitors and measures electrical
signals. Do not use this instrument for anything other than as a waveform measuring device.
Check the Physical Appearance
Do not use the instrument if there is a problem with its physical appearance.
Use the Correct Power Supply
Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the power supply voltage matches the rated
supply voltage of the DL850E/DL850EV and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the
provided power cord.
Use the Correct Power Cord and Plug
To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord supplied by
YOKOGAWA. The main power plug must be plugged into an outlet with a protective earth
terminal. Do not invalidate this protection by using an extension cord without protective earth
grounding. Additionally, do not use the power cord supplied with this instrument with another
instrument.
Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal
Make sure to connect the protective earth to prevent electric shock before turning on the
power. The power cord that comes with the instrument is a three-prong type power cord.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded three-prong outlet.
Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding
Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the
protective earth terminal. Doing so may result in electric shock or damage to the instrument.
Do Not Use When the Protection Functions Are Defective
Before using this instrument, check that the protection functions, such as the protective
grounding and fuse, are working properly. If you suspect a defect, do not use the instrument.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gasses or vapors. Doing so is
extremely dangerous.
Do Not Remove the Covers or Disassemble or Alter the Instrument
Only qualified YOKOGAWA personnel may remove the covers and disassemble or alter the
instrument. The inside of the instrument is dangerous because parts of it have high voltages.
Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections
Securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement
or to an external control unit. Before touching a circuit, turn off its power and check that it has
no voltage.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the DC Power Supply (When using a DL850EV DC
power supply model)
• Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock.
• Connect the DC power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned
OFF. If you connect the power cord with the power switch turned ON, sparks may be
emitted and can lead to fire.
xiv
IM DL850E-03EN
Safety Precautions
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage, withstand voltage, or
allowable surge voltage.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to furnish protective earth grounding of
the DL850E/DL850EV.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Otherwise,
the electrical protection function and the mechanical protection function will not be
activated.
• Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the surge voltage may occur.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Probes
• To measure high voltage with the 701250 (HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16),
720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), or 720254 (4CH 1M16), use the isolated probes
(700929, 701947), passive probes 702902, 1:1 safety cables (combination of 701901 and
701954), or differential probes (700924, 700925, 701926).
• Be sure to connect the ground lead of the differential probe (700924, 700925, 701926) to
the functional grounding terminal on the right side panel of the DL850E/DL850EV before
connecting to the measurement target. Not doing so may cause high voltage to appear in
the BNC connector of the differential probe.
• When using the 701255 (NONISO_10M12), be sure to fasten the module screws.
Fastening the module screws activates the protection function and the non-isolation
function. It is extremely dangerous if you do not fasten the screws. Also, when you measure
high voltages above 42 V, be sure to use the passive probe 701940.
• The BNC portion of the passive probe 701940 is metal, so if you use it with isolated input (the
701250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), etc.), for safety, be sure to only use it with voltages
at or below 42 V.(Do not connect voltage above 42 V to both the High and Low sides.)
For non-isolated inputs (701255 (NONISO_10M12), etc.), fasten the module screws as
described before.
• When you apply high voltages to the 701267 (HV (with RMS), or 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)),
use the measurement leads (combination of 758933 and 701954) or 1:1 safety cables
(combination of 701904 and 701954).
• The measurement category of the 701267 (HV (with RMS)) is 400V-CAT II on the low side
and 700V-CAT II on the high side. Use caution because the overvoltage tolerance differs
between the low and high sides.
Measurement Category
The measurement category of this instrument’s signal input terminals varies depending on the
modules that are installed. Use the instrument within the scope of the measurement category
that corresponds to the module specifications. Do not use the instrument outside the scope of
the measurement category that corresponds to the module specifications.
Install or Use the Instrument in Appropriate Locations
• Do not install or use the instrument outdoors or in locations subject to rain or water.
• Install the instrument so that you can immediately remove the power cord if an abnormal or
dangerous condition occurs.
CAUTION
Operating Environment Limitations
This product is a Class A (for industrial environments) product. Operation of this product in a
residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference.
IM DL850E-03EN
xv
Safety Precautions
French
AVERTISSEMENT
Utiliser l’instrument aux seules fins pour lesquelles il est prévu
Cet instrument est un appareil de mesure de forme d’onde pour le contrôle et la mesure des
signaux électriques. Ne pas utiliser cet instrument à d’autres fins que celles de mesure de
forme d’onde.
Inspecter l’apparence physique
Ne pas utiliser l’instrument si son intégrité physique semble être compromise.
Vérifier l’alimentation
Avant de brancher le cordon d’alimentation, vérifier que la tension source correspond à
la tension d’alimentation nominale du DL850E/DL850EV et qu’elle est compatible avec la
tension nominale maximale du cordon d’alimentation.
Utiliser le cordon d’alimentation et la fiche adaptés
Pour éviter les risques de choc électrique ou d’incendie, utilisez le cordon d’alimentation fourni
par YOKOGAWA. La fiche doit être branchée sur une prise secteur raccordée à la terre. En
cas d’utilisation d’une rallonge, celle-ci doit être impérativement reliée à la terre. Par ailleurs,
n’utilisez pas le cordon d’alimentation fourni pour cet instrument avec un autre appareil.
Brancher la prise de terre
Avant de mettre l’instrument sous tension, penser à brancher la prise de terre pour éviter tout
choc électrique. Le cordon d’alimentation livré avec l’instrument est doté de trois broches.
Brancher le cordon d’alimentation sur une prise de courant à trois plots et mise à la terre.
Ne pas entraver la mise à la terre de protection
Ne jamais neutraliser le fil de terre interne ou externe, ni débrancher la borne de mise à la
terre. Cela pourrait entraîner un choc électrique ou endommager l’instrument.
Ne pas utiliser lorsque les fonctions de protection sont défectueuses
Avant d’utiliser l’instrument, vérifier que les fonctions de protection, telles que le raccordement
à la terre et le fusible, fonctionnent correctement. En cas de dysfonctionnement possible, ne
pas utiliser l’instrument.
Ne pas utiliser dans un environnement explosif
Ne pas utiliser l’instrument en présence de gaz ou de vapeurs inflammables. Cela pourrait
être extrêmement dangereux.
Ne pas retirer le capot, ni démonter ou modifier l’instrument
Seul le personnel YOKOGAWA qualifié est habilité à retirer le capot et à démonter ou modifier
l’instrument. Certains composants à l’intérieur de l’instrument sont à haute tension et par
conséquent, représentent un danger.
Relier l’instrument à la terre avant de le brancher sur des connexions externes
Connectez le conducteur de terre avant de raccorder le dispositif cible ou une unité de
commande externe. Avant de toucher le dispositif cible, mettez l’instrument hors tension, et
vérifiez qu’aucune tension ni aucun courant ne sont émis.
Précautions à prendre avec l’alimentation en courant continu (lors de l’utilisation d’un
DL850EV à alimentation en CC)
• Veillez à raccorder l’instrument à la terre pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique.
• Branchez le cordon d’alimentation CC après avoir vérifié que l’interrupteur d’alimentation
de l’instrument est sur OFF. Si vous reliez le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’interrupteur
électrique est sur ON, des étincelles peuvent jaillir et provoquer un incendie.
xvi
IM DL850E-03EN
Safety Precautions
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Ne pas dépasser les valeurs maximales de tension d’entrée, de tension de maintien ou de
surtension admissible.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours relier le DL850E/DL850EV à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours serrer les vis des modules, à défaut
de quoi les fonctions de protection électrique et de protection mécanique ne seront pas
activées.
• Éviter les connexions continues dans les environnements pouvant être soumis à surtension.
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation de sondes
• Lors de la mesure de tensions élevées à l’aide du 701250 (HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12),
701251 (HS1M16), 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12) ou 720254 (4CH 1M16),
utiliser une sonde isolée (700929 ou 701947), un câble de sécurité 1:1 (701901 et 701954
conjointement) ou une sonde différentielle (700924, 700925 ou 701926).
• Bien relier le fil de terre de la sonde différentielle (700924, 700925, 701926) à la borne
de mise à la terre opérationnelle, sur le panneau droit de DL850E/DL850EV avant de le
relier à la cible de la mesure. Le fait de ne pas respecter cette consigne risque d’entraîner
l’apparition d’une tension élevée au niveau du connecteur BNC de la sonde différentielle.
• Lors de l’utilisation du 701255 (NONISO_10M12), veillez à serrer les vis du module. Le
serrage des vis de module active la fonction de protection et celle de non-isolation. La
situation est extrêmement dangereuse lorsque les vis ne sont pas serrées. Lorsque vous
mesurez des hautes tensions supérieures à 42 V, veillez également à utiliser la sonde
passive 701940.
• La partie BNC de la sonde passive 701940 est en métal ; si vous l’utilisez avec l’entrée
isolée (la 701250 (HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), etc.), veillez à
l’utiliser uniquement à des tensions inférieures ou égales à 42 V pour des raisons de
sécurité (ne reliez pas une tension supérieure à 42 V sur les côtés Haut et Bas).
Pour les entrées non isolées (701255 (NONISO_10M12), etc.), serrez les vis du module
comme décrit ci-dessus.
• Lorsque vous appliquez de hautes tensions au 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) ou 720268 (HV
(AAF, RMS)), utilisez un cordon de mesure (758933 et 701954 conjointement) ou un câble
de sécurité 1:1 (701904 et 701954 conjointement).
• La catégorie de mesure du 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) est 400 V-CAT II dans la partie basse
et 700V-CAT II dans la partie haute. Faites attention car la tolérance de surtension diffère
entre les côtés bas et haut.
Catégorie de mesure
La catégorie de mesure de ces bornes d’entrée de signal de l’instrument varie en fonction
des modules installés. Utilisez l’instrument dans les limites de la catégorie de mesure qui
correspondent aux spécifications du module. N’utilisez pas l’instrument en dehors des limites
de la catégorie de mesure qui correspondent aux spécifications du module.
Installer et utiliser l’instrument aux emplacements appropriés
• Ne pas installer, ni utiliser l’instrument à l’extérieur ou dans des lieux exposés à la pluie ou
à l’eau.
• Installer l’instrument de manière à pourvoir immédiatement le débrancher du secteur en
cas de fonctionnement anormal ou dangereux.
ATTENTION
Limitations relatives à l’environnement opérationnel
Ce produit est un produit de classe A (pour environnements industriels). L’utilisation de ce
produit dans un zone résidentielle peut entraîner une interférence radio que l’utilisateur sera
tenu de rectifier.
IM DL850E-03EN
xvii
Sales in Each Country or Region
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive
(This directive is valid only in the EU.)
This product complies with the WEEE directive marking requirement. This marking indicates
that you must not discard this electrical/electronic product in domestic household waste.
Product Category
With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive, this product is classified as a
“Monitoring and control instruments” product.
When disposing products in the EU, contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V. office.
Do not dispose in domestic household waste.
EU Battery Directive
EU Battery Directive
(This directive is valid only in the EU.)
Batteries are included in this product. This marking indicates they shall be sorted out and
collected as ordained in the EU battery directive.
Battery type: Lithium battery
You cannot replace batteries by yourself. When you need to replace batteries, contact your
local Yokogawa Europe B.V. office.
Authorized Representative in the EEA
Yokogawa Europe B.V. is the authorized representative of Yokogawa Test & Measurement Corporation
for this product in the EEA. To contact Yokogawa Europe B.V., see the separate list of worldwide
contacts, PIM 113-01Z2.
Disposal
When disposing of this instrument, follow the laws and ordinances of the country or region where the
product will be disposed of.
xviii
IM DL850E-03EN
Symbols and Notation Used in This Manual
Unit
k: Denotes 1000.
K: Denotes 1024.
Example: 100 kS/s (sample rate)
Example: 720 KB (file size)
Displayed Characters
Bold characters in procedural explanations are used to indicate panel keys and soft keys that are used
in the procedure and menu items that appear on the screen.
Notes and Cautions
The notes and cautions in this manual are categorized using the following symbols.
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the
instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must
refer to the user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears
in the corresponding place in the user’s manual to identify those instructions.
In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word “WARNING” or
“CAUTION.”
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to
the user, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user
or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and precautions that can be taken to
prevent such occurrences.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
ATTENTION
Note
IM DL850E-03EN
Attire l’attention sur des gestes ou des conditions susceptibles
de provoquer des blessures graves (voire mortelles), et sur les
précautions de sécurité pouvant prévenir de tels accidents.
Attire l’attention sur des gestes ou des conditions susceptibles de
provoquer des blessures légères ou d’endommager l’instrument ou les
données de l’utilisateur, et sur les précautions de sécurité susceptibles
de prévenir de tels accidents.
Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the
instrument.
xix
Contents
List of Manuals....................................................................................................................................i
Regarding the Conventional DL850 and DL850V............................................................................. iii
Checking the Contents of the Package............................................................................................ iv
Safety Precautions.......................................................................................................................... xiii
Sales in Each Country or Region...................................................................................................xviii
Disposal.........................................................................................................................................xviii
Symbols and Notation Used in This Manual................................................................................... xix
Chapter 1 Names and Functions of Parts
1.1
Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel........................................ 1-1
1.2
Panel Keys and Knobs...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3Screens............................................................................................................................1-11
1.4
System Configuration...................................................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 2 Main Features
2.1
Vertical and Horizontal Axes.............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2Triggering.......................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3
Waveform Acquisition........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.4
Waveform Display........................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5
Waveform Computation and Analysis...............................................................................2-11
Chapter 3 Making Preparations for Measurements
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
Handling Precautions........................................................................................................ 3-1
Installing the Instrument.................................................................................................... 3-3
Installing Input Modules..................................................................................................... 3-6
Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off......................3-11
Connecting Probes.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Correcting the Probe Phase............................................................................................ 3-28
Connecting Measurement Leads.................................................................................... 3-30
Connecting Thermocouples............................................................................................ 3-34
Connecting Bridgeheads................................................................................................. 3-36
Connecting a Logic Probe to the Logic Input Module...................................................... 3-39
Connecting an Acceleration Sensor................................................................................ 3-42
Connecting Sensors to the Frequency Module............................................................... 3-45
Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Voltage Input Module.................................................... 3-47
Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module............................... 3-50
Connecting a Cable to the CAN Bus Monitor Module..................................................... 3-54
Connecting a Cable to the CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module........................................... 3-55
Attaching the Panel Sheet............................................................................................... 3-56
Loading Roll Paper into the Built-In Printer (Option)....................................................... 3-57
Connecting an Antenna to the GPS Interface (Option)................................................... 3-59
Chapter 4 Common Operations
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
xx
Key and Jog Shuttle Operations........................................................................................ 4-1
Entering Values and Strings.............................................................................................. 4-3
Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices...................................................................... 4-5
Synchronizing the Clock.................................................................................................. 4-10
Performing Auto Setup.....................................................................................................4-11
IM DL850E-03EN
Contents
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Initializing Settings........................................................................................................... 4-13
Calibrating the DL850E/DL850EV................................................................................... 4-14
Starting and Stopping Waveform Acquisition.................................................................. 4-15
Displaying Help............................................................................................................... 4-16
Chapter 5 External Signal I/O
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
External Trigger Input (TRIGGER IN)................................................................................ 5-1
Trigger Output (TRIGGER OUT)....................................................................................... 5-2
External Clock Input (EXT CLK IN)................................................................................... 5-4
Video Signal Output (VIDEO OUT (XGA))........................................................................ 5-5
GO/NO-GO Determination I/O and External Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)........................... 5-6
IRIG Signal Input (IRIG option)....................................................................................... 5-10
GPS Signal Input (GPS option)........................................................................................5-11
Chapter 6 Specifications
6.1
Signal Input Section.......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2
Triggering Section............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.3
Time Axis........................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.4Display............................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.5Features............................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.6FFT.................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.7
Built-in Printer.................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.8Storage............................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.9
USB Ports for Peripherals............................................................................................... 6-13
6.10 Auxiliary I/O Section........................................................................................................ 6-14
6.11 Computer Interface.......................................................................................................... 6-16
6.12 General Specifications.................................................................................................... 6-17
6.13 Module Specifications..................................................................................................... 6-22
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (701250)................................................. 6-22
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720250)................................................. 6-24
High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (701251) ........................ 6-26
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module (701255)......................................... 6-28
High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS) (701267)............................ 6-29
High-Voltage 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with AAF, RMS) (720268)...................... 6-31
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module (701261) /Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module
(with AAF) (701262)........................................................................................................ 6-33
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (701265)................................... 6-35
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (low noise) (720266)................. 6-37
Strain Module (NDIS) (701270)....................................................................................... 6-39
Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF) (701275).......................................................... 6-43
Frequency Module (701281)........................................................................................... 6-45
Frequency Module (720281)........................................................................................... 6-49
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 and 720211)........................... 6-53
16-CH Voltage Input Module (720220)............................................................................ 6-55
16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module (720221)....................................................... 6-56
Logic Input Module (720230)........................................................................................... 6-58
CAN Bus Monitor Module (720240)................................................................................ 6-59
CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module (720241)...................................................................... 6-60
SENT Monitor Module (720243)...................................................................................... 6-61
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (720254).............................................................. 6-62
6.14 Logic Probe Specifications.............................................................................................. 6-64
6.15 16-CH Scanner Box Specifications................................................................................. 6-66
6.16 External Dimensions....................................................................................................... 6-67
IM DL850E-03EN
xxi
1
2
3
4
5
6
App
Index
Contents
Appendix
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
xxii
Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate...... App-1
Relationship between the Main Channel Sample Rate,
Sub Channel Data Update Rate, and Acquisition Memory Writing Rate.................... App-16
Relationship between the Record Length and the Acquisition Mode................ App-19
Default Values................................................................................................... App-22
USB Keyboard Key Assignments...................................................................... App-27
Block Diagrams................................................................................................. App-29
High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS) (701260)
Specifications.................................................................................................... App-32
Frequency Module (701280) Specifications...................................................... App-34
IM DL850E-03EN
Chapter 1
1.1
Names and Functions of Parts
Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and
Left Side Panel
Names and Functions of Parts
Top Panel
1
2
Handle
3
4
5
6
Vent
Built-in printer (optional)
You can print the display.
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
1-1
1.1 Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel
Front Panel
Soft keys
Use to select items on the setup menus that
appear during configuration.
ESC key
LCD
Use to clear setup menus and pop-up menus.
Description of the displayed
contents → Section 1.3
Jog shuttle
RESET
SET
ESC
START / STOP
SETUP
DISPLAY
CAL
X-Y
VERTICAL 7
CH 1
CH
5
CH
9
CH 13
2
ACQUIRE
CH
6
DUAL CAPTURE
8
2
3
CH
7
CH 11
CH14
SCALE
CH
5
CH 10
0
FILE
MENU
CH
4
1
SAVE
9
3
TRIG’D
MODE
4
CH
8
CH12
CH15
CH16
EXP
k
m
ENTER
POSITION
PUSH
O DIV
NUM LOCK
TIME / DIV
CH
6
ALL CH
HORIZONTAL
Use to change values and move cursors.
Turn the shuttle ring to vary the rate at
which values change. The rate is based on
the shuttle ring angle.
Setup and execution keys and knobs
Explanation → Section 1.2
TRIGGER
POSITION / DELAY
ACTION
MANUAL TRIG
ANALYSIS
MATH
HISTORY
MEASURE
HELP
PRINT
PRINT MENU
MENU
DUAL CAPTURE
SNAP SHOT
HDD RECORDING
CLEAR TRACE
CURSOR
GO / NO-GO
FFT
POSITION
ZOOM
MAG
KEY PROTECT
SIMPLE / ENHANCED
UTILTY
CLR
SHIFT
SEARCH
PUSH
Z 1
Z 2
PUSH
COMP
Setup and execution keys
Explanation → Section 1.2
KEY PROTECT key
Locks the keys. → Section 1.2
Probe compensation signal output terminal
(1 kHz/1 Vp-p)
Transmits correction signals for probes.
Probe correction procedure → Section 3.6
Functional ground terminal
Connect a ground wire to this terminal when
performing probe correction.
1-2
IM DL850E-03EN
1.1 Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel
1
Right Side Panel
There are a total of eight slots. Input module
insertion and removal method → Section 3.3
Slot
1
2
3
Names and Functions of Parts
Input channel
arrangement
Input module installation slot
4
2
CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
3
CH9 CH11 CH13 CH15
Functional ground
terminal
Use to connect the ground wire
of a high-voltage differential
probe or enhance the grounding
of the measurement equipment.
Probe connection method
→ Section 3.5
CH10 CH12 CH14 CH16
Slot
5
6
7
4
8
Stand
Setup method → Section 3.2
PROBE
POWER
(± 12V DC )
Probe power supply
terminal (optional)
Empty-slot protection
cover panel
Use to supply power (±12 V)
to current probes.
Probe connection method
→ Section 3.5
Attach to slots that do not have
input modules installed.
5
6
App
Input Modules
The following input modules are available.
High-Speed 10 MS/s,
12-Bit Isolation Module
HS10M12 (model: 701250)
High-Speed High-Resolution
1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
HS1M16 (model: 701251)
High-Speed 10 MS/s,
12-Bit Non-Isolation Module
NONISO_10M12 (model: 701255)
Acceleration/Voltage Module
(with AAF)
ACCL/VOLT (model: 701275)
High-Speed 100 MS/s,
12-Bit Isolation Module
HS100M12 (model: 720210 and 720211)
Universal (Voltage/Temp.)
Module
UNIVERSAL (model: 701261)
Universal (Voltage/Temp.)
Module (with AAF)
UNIVERSAL (AAF) (model: 701262)
Temperature, High Precision
Voltage Isolation Module
TEMP/HPV
(model: 701265 and 720266)
Frequency Module
FREQ (model: 701281)
Signal input
terminal (2ch)
IM DL850E-03EN
Index
High-Speed 10 MS/s,
12-Bit Isolation Module
HS10M12 (model: 720250)
Signal input
terminal (2ch)
High-Voltage 100 kS/s,
16-Bit Isolation Module
(with RMS)
HV (with RMS) (model: 701267)
H input terminal
L input terminal
(2ch)
H input terminal
L input terminal
(2ch)
1-3
1.1 Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel
High-Voltage 1 MS/s,
16-Bit Isolation Module
(with AAF and RMS)
HV (AAF RMS) (model: 720268)
Strain Module (NDIS)
STRAIN_NDIS (model: 701270)
H input terminal
L input terminal
(2ch)
Frequency Module
FREQ (model: 720281)
Logic Input Module
LOGIC (model: 720230)
Signal input
terminal (16ch)
CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module
CAN & LIN (model: 720241)
CAN bus signal
input terminal
CAN bus signal
input terminal
LIN bus signal
input terminal
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation
Module
4CH 1M16 (model: 720254)
SENT signal
input terminal
1-4
Signal input
terminal (2ch)
16-CH Temperature/Voltage
Input Module
16CH TEMP/VOLT (model: 720221)
Signal input
terminal (16ch)
CAN Bus Monitor Module
CAN MONITOR (model: 720240)
Logic probe
terminals
SENT Monitor Module
SENT (model: 720243)
Signal input
terminal (2ch)
16-CH Voltage Input Module
16CH VOLT (model: 720220)
Signal input
terminal (2ch)
Strain Module (DSUB, Shunt-Cal)
STRAIN_DSUB (model: 701271)
Signal input
terminal (4ch)
IM DL850E-03EN
1.1 Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel
1
Left Side Panel
GP-IB connector (optional)
You can output the displayed image in an
XGA RGB signal.
Explanation about how to use → Section 5.4
Use to communicate with the DL850E
/DL850EV through the GP-IB interface.
For information about the DL’s
communication features, see the
communications interface user’s
manual.
GO/NO-GO and external
start/stop I/O connector
Transmits GO/NO-GO determination
I/O signals. Can also be used to start
and stop the DL850E/DL850EV
through external control.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 5.5
IRIG input terminal (option)
GP-IB
Vent
Use this terminal to apply external sync
signals.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 5.6 (/C20)
(IEEE488)
External HDD connector
(optional)
External-clock
input terminal
Use to connect an external hard disk.
Explanation about how to use
→ User’s manual
Use when applying an
external clock signal.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 5.3
Power switch
Turning the power on and off
→ Section 3.4
IRIG
100-120/220-240 V AC
200 VA MAX 50/60 Hz
Power inlet
Power connection
→ Section 3.4
SD memory card slot
EXT HDD
EXT I/O
SD
POWER
ON
EXT CLKIN
OFF
VIDEO OUT
(XGA)
TRIGGER
IN
Name plate
OUT
ETHERNET
1000BASE-T
Use to connect an SD memory card.
Explanation about how to use
→ User’s manual
Use when applying an external
trigger signal.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 5.1
Trigger output terminal
Use to transmit trigger signals.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 5.2
Use to connect the DL850E/DL850EV
to a PC that has a USB port.
Explanation about how to use
→ Communication interface user’s
manual
Ethernet port
(1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Use to connect the DL850E/DL850EV
to a LAN. Explanation about how to use
→ Feature’s guide and communication
interface user’s manual
Only the parts that are different from the standard model are shown below.
Power supply status LED
Displays the status of the AC
power supply or DC power supply.
The status indicator
→ Section 3.4
Power switch (AC)
Turning the power on and off
→ Section 3.4
Power switch (DC)
Turning the power on and off
→ Section 3.4
AC power connector
Power connection
→ Section 3.4
DC power connector
Power connection
→ Section 3.4
IM DL850E-03EN
3
4
5
6
App
Index
Use to connect a USB keyboard,
mouse, printer, or storage device.
Explanation about how to use
→ Section 4.3 and User’s manual
DC Power Supply Model (DL850EV)
2
USB port for PCs
USB ports for peripherals
Trigger input terminal
Names and Functions of Parts
Video signal output terminal
1-5
1.1 Top Panel, Front Panel, Right Side Panel, and Left Side Panel
GPS Interface Model
Only the parts that are different from the standard model are shown below.
GPS input terminal (optional)
Use this terminal to apply external sync signals.
Explanation about how to use → Section 3.19 (/C30)
1-6
IM DL850E-03EN
1.2
Panel Keys and Knobs
1
Names and Functions of Parts
Vertical Axis
2
CH1 to CH16 Keys
These keys display menus for turning the display of each channel on and off and configuring settings
such as display label settings, input coupling settings, the probe attenuation or the current-to-voltage
conversion ratio, the bandwidth limit, the vertical position, vertical zoom settings, the offset value,
and linear scaling. Also, you can press a key to select the channel that the SCALE knob will control.
Channel keys illuminate when their corresponding channel is on.
After you press NUM LOCK (see below), you can press a channel key to enter the number displayed
to the upper right of the key in white.
3
4
ALL CH Key
Press this key to display a window in which you can configure all the settings from the menus that
appear when you press CH1 to CH16. The settings appear in a list.
5
NUM LOCK Key
Press this key to use the CH1 to CH16 keys to enter numbers.
SCALE Knob
Use this knob to set the vertical scale. Before you turn this knob, select the target waveform by
pressing a key from CH1 to CH16. If you change the scale while waveform acquisition is stopped, the
setting actually takes effect when you restart waveform acquisition.
POSITION Knob (Vertical POSITION Knob)
Use this knob to adjust the vertical display position (vertical position) of an input waveform. Before you
turn this knob, select the target waveform by pressing a key from CH1 to CH16. This knob has a push
switch. You can press the knob to reset the position to 0.00 div.
VERTICAL 7
CH 1
CH
CH
5
9
CH 13
CH
2
CH
6
4
1
0
SCALE
CH 10
8
CH
3
CH
7
5
2
CH14
CH 11
9
4
CH
8
6
3
CH12
CH15
ALL CH
NUM LOCK
CH
CH16
EXP
k
m
ENTER
POSITION
PUSH
O DIV
Horizontal Axis
TIME/DIV knob
Use this knob to set the time-axis scale. If you change the scale while waveform acquisition is stopped,
the scale change actually takes effect when you restart waveform acquisition.
HORIZONTAL
TIME / DIV
IM DL850E-03EN
1-7
6
App
Index
1.2 Panel Keys and Knobs
TRIGGER Group Keys
(SHIFT+) MODE Key
Displays a menu for selecting the trigger mode. Press SHIFT and then MODE to display a menu for
configuring action-on settings.
POSITION/DELAY Key
Press this key to set the trigger position and the trigger delay.
MANUAL TRIG Key
Press this key to make the DL850E/DL850EV trigger regardless of the trigger settings.
SIMPLE/ENHANCED Key
Displays a trigger setup menu.
TRIG’D
MODE
TRIGGER
POSITION / DELAY
ACTION
MANUAL TRIG
SIMPLE / ENHANCED
Other Keys
ANALYSIS Key
Displays a menu for performing power math. This key is valid on models with the /G5 option.
(SHIFT+) MATH Key
Displays a menu for waveform computation. Press SHIFT and then MATH to display a menu for
configuring FFT computation.
HISTORY Key
Displays a menu for using the history feature to recall data.
(SHIFT+) MEASURE Key
Displays a menu for automated measurement of waveform parameters. Press SHIFT and then
MEASURE to display a menu for GO/NO-GO determination.
CURSOR Key
Displays a menu used when performing cursor measurements.
(SHIFT+) ZOOM Key
Displays a waveform zoom display menu. Press SHIFT and then ZOOM to display a menu for data
searching (the search & zoom function).
MAG Knob
Use this knob to set the zoom factors for the Zoom1 and Zoom2 zoom boxes. This knob has a push
switch. Press the MAG knob to switch the zoom box whose zoom factor is set by it.
◄POSITION► Knob (Zoom POSITION knob)
Use this knob to set the zoom position. This knob has a push switch. Press the POSITION knob to
switch the zoom box whose zoom position is set by it.
ANALYSIS
MATH
HISTORY
POSITION
ZOOM
MAG
CURSOR
GO / NO-GO
FFT
MEASURE
SEARCH
PUSH
1-8
Z 1
Z 2
PUSH
IM DL850E-03EN
1.2 Panel Keys and Knobs
1
RESET Key
SET Key
Names and Functions of Parts
Resets the value to its default value.
2
Press this key to select the menu item that you have moved the cursor to using the jog shuttle. You
can also press the SET key to start entering a value or characters.
Arrow Keys (▲▼►◄ keys)
Use the ►◄ keys to move the cursor between numeric digits. Use the ▲▼ keys to increment or
decrement the value of a digit. You can also use the ▲▼ keys to select setup items.
3
START/STOP Key
Starts and stops waveform acquisition according to the trigger mode. The key is illuminated while the
DL850E/DL850EV is acquiring waveforms.
4
(SHIFT+) SETUP Key
Displays a menu for initializing the settings to their factory defaults; performing auto setup, which
automatically sets the DL850E/DL850EV according to the input signal; storing and recalling setup
information; and so on. Press SHIFT and then SETUP to display a calibration menu.
5
(SHIFT+) DISPLAY Key
Use this key to configure the display. Press SHIFT and then DISPLAY to display an X-Y display menu.
(SHIFT+) SAVE Key
Press this key to save waveform or screen capture data to a storage medium. Press SHIFT and then
SAVE to display a menu for configuring the save operation.
FILE Key
6
App
Press this key to save or load data from a storage medium or to display a menu for file manipulation.
(SHIFT+) ACQUIRE Key
Index
Displays a menu used to set the waveform acquisition mode. Press SHIFT and then ACQUIRE to
display a menu for configuring the dual capture feature.
RESET
SET
IM DL850E-03EN
START / STOP
SETUP
DISPLAY
CAL
X-Y
SAVE
MENU
FILE
ACQUIRE
DUAL CAPTURE
1-9
1.2 Panel Keys and Knobs
KEY PROTECT Key
When you press this key, it illuminates, and the keys on the front panel are locked. Press the key again
to unlock the keys.
HELP Key
Turns on and off the help window, which explains various features.
PRINT Key
Use this key to save and print screen capture data.
PRINT MENU Key
Displays a menu for printing screen captures to the built-in printer or a network printer or displays a
menu for saving screen capture data to a storage medium.
KEY PROTECT
HELP
PRINT
PRINT MENU
MENU
SNAPSHOT Key
Retains the currently displayed waveforms on the screen in white. Snapshot waveforms can be saved
and loaded.
CLEAR TRACE Key
Clears the waveform acquired using the snapshot function and accumulated waveforms.
UTILITY Key
Displays a menu for configuring system, communication, network, and environment settings; for
performing self tests; and for displaying system information (information about installed modules,
installed options, and the firmware version).
SHIFT Key
Press this key once to access the features that are written in purple below each key. The shift key
illuminates when the keys are shifted. Pressing the key again clears the shifted condition.
SNAPSHOT CLEAR TRACE
CLR
UTILITY
SHIFT
Note
Press SHIFT and then CLEAR TRACE to switch from remote mode to local mode. For details, see the
communication interface user’s manual.
Notes about Using of Knobs
The vertical POSITION, ZOOM MAG, and ZOOM POSITION knobs have push switches. Push the
knobs straight. If you push a knob at an angle, it may not operate properly. If this happens, push the
knob straight one more time.
CAUTION
Do not push the knob sideways with strong force. Doing so may break the knobs.
French
ATTENTION
Ne pas enfoncer les boutons latéralement en employant une force excessive. Cela pourrait
les endommager, voire les casser.
1-10
IM DL850E-03EN
1.3
Screens
1
2
The setup channel
and its vertical scale
and position
Display record length
Voltage-axis scale value
3
Sample rate
Trigger position
Channel number of
the display range
Acquisition mode
(See the explanation below.)
4
TIME/DIV
Channel number of the
displayed waveform
Trigger level
5
Vertical position
Ground level
The display is
inverted when
Invert is set to ON.
Setup menu
Comment
Trigger mode
Waveform acquisition
count
Trigger setting
Screen capture output
destination
Index
Level indicator
Time of the waveform time reference
When Trigger Mode is set to OnStart, the reference is
the measurement start time.
When Trigger Mode is set to Auto and the roll display
is in use, the reference is the measurement stop time.
In other situations, the reference is the trigger time.
Waveform acquisition condition
Stopped
Running
Waiting for trigger
Pre...: Acquiring pre data
Post...: Acquiring post data
HD out: Continuous writing to hard disk
Acquisition Mode Indication
Normal mode
Envelope mode
Average mode
Box average mode
Note
The DL850E/DL850EV LCD may include a few defective pixels. For details, see section 6.4, “Display.”
IM DL850E-03EN
6
App
Time from the
trigger position
Normal:
Env:
Avg:
BoxAvg:
Names and Functions of Parts
Normal Waveform Display
1-11
1.3 Screens
Zoom Waveform Display
Display position of the Zoom1 zoom waveform
with respect to the display record length
Display position of the Zoom2 zoom waveform
with respect to the display record length
Zoom1 zoom range
Zoom2 zoom range
Time/div for the
normal waveforms
Normal waveform
display area
(Main window)
Time/div for the
Zoom1 waveforms
Time/div for the
Zoom2 waveforms
Zoom window
display area
Zoom1 window
display area
Zoom2 window
display area
Dual Capture Display
Time reference mark
Time/div for the
normal waveform
Normal waveform
display area
(Main window)
Number of the
captured waveform
to display
Time from the
reference point
Time/div for the
captured waveform
Waveform display
area for the zoom
and capture
windows
Trigger position
of the captured
waveform
Date and time of the
trigger point of the
captured waveform
Time-axis scale value of the
captured waveform
Captured waveform display area
Number of captured waveform acquisitions
Stop date and time of the main waveform
1-12
IM DL850E-03EN
1.4
System Configuration
1
Names and Functions of Parts
USB printer
2
USB PERIPHERAL
interface
USB keyboard
3
Internal HDD
(optional)
Built-in printer
(optional)
USB mouse
Signal input
• External clock input
• External trigger input
• Clock sync signal input (option)
• GO/NO-GO determination I/O
• Video signal output
• Trigger output
4
DUT
5
• Module1
• Probe2
• Measurement lead
DL850E/
DL850EV
1 • High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
• High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit
Isolation Module
• High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation
Module
• High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
(with RMS)
• High-Voltage 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
(with AAF and RMS)
• Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module
• Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module (with AAF)
• Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation
Module
• Strain Module (NDIS)
• Strain Module (DSUB, Shunt-Cal)
• Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF)
• Frequency Module
• High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
• 16-CH Voltage Input Module
• 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
• Logic Input Module
• CAN Bus Monitor Module
• CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module
• SENT Monitor Module
• 4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
Saving/loading of data
USB PERIPHERAL
interface
External USB device
External HDD
interface
(optional)
HDD
2 • Differential probe
• Current probe
• Logic probe
• FTP server
• FTP client
• Web server
• GP-IB interface (optional)
• USB interface
(remote control through the use of commands)
• Waveform data
• Setup data
• Image data
PC
Printer
USB memory/SD
memory card
Ethernet interface
FTP
server
Print
server
PC
Network printer
Printer
IM DL850E-03EN
1-13
6
App
Index
Chapter 2
2.1
Main Features
Vertical and Horizontal Axes
1
2
Vertical Axis
DL850E/DL850EV Measurement Items
When the DL850E/DL850EV is equipped with the modules listed below, it can measure voltage,
temperature, strain, acceleration, frequency, logic, CAN bus signals, LIN bus signals, SENT signals,
and so on.
Voltage
701250 (HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), 701255 (NONISO_10M12), 701267
(HV (with RMS)), 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)), 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701261
(UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), 720266 (TEMP/HPV), 701275
(ACCL/VOLT), 720254 (4CH 1M16)
Voltage (For the 16-CH Voltage Input Module)
Main Features
This section explains how to configure the signal input settings and the amplitude-direction display
settings. The items that can be set vary depending on the installed modules. The channel menu that
corresponds to the key you pressed (CH1 to CH16) appears. You can set the various vertical axis
settings for each channel. Press ALL CH to display a screen in which you can configure the settings of
all channels while viewing the settings in a list.
3
4
5
6
App
720220 (16CH VOLT)
Temperature
701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), 720266 (TEMP/HPV)
Temperature (For the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module)
720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)
Strain
701270 (STRAIN_NDIS), 701271 (STRAIN_DSUB)
Acceleration
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
Frequency
701281 (FREQ), 720281 (FREQ)
Logic
720230 (LOGIC)
CAN Bus Signal Monitoring
720240 (CAN MONITOR), 720241(CAN & LIN)
This module can only be used with the DL850EV.
LIN Bus Signal Monitoring
720241 (CAN & LIN)
This module can only be used with the DL850EV.
SENT Signal Monitoring
720243 (SENT)
This module can only be used with the DL850EV.
IM DL850E-03EN
2-1
Index
2.1 Vertical and Horizontal Axes
Vertical Scale
The vertical scale is used to adjust the displayed waveform amplitude so that you can easily view
signals. You can set the vertical scale to determine the value per grid square (1 div) displayed on the
screen and to set the measurement range.
Use the SCALE knob to set the vertical scale for each channel.
Vertical Position
Because the DL850E/DL850EV can display many waveforms, the waveforms may overlap and be
difficult to view. If this happens, you can adjust the vertical display position to make waveforms easier
to view (vertical position).
Use the POSITION knob to set the vertical position for each channel.
Input Coupling
You can change the input coupling setting to match the signal that you are measuring. By changing the
setting, you can choose how the vertical-axis (voltage-axis) control circuit is coupled to the input signal.
The following types of input coupling are available: DC, AC, GND, TC, DC-RMS, AC-RMS, ACCEL,
and OFF.* Set the appropriate input coupling for each input module.
* You can only select OFF for sub channels on the 16-CH voltage input module or the 16-CH temperature/
voltage input module. Sub channels set to OFF are not measured.
Vertical Zoom
You can zoom the waveform vertically. You can zoom the waveform by setting the vertical magnification
or by setting upper and lower display limits.
Linear Scaling
Linear scaling is a function that converts measured values into physical values and reads them directly.
There two types of linear scaling:
AX + B
Using scaling coefficient A and offset B, the DL850E/DL850EV scales values according to the
equation below.
Y= AX + B (where X is the measured value and Y is the physical value)
P1-P2
The DL850E/DL850EV determines the scale conversion equation (y = ax + b) using four values that
you specify: two measured values (P1:X, P2:X) and the value that each one should be converted to
(P1:Y, P2:Y).
The DL850E/DL850EV scales values using the scale conversion equation that it determines.
Physical values
(scaled values)
P2
P2:Y
P1:Y
y = ax + b
P1
P1:X
P2:X
Measured values
Measurement range
2-2
IM DL850E-03EN
2.1 Vertical and Horizontal Axes
1
Horizontal Axis (Time Axis)
Time Axis Setting
Internal and External Clocks (Time base selection)
Under the initial settings, the DL850E/DL850EV samples the measured signal using the internal clock
signal produced by its internal time-base circuit.
You can also use an external clock signal to control sampling. Apply the external clock signal to the
external clock input terminal. This external clock input is useful for synchronizing to the clock signal of
the waveform that is being measured.
Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and
Sample Rate
If you change the time axis setting, the sample rate and the acquisition-memory record length also
change. For details, see appendix 1.
3
4
5
6
App
Sample Rate
If you change the time axis setting, the sample rate also changes. The sample rate is the number
of samples-per-second (S/s). When the sample rate is low compared to the frequency of the input
signal, the high-frequency components of the waveform are misread as low-frequency components.
To prevent the high-frequency components from being misread, sample the signal at the highest
sample rate possible, or set the waveform acquisition mode to Envelope.
Roll Mode Display
When the trigger mode is Auto, Auto Level, Single, or On Start and the time axis setting is 100 ms/div
or longer, instead of updating waveforms through triggering (update mode), the DL850E/DL850EV
displays the waveforms in roll mode. In roll mode, waveforms scroll from right to left as new data is
captured and the oldest values are deleted from the screen.
IM DL850E-03EN
2
Main Features
Normally, under the initial settings, the time axis scale is set as a length of time per grid division (1 div).
The selectable range is 100 ns/div to 20 days/div. As you adjust the value, the unit changes between
seconds, minutes, hours, and days automatically. Because the horizontal display range is 10 div, the
amount of time on the waveform that is displayed is equal to the time axis setting × 10.
* If a 720210 (HS100M12) or 720211 (HS100M12) module is installed, the lowest setting is 100 ns/div.
Otherwise, it is 1 μs/div.
2-3
Index
2.2
Triggering
A trigger is a cue used to display the waveform on the screen. A trigger occurs when the specified
trigger condition is met, and a waveform is displayed on the screen.
Trigger Modes
The trigger mode determines the conditions for updating the displayed waveforms. There are six
trigger modes: Auto, Auto Level, Normal, Single, N Single, and On Start. The trigger mode setting
applies to all trigger types.
Trigger Types
Triggers can be broadly divided into “simple triggers” and “enhanced triggers.”
Simple Triggers
Input Signal Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the trigger source passes through the specified trigger level in
the specified way (rising edge, falling edge, or rising or falling edge).
Time Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers at the specified date and time and at specified intervals afterwards.
External Signal Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the signal applied to the TRIG IN terminal passes through the
specified trigger level in the specified way (rising or falling edge).
Power Line Signal Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the rising edge of the power supply signal that it is receiving.
This trigger enables you to observe waveforms in synchronization with the power supply frequency.
Enhanced Triggers
A -> B(N) Trigger
After state condition A is met, the DL850E/DL850EV triggers when state condition B is met N times.
Met
A
Met N times
B B
B
Trigger
A Delay B Trigger
After state condition A is met and the specified amount of time elapses, the DL850E/DL850EV
triggers when state condition B is first met.
Met
A
2-4
Delay time
passes
Met
B
Trigger
IM DL850E-03EN
2.2 Triggering
Edge On A Trigger (Enhanced)
While state condition A is met, the DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source
edges.
1
2
Main Features
Condition A is being met
Trigger
Edge detection
3
OR Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges.
AND Trigger
4
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the AND of multiple trigger source conditions. The DL850E/
DL850EV triggers when all the specified conditions are met at a single point.
5
Period Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on a specified period of occurrence of state condition B. The
DL850E/DL850EV triggers when state condition B occurs again.
Met
B
Reference time T
Met
B
6
Trigger
Pulse Width Trigger
App
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers according to the relationship between the state condition B
achievement time and the specified reference times (Time or T1 and T2).
Achievement time
B
Index
Trigger
Wave Window Trigger
The DL850E/DL850EV creates real-time templates (Wave Window) using a number of cycles
directly preceding the current waveforms. The DL850E/DL850EV compares the current waveforms
to the real-time templates and triggers if one of the current waveforms falls outside of its real-time
template.
Reference cycles
(example: the waveforms for the four previous cycles)
Current
waveform
Measured waveform
Average of 1, 2,
or 4 cycles
Real-time template
Trigger
Tolerance width
Average waveform
+ tolerance width
IM DL850E-03EN
The DL850E/DL850EV compares
the current waveform to the
real-time template and triggers if
the current waveform falls
outside of the real-time template.
2-5
2.2 Triggering
Trigger Source
Trigger source refers to the signal that is used to check the specified trigger conditions. You can set
the trigger source to an analog signal, logic signal, realtime math signal, time, external signal, or power
line signal. Select the appropriate trigger source for the trigger type.
Trigger Level
Trigger level refers to the signal level used as a reference for detecting a signal’s rising and falling
edges or high and low states. With simple triggers such as the edge trigger, the DL850E/DL850EV
triggers when the trigger source level passes through the specified trigger level. The range and
resolutions that you can use to set the trigger level vary depending on the type of signal being
measured.
Trigger Slope
Slope refers to the movement of the signal from a low level to a high level (rising edge) or from a high
level to a low level (falling edge). When a slope is used as one of the trigger conditions, it is called a
trigger slope.
Trigger Hysteresis
When the trigger source is an analog signal, you can set a width (hysteresis) to the trigger level so that
the DL850E/DL850EV does not detect edges when the signal level changes within the specified width.
You can set the hysteresis around the trigger level for each type of measured signal.
Trigger Hold-off
The trigger hold-off feature temporarily stops the detection of the next trigger once a trigger has
occurred. This feature is useful in cases when you want to change the waveform acquisition interval,
such as when you are observing a PCM (pulse code modulation) code or other pulse train signal or
when you are using the history feature.
Trigger Position
When you move the trigger position, the ratio of the displayed data before the trigger point (pre-data)
to the data after the trigger point (post-data) changes. When the trigger delay is 0 s, the trigger point
and trigger positions coincide.
Trigger Delay
The DL850E/DL850EV normally displays waveforms before and after the trigger point. You can set a
trigger delay to display waveforms at a specified amount of time after the trigger occurrence.
2-6
IM DL850E-03EN
2.3
Waveform Acquisition
1
Record Length
Record length refers to the number of data points that are stored to the acquisition memory for each
channel. Display record length refers to the data points from the data stored in the acquisition memory
that are displayed on the screen. Normally, the acquisition-memory record length and display record
length are the same, but the time axis setting may cause them to differ. When you change the time
axis setting, the sample rate and record length also change.
On the standard model of the DL850E/DL850EV, you can set the record length to a value between 1
kpoint and 250 Mpoint. Depending on the model, you can set the record length to a value of up to 2
Gpoint.
2
Main Features
Based on the data that has been stored in the acquisition memory, the DL850E/DL850EV performs
various operations, such as displaying waveforms on the screen, computing, measuring cursors, and
automatically measuring waveform parameters.
You can set the number of data points to store in the acquisition memory (the record length), enable or
disable the sample data averaging feature, and so on.
3
4
5
6
Acquisition Mode
Specify how the DL850E/DL850EV processes the sampled data, stores it in the acquisition memory,
and uses it to display waveforms. There are four acquisition modes: Normal, Envelope, Averaging, and
BoxAverage.
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
2-7
2.3 Waveform Acquisition
Hard Disk Recording
When measurement starts, you can record data to an external hard disk that supports eSATA (external
Serial ATA; /HD0 option*) or to an internal hard disk (/HD1 option). The recorded data is saved to files
automatically.
* Models with the /HD0 option are equipped with eSATA connectors. You need to purchase a hard disk that
supports eSATA separately. Note that hard disks that can be used are those whose disk partition style is
MBR and the format is FAT32.
Hard disk recording
Acquisition
memory
External hard disk that
supports eSATA (/HD0 option)
or an internal hard disk
(/HD1 option)
Input signal
Normal measurement
Loading of waveform data*
*: Loaded waveform data cannot be saved.
Acquisition
memory
Input signal
Saving and loading
of waveform data
External eSATA hard disk
Storage media including
the internal hard disk
CAUTION
Do not store more than 512 files in the root directory of the internal hard disk. Doing so will
slow the file access operations to all files. In addition, we cannot guarantee the operation of
the hard disk recording feature when the DL850E/DL850EV is in this state.
French
ATTENTION
Ne pas stocker plus de 512 fichiers dans le répertoire racine du disque dur interne. Ceci
ralentit les opérations d’accès à tous les fichiers. En outre, nous ne pouvons pas garantir le
fonctionnement de la fonction d’enregistrement sur disque dur lorsque le DL850E/DL850EV
est dans cet état.
2-8
IM DL850E-03EN
2.3 Waveform Acquisition
1
History
Zone Search
History Waveforms
(up to 5000 waveforms)
2
Main Features
When waveforms are being measured, the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory as a
result of a trigger occurrence is displayed as a waveform on the DL850E/DL850EV screen and can
be viewed. When waveform acquisition is being triggered in succession and an abnormal waveform
appears, it is impossible to stop acquisition before a new waveform appears on the screen. Normally,
it would be impossible to view the abnormal waveform. However, with the history feature, you can
view the past waveform data (history waveforms) stored in the acquisition memory when waveform
acquisition is stopped. You can select specific history waveforms and display them.
You can also search through the history waveforms for waveforms that meet specified conditions.
• Zone Search
The DL850E/DL850EV searches for history waveforms that passed (or did not pass) through a
specified search zone.
• Waveform Parameter Search
The DL850E/DL850EV searches for waveforms whose measured waveform parameter values meet
(or do not meet) specified conditions.
3
4
5
Specified zone
Waveforms that pass through
the specified zone are detected.
6
Selected Record 0
Selected Record –25
App
Waveform parameter search
History Waveforms
(up to 5000 waveforms)
Waveforms that do not meet the specified
search parameter conditions are detected.
Index
P-P
Selected Record 0
Selected Record –28
Dual Capturing
You can use dual capturing to simultaneously record a trend at a low sampling speed in roll mode and
at a high sampling rate. This is useful for capturing fast phenomenon while observing a trend over a
long period of time.
Main waveform (low-speed sampling)
Roll mode display
Captured waveforms (high-speed sampling)
Update mode display
Sample rate:
Faster than that of
the main waveform
Sample rate:
100 kS/s or less
Main waveform
Because there is not
enough sampled data, the
shape of the waveform may
not be displayed correctly.
IM DL850E-03EN
Events
The points where triggering
occurred during dual capturing
are displayed as events.
Zoomed waveform
(zoomed along the
time axis)
Captured
waveform
Because the data is sampled at
a high speed, the correct shape
of the waveform is displayed.
2-9
2.4
Waveform Display
The DL850E/DL850EV has a main window for displaying normal time-domain waveforms, zoom
windows for displaying zoomed time-axis waveforms, and X-Y windows for displaying X-Y waveforms.
In addition, you can split screens and change the sizes of waveform display areas so that waveforms
and measured values are easier to see and display an FFT window that shows the results of FFT
analysis.
Zooming along the Time Axis (GIGAZoom)
You can magnify displayed waveforms along the time axis. The zoomed waveforms of two locations
can be displayed simultaneously (the dual zoom feature). This feature is useful when you set a long
acquisition time and want to observe a portion of the waveform closely.
Main window (normal time-domain waveform)
Zoom box 1
Zoom box 2
Zoom1 window
Zoom2 window
You can display the zoomed waveforms
(Zoom1 and Zoom2) of two locations.
Displaying X-Y Waveforms
You can observe the correlation between two waveform signal levels by displaying one signal level
on the X-axis (horizontal axis) and a second signal level on the Y-axis (vertical axis). You can display
X-Y waveforms at the same time as normal T-Y (time and signal level) waveforms. You can display up
to four overlapping X-Y waveforms in both Window1 and Window2. Because multiple X-Y waveforms
can be displayed, it is easy to compare the relationships between phases. You can use this feature to
evaluate DC motors using Lissajous waveforms.
Snapshot
You can continue displaying a waveform on the screen as a snapshot waveform after the screen
has been updated and the waveform has been cleared in update mode or after the waveform has
left the screen in roll mode. Snapshot waveforms appear in white. You can compare them with new
waveforms. You can also save and print snapshot waveforms as screen captures.
Snapshot waveform
Displayed in white
Updated waveform
2-10
IM DL850E-03EN
2.5
Waveform Computation and Analysis
1
2
Waveform Computation
The expression that
you enter appears.
Expression configuration dialog box
Use the soft keyboard on the screen to
enter an expression.
Main Features
You can perform basic arithmetic, binarization, FFT (power spectrum), and phase shifting (display
the waveform with its phase shifted). On models with the /G2 option, you can use a rich variety of
functions (square root, trigonometric functions, differentiation, integration, digital filtering, six types of
FFT functions, and so on) to define up to eight equations.
3
4
5
6
Cursor Measurement
There are cursors for T-Y (time-axis), X-Y, and FFT waveforms. You can position a cursor over a
waveform to view the various measured values at the intersection of the cursor and the waveform.
App
Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters
You can use this feature to automatically measure waveform levels, maximum values, frequencies,
and other values. For waveform data, you can measure 29 waveform parameters (including the delay
between channels) that relate to the voltage axis, time axis, and waveform area.
• You can display a total of 32 measured values for all the waveforms.
• You can save a total of 64000 items of data for all the waveforms.
• You can also perform computations on measured waveform parameter values.
• You can display the following statistics for the specified waveform parameter.
The maximum value (Maximum), minimum value (Minimum), average value (Average), standard
deviation (SDev), and number of measured values used to calculate statistics (Count)
Setup Dialog Box
Example of Displayed Statistical Values
Measurement range
Measured items that the DL850E/DL850EV
is calculating the statistics of and
the values of those items
Maximum: Maximum value Minimum: Minimum value
Average: Average value
SDev:
Standard deviation
Count:
Number of measured values used to calculate statistics
IM DL850E-03EN
2-11
Index
2.5 Waveform Computation and Analysis
There are three statistical processing methods:
• Normal statistical processing
While acquiring waveforms, the DL850E/DL850EV measures the measurement items and
calculates the statistics of the waveforms that it has acquired so far.
• Cyclic statistical processing (measurement and statistical processing are performed for each period)
The DL850E/DL850EV divides the waveform into periods starting at the left side of the screen (the
oldest waveform) and moving to the right side of the screen, measures the selected measurement
items within each period, and performs statistical processing on the measurement items.
• Statistical processing of history waveforms
The DL850E/DL850EV measures the measurement items and calculates the statistics of history
waveforms. Measurement and statistical processing begin with the oldest waveform.
GO/NO-GO Determination
This feature is useful for signal testing on production lines and for tracking down abnormal phenomena.
The DL850E/DL850EV determines whether the waveform enters the specified range. When the
DL850E/DL850EV returns a GO (or NO-GO) result, specified actions are performed.
Determination Methods
• Waveform Zone
The DL850E/DL850EV returns GO/NO-GO results based on whether waveforms leave or enter
the zone that you create using a base waveform.
The DL850E/DL850EV returns a GO or NO-GO
judgment according to the determination condition.
Specified zone
Determination
area
• Waveform Parameter
Set the upper and lower limits for automated measurement values of waveform parameters. The
DL850E/DL850EV performs GO/NO-GO determination based on whether the values are within
or outside of the limits.
Actions Performed according to Determination Results
The DL850E/DL850EV can print and save screen captures, save waveform data, beep, and send
e-mails according to the results of GO/NO-GO determination.
2-12
IM DL850E-03EN
Chapter 3
3.1
Making Preparations for Measurements
Handling Precautions
1
2
Safety Precautions
If you are using this instrument for the first time, make sure to thoroughly read the safety precautions
given on page xiii.
3
Do Not Remove the Case
Unplug If Abnormal Behavior Occurs
If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument, immediately turn off the power and
unplug the power cord. If such an irregularity occurs, contact your dealer.
Do Not Damage the Power Cord
Nothing should be placed on the power cord. The cord should be kept away from any heat sources.
When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, never pull by the cord itself. Always hold and pull by
the plug. If the power cord is damaged, contact your dealer for replacement. Refer to page vi for the
part number to use when placing an order.
Making Preparations for Measurements
Do not remove the case from the instrument. Some sections inside the instrument have high
voltages and are extremely dangerous. For internal inspection and adjustment, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
4
5
6
App
General Handling Precautions
Do Not Place Objects on Top of the Instrument
Index
Never place other instruments or objects containing water on top of the instrument, otherwise a
breakdown may occur.
Do Not Apply Shock or Vibration
Do not apply shock or vibration. Doing so may damage the instrument. Extra caution is needed for
the optional internal hard disk, because it is sensitive to vibration and shock. Shocks to the input
connectors or probes may turn into electrical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines.
Do Not Damage the LCD
Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched, do not allow any sharp objects
near it. Also it should not be exposed to vibrations and shocks.
Unplug during Extended Non-Use
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-1
3.1 Handling Precautions
When Carrying the Instrument
Remove the power cord and connecting cables. When moving the instrument, use the handle as
shown below, or carry it with both hands.
WARNING
• When you hold or put away the handle, be careful not to get your hand caught between the
handle and the case.
• When you carry the instrument, be careful not to get your hand caught between the wall,
installation surface, or other objects and the instrument.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
• Lorsque vous attrapez ou rabattez la poignée, veillez à ne pas vous coincer la main entre
la poignée et l’instrument.
• Lorsque vous déplacez l’instrument, veillez à ne pas vous coincer la main entre l’instrument
et le mur, la surface d’installation ou tout autre objet.
Cleaning
When cleaning the case or the operation panel, first remove the power cord from the AC outlet. Then,
wipe with a dry, soft, clean cloth Do not use chemical such as benzene or thinner. These can cause
discoloring and deformation.
3-2
IM DL850E-03EN
3.2
Installing the Instrument
1
2
WARNING
• Do not install the instrument outdoors or in locations subject to rain or water.
• Install the instrument so that you can immediately remove the power cord if an abnormal or
dangerous condition occurs.
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
CAUTION
If you block the inlet or outlet holes on the instrument, the instrument will become hot and may
break down.
French
5
6
AVERTISSEMENT
• Ne pas installer l’instrument à l’extérieur ou dans des lieux exposés à la pluie ou à l’eau.
• Installer l’instrument de manière à pourvoir immédiatement le débrancher du secteur en
cas de fonctionnement anormal ou dangereux.
App
ATTENTION
Index
Ne pas boucher les orifices d’entrée ou de sortie de l’instrument pour éviter toute surchauffe
et panne éventuelle.
Installation Conditions
Install the instrument in a place that meets the following conditions.
Flat, Even Surface
Install the instrument in the correct orientation (see page 3-5) in a safe place, with no tilting from front
to back or left to right. When you install the instrument with the rear panel facing down, you can tilt it
on its stand. The recording quality of the printer may be hindered when the instrument is placed in an
unstable or inclined place.
IM DL850E-03EN
3
3-3
3.2 Installing the Instrument
Well-Ventilated Location
There are inlet holes on the bottom side of the instrument. There are also vent holes for the cooling
fan on the left side panel and the top panel. To prevent internal overheating, allow for enough space
around the instrument (see the figure below) and do not block the inlet and exhaust holes.
10 cm or more
10 cm
or
more
10 cm
or
more
5 cm
or
more
When connecting cables and opening and closing the cover of the built-in printer, provide extra
operating space in addition to the space in the figure shown above.
Ambient Temperature and Humidity
Ambient temperature: 5 to 40°C
Ambient humidity:
20 to 80% RH (when the printer is not used; no condensation)
35 to 80% RH (when the printer is used)
Note
• To ensure high measurement accuracy, operate the instrument in the 23 ±5°C temperature range and 20
to 80% RH.
• Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature
is higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. In such cases, allow the instrument adjust to the new
environment for at least an hour before using the instrument.
Do not install the instrument in the following places.
•Outdoors.
• In direct sunlight or near heat sources.
• Where the instrument is exposed to water or other liquids.
• Where an excessive amount of soot, steam, dust, or corrosive gas is present.
• Near strong magnetic field sources.
• Near high voltage equipment or power lines.
• Where the level of mechanical vibration is high.
• On an unstable surface.
3-4
IM DL850E-03EN
3.2 Installing the Instrument
1
Installation Position
Install the instrument so that it is flat or with the rear panel facing down. When using the stand as
shown in the bottom right figure, push it out until it locks into place. Push the stand back in when you
store the instrument.
2
3
Stand
4
Feet
5
WARNING
• When you put away the stand, be careful not to get your hand caught between the stand
and the instrument.
• Handling the stand without firmly supporting the instrument can be dangerous. Please take
the following precautions.
• Only handle the stand when the instrument is on a stable surface.
• Do not handle the stand when the instrument is tilted.
• Do not place the instrument in any position other than those shown in the above figures.
Also, do not stack the instrument.
6
App
Index
CAUTION
Do not apply excessive force or shock to the stand. Doing so may break the stand support.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
• Lorsque vous rabattez le support, veillez à ne pas vous coincer la main entre le support et
l’instrument.
• Lorsque vous manipulez le support, soutenez toujours l’instrument fermement. Prenez les
précautions suivantes.
• Ne manipulez le support que lorsque l’instrument est placé sur une surface stable.
• Ne manipulez pas le support lorsque l’instrument est incliné.
• Ne pas placer l’instrument dans des positions autres celles indiquées ci-dessus. Ne pas
empiler l’instrument.
ATTENTION
Évitez d’appliquer une force excessive ou des chocs sur le support. Le système de soutien du
support peut se casser.
Rubber Stoppers
The supplied rubber stoppers can be attached to the feet of the instrument to prevent the instrument
from sliding.
IM DL850E-03EN
Making Preparations for Measurements
Stand support
3-5
3.3
Installing Input Modules
WARNING
• To prevent electric shock and damage to the instrument, be sure to turn the power off
before you install or remove input modules.
• Check that the input cable is not connected to the input terminals before installing or
removing the input module.
• To prevent electric shock and to satisfy the specifications, make sure to put the accessory
cover panel on the slots that are not being used.
Using the instrument without the cover panel allows the dust to enter the instrument and
may cause malfunction due to the rise in temperature inside the instrument.
• If the input module happens to come out of the slot while it is in use, it may cause electric
shock or cause damage to the instrument as well as the input module. Make sure to screw
the input module in place at the two locations (top and bottom).
• There are protrusions in the slot. Do not put your hand in the slot. If you put your hand in the
slot, the protrusions may cut your hand.
• Use the accessories of this product within the rated range of each accessory (see page ix).
When using several accessories together, use them within the specification range of the
accessory with the lowest rating.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage or maximum rated voltage
to earth.
• To avoid electric shock, be sure to ground the instrument.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Failing to
do so is extremely dangerous, because the electrical and mechanical protection functions
will not be activated.
• Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the surge voltage may occur.
• To measure high voltage with the 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250
(HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), or 720254 (4CH 1M16), use the
isolated probes (700929, 701947), passive probes 702902, 1:1 safety cables (combination
of 701901 and 701954), or differential probes (700924, 700925, 701926).
• Be sure to connect the GND lead of the differential probe (the 700924, 700925 and
701926) to the functional ground terminal of the DL850E/DL850EV before you connect
to the device under measurement. High voltage may appear at the BNC connector of the
differential probe.
• The protection functions and non-isolation functions of the 701255 (NONISO_10M12) are
enabled when the module screws are tightened. It is extremely dangerous if you do not
fasten the screws. Also, when you measure high voltages above 42 V, be sure to use the
passive probe for the DL850E/DL850EV (the 701940).
• The BNC portion of the 10 MHz passive probe 701940 is metal, so if you use it with
isolated input (the 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250 (HS10M12), 720250
(HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), 701275 (ACCL/VOLT), 701281(FREQ), 720281(FREQ)),
or 720254 (4CH 1M16), for safety, be sure to only use it with voltages at or below 42 V. (Do
not connect voltage above 42 V to both the High and Low sides.)
• When measuring high voltages using the 701267 (HV (with RMS)) or 720268 (HV (AAF,
RMS)) use a measurement lead(combination of 758933 and 701954) or 1:1 safety cable
(combination of 701904 and 701954).
• The measurement category of 701267 (HV (with RMS)) when used with 758933
measurement leads and 701954 alligator clips or 1:1 safety cable 701904 and 701954
alligator clips is 400V-CAT II on the low side and 700V-CAT II on the high side. Be careful
because the overvoltage tolerance between the low and high sides is different.
• To measure high voltage with the 701281 (FREQ) or 720281 (FREQ), use an isolated
probe (700929, 701947) or passive probe 702902.
• The protection functions and non-isolation functions of the 720230 (LOGIC) are enabled
when the module screws are tightened. It is extremely dangerous if you do not fasten
the screws. Also, be sure to only use a recommended YOKOGAWA logic probe (700986,
700987, 702911, or 702912) with the logic module.
3-6
IM DL850E-03EN
3.3 Installing Input Modules
French
1
AVERTISSEMENT
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Ne pas dépasser les valeurs maximales de tension d’entrée, de tension nominale maximale
à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, l’instrument doit impérativement être relié à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours serrer les vis des modules, à défaut
de quoi les fonctions de protection électrique et de protection mécanique ne seront pas
activées.
• Éviter les connexions continues dans les environnements pouvant être soumis à surtension.
• Pour mesurer la tension élevée avec 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250
(HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16) ou 720254 (4CH 1M16), utiliser des
sondes isolées (700929, 701947), des sondes passives 702902, des câbles de sécurité
1:1 (combinaison de 701901 et 701954) ou des sondes différentielles (700924, 700925,
701926).
• Bien relier le fil de terre de la sonde différentielle (700924, 700925, 701926) à la borne
de mise à la terre opérationnelle, sur le panneau droit de DL850E/DL850EV avant de le
relier à la cible de la mesure. Le fait de ne pas respecter cette consigne risque d’entraîner
l’apparition d’une tension élevée au niveau du connecteur BNC de la sonde différentielle.
• Lors de l’utilisation du 701255 (NONISO_10M12), veillez à serrer les vis du module. Le
serrage des vis de module active la fonction de protection et celle de non-isolation. La
situation est extrêmement dangereuse lorsque les vis ne sont pas serrées. Lorsque vous
mesurez des hautes tensions supérieures à 42 V, veillez également à utiliser la sonde
passive 701940.
• La partie BNC de la sonde passive 701940 est en métal ; si vous l’utilisez avec l’entrée
isolée (la 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250 (HS10M12), 720250
(HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), 701275 (ACCL/VOLT), 701281 (FREQ), 720281 (FREQ)
ou 720254 (4CH 1M16)), veillez à l’utiliser uniquement à des tensions inférieures ou égales
à 42 V pour des raisons de sécurité (ne reliez pas une tension supérieure à 42 V sur les
côtés Haut et Bas).
• Lorsque vous appliquez de hautes tensions au 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) ou 720268 (HV
(AAF, RMS)), utilisez un cordon de mesure (combinaison de 758933 et 701954) ou des
câbles de sécurité 1:1 (combinaison de 701904 et 701954).
• La catégorie de mesure du 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) lorsqu’il est utilisé avec les fils de
mesure 758933 et les pinces crocodiles 701954 ou le câble de sécurité 1:1 701904 et les
pinces crocodiles 701954 est CAT II - 400 V pour le bas et CAT II - 700 V pour le haut.
Procéder avec soin, car la tolérance de surtension diffère entre le bas et le haut.•
Pour
mesurer la tension élevée avec 701281 (FREQ) ou 720281(FREQ), utiliser une sonde
isolée (700929, 701947) ou une sonde passive 702902.
• Les fonctions de protection et les fonctions de non-isolation de 720230 (LOGIC) sont
activées lorsque les vis du module sont serrées. Il est extrêmement dangereux de ne
pas serrer les vis. S’assurer également de bien utiliser uniquement une sonde logique
YOKOGAWA recommandée (700986, 700987, 702911 ou 702912) avec le module logique.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-7
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique et d’endommagement de l’instrument, veiller à
mettre l’instrument hors tension avant d’installer ou de retirer des modules d’entrée.
• Avant d’installer ou de retirer des modules d’entrée, vérifier que le câble d’entrée n’est pas
connecté aux bornes d’entrée.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique et respecter les spécifications, penser à recouvrir
les slots qui ne sont pas utilisés à l’aide du cache de recouvrement prévu à cet effet.
L’utilisation de l’instrument sans le cache de recouvrement favorise l’introduction de
poussière dans l’instrument et peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement due à une température
excessive à l’intérieur de l’instrument.
• Si le module d’entrée venait à sortir de son slot pendant son utilisation, cela pourrait
entraîner un choc électrique ou endommager l’instrument et le module d’entrée. Veiller à
bien visser le module d’entrée aux deux emplacements prévus (haut et bas).
• Les sots présentent des rebords en saillie. Ne pas insérer les doigts dans les slots, car les
saillies pourraient vous blesser.
• Utilisez les accessoires de ce produit en fonction des valeurs nominales de chacun
(reportez-vous à la page ix). Lorsque vous employez plusieurs accessoires en même
temps, utilisez les valeurs de l’accessoire ayant les valeurs nominales les plus faibles.
4
5
6
App
Index
3.3 Installing Input Modules
Types of Input Modules
The following types of input modules are available.
Name
Model
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
701250 (HS10M12)
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
720250 (HS10M12)
High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
701251 (HS1M16)
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module
701255 (NONISO_10M12)
High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS)
701267 (HV (with RMS))
High-Voltage 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with AAF and RMS)
720268 (HV (AAF, RMS))
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module
701261 (UNIVERSAL)
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module (with AAF)
701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF))
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module
701265 (TEMP/HPV)
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (low noise type)
720266 (TEMP/HPV)
Strain Module (NDIS)
701270 (STRAIN_NDIS)
Strain Module (DSUB, Shunt-Cal)
701271 (STRAIN_DSUB)
Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF)
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
Frequency Module
701281 (FREQ)
Frequency Module
720281 (FREQ)
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
720210 (HS100M12)
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module
720211 (HS100M12)
16-CH Voltage Input Module
720220 (16CH VOLT)
16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)
Logic Input Module
720230 (LOGIC)
CAN Bus Monitor Module*
720240 (CAN MONITOR)
CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module*
720241 (CAN & LIN)
SENT Monitor Module*
720243 (SENT)
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
720254 (4CH 1M16)
*The CAN bus monitor, CAN & LIN bus monitor, and SENT monitor modules can be used on the DL850EV. They
cannot be used on the DL850E.
Precautions to Be Taken When Installing or Removing Input
Modules
If you replace one installed input module with another, the settings for the channel will be reset to their
defaults when the power is turned on. If you want to keep the settings, specify a save destination and
save them.
Installation Procedure of Modules
1. Make sure that the power switch on the left side panel of the instrument is turned off.
2. Check the channel number displayed on the input module installation slot on the right side
panel of the instrument, and then install the input module along the guide.
Holding the handles on the top and bottom of the input module, press hard until it clicks in place.
If there is a cover panel on the slot in which to install the module, remove the cover panel, first.
3. Firmly fasten the screws that came with the instrument in two places: the top and bottom of the
input module.
Screw tightening torque: 0.6 N•m
4. Turn the instrument’s power switch on.
5. In the overview screen, check that the name of the module that you installed is displayed
correctly at the appropriate slot. If it is not correct, remove the module according to the steps
in “Removal” shown below, and reinstall the module according to steps 1 to 3 shown above. To
display the overview screen, see section 19.6, “Viewing System Information (Overview),” in the
user’s manual.
Guide
3-8
IM DL850E-03EN
3.3 Installing Input Modules
Note
• You can install up to four 720210 modules, and these modules must be installed in the top slots.
• You can install up to four 720234 SENT monitor modules (SENT), and these modules must be installed in
the bottom slots.
• You can install a total of two 720240 CAN bus monitor modules (CAN MONITOR) and 720241 CAN & LIN
bus monitor modules (CAN & LIN). These monitor modules can only be installed in slots 7 and 8.
Removal
2
3
1. Make sure that the instrument’s power switch is off.
3. Hold the two handles at the top and bottom of the input module, and pull it out.
Making Preparations for Measurements
2. Loosen the two screws that are fastened to the input module.
4
About the High-speed, 100 MS/s, 12-bit Isolated Module
Safety Precautions for Laser Products
The High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 (HS100M12) and 720211 (HS100M12))
uses an internal laser light source. The 720210 (HS100M12) and 720211 (HS100M12) are a
class 1 laser product as defined by IEC 60825-1:2007 Safety of Laser Products—Part1: Equipment
Classification. In addition, this instrument complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for
deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 (HS100M12) and 720211
(HS100M12))
5
6
App
The following information is printed on the side.
Index
DL850E/DL850EV
The following information is printed on the rear.
IM DL850E-03EN
1
3-9
3.3 Installing Input Modules
Laser Specifications
Center wavelength: 850 nm
Pulse width: ≤ 10 ms (100 MHz), ≤ 2.5 ns (2 GHz)
Output: ≤ 6 mW
If the instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual, the protection provided by the
instrument may be impaired. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply
with these warnings and requirements.
LEDs on the Frequency Module and SENT Monitor Module
On the front panel of the frequency module (701281 (FREQ) and 720281(FREQ)), and SENT monitor
module (720243 (SENT)) are LEDs for each channel. These LEDs allow you to check the input
condition of the pulse.
ACT
OVER
LED
ACT
OVER
Green: Pulses are being received.
Red: The input voltage range has
been exceeded.
Off:
Pulses are not being received.
Example: 701281 (FREQ)
Note
• The LEDs on the frequency module and SENT monitor module illuminates in green when pulse is
applied and red when the input voltage level is over range. It is independent of the start/stop condition of
waveform acquisition of the DL850E/DL850EV.
• When the preset of the frequency module is set to EM Pickup (electromagnetic pickup), the LED will not
illuminate in red when the range is exceeded.
For information about presets, see section 1.7, “Configuring Frequency, Revolution, Period, Duty Cycle,
Power Supply Frequency, Pulse Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity Measurements,” in the user’s
manual.
3-10
IM DL850E-03EN
3.4
Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the
Power Switch On and Off
Before Connecting the Power
Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power. Failure to do so may
cause electric shock or damage to the instrument.
1
2
3
• Before connecting the power cord, ensure that the source voltage matches the rated supply
voltage of the instrument and that it is within the maximum rated voltage of the provided
power cord.
• Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned off.
• To prevent electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord for the instrument that is
supplied by YOKOGAWA.
• Make sure to connect protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock. Connect the
power cord to a three-prong power outlet with a protective earth terminal.
• Do not use an extension cord without a protective earth ground. Otherwise, the protection
function will be compromised.
• If an AC outlet that conforms to the supplied power cord is unavailable and you cannot
ground the instrument, do not use the instrument.
Making Preparations for Measurements
WARNING
4
5
6
App
French
Index
AVERTISSEMENT
• Avant de brancher le cordon d’alimentation, vérifier que la tension source correspond à la
tension d’alimentation nominale de l’instrument et qu’elle est compatible avec la tension
nominale maximale du cordon d’alimentation.
• Brancher le cordon d’alimentation après avoir vérifié que l’interrupteur d’alimentation de
l’instrument est sur OFF.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique ou d’incendie, utiliser exclusivement le cordon
d’alimentation fourni par YOKOGAWA et prévu pour l’instrument.
• Relier l’instrument à la terre pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique. Brancher le cordon
d’alimentation sur une prise de courant à trois plots reliée à la terre.
• Toujours utiliser une rallonge avec broche de mise à la terre, à défaut de quoi l’instrument
ne serait pas relié à la terre.
• En l’absence de prise secteur conforme au cordon d’alimentation et dans l’impossibilité de
mettre l’instrument à la terre, ne pas utiliser l’instrument.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-11
3.4 Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off
Connecting the Power Cord
1. Check that the power switch is off.
2. Connect the power cord plug to the power inlet on the left side panel.
3. Connect the other end of the cord to an outlet that meets the conditions below. Use the threeprong power outlet equipped with a protective earth terminal.
Rated supply voltage*
Permitted supply voltage range
Rated supply voltage frequency
Permitted supply voltage frequency range
Maximum power consumption
100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC
90 to 132 VAC/198 to 264 VAC
50/60 Hz
48 to 63 Hz
Approx. 200 VA max.
(This value is for reference. When the built-in printer is not
being used and there are 16 active channels provided by
eight high-speed 10 MS/s 12-bit isolation modules, the
maximum power consumption is 135 VA.)
* The instrument can use a 100 V or a 200 V power supply. The maximum rated voltage differs according
to the type of power cord. Check that the voltage supplied to the DL850E/DL850EV is less than or equal
to the maximum rated voltage of the provided power cord (see page iii) before using it.
Connecting the DC Power Supply to the DC Power Supply Model
(/DC)
WARNING
• Connect the DC power cord after checking that the power switch of the instrument is turned
OFF. If you connect the power cord with the power switch turned ON, sparks may be
emitted and can lead to fire.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock or fire, be sure to use a power cord and power
connector that YOKOGAWA specifies.
• Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock.
CAUTION
• There is a polarity to the DC power connector. Check the polarity when making a
connection. If you have trouble connecting it, do not force it; check the connector direction.
• To prevent shorting the power supply, remove the power cord from the power supply when
the power supply is not in use.
3-12
IM DL850E-03EN
3.4 Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off
1
French
AVERTISSEMENT
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
• Branchez le cordon d’alimentation CC après avoir vérifié que l’interrupteur d’alimentation
de l’instrument est sur OFF. Si vous reliez le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’interrupteur
électrique est sur ON, des étincelles peuvent jaillir et provoquer un incendie.
• Pour éviter les risques de choc électrique ou d’incendie, utilisez le cordon d’alimentation et
le connecteur électrique fourni par YOKOGAWA.
• Relier l’instrument à la terre pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique.
4
ATTENTION
• Il y a une polarité vers le connecteur d’alimentation en courant continu. Contrôlez la polarité
lorsque vous effectuez une connexion. Si vous avec des problèmes lors de la connexion,
ne forcez pas ; contrôlez le sens du connecteur.
• Pour prévenir toute coupure d’alimentation, débranchez le cordon électrique de la prise de
courant lorsque l’alimentation électrique n’est pas nécessaire.
Creating the Power Cord
Create a power cord using the power connector that comes with the package. For the power cord, use
a cable that is between AWG12 (conductive cross-sectional area of 3.3 mm2) and AWG14 (conductive
cross-sectional area of 2.1 mm2) with an outer diameter less than or equal to 3.6 mm.
There are two types of terminal tips. Use the tip with a small diameter for the protective grounding
terminal.
1. Remove the two screws from the DC power connector.
2. Press the latch pawl in the direction of the arrow as shown and remove the connector case.
Take out the cable cover that is stored in the connector.
Connector case
Latch pawl
Cable retainer
Cable cover
3. Remove the two cable retainer screws.
4. Run the cable through the cable cover.
5. Solder the power cable to the three terminal tips provided. Solder the protective grounding
cable to the tip with the small diameter.
Terminal tip
IM DL850E-03EN
Power Cable
3-13
5
6
App
Index
3.4 Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off
6. Insert the terminal tips into the terminal block as shown in the figure. The connector numbers
and power polarities are listed below.
Terminal No.
1
2
3
Signal
Positive
Protective ground
Negative
1
2
3
Terminal block
Tip with a large diameter
Tip with a small diameter
Negative
GND
Positive
7. Replace the attachment screws with the supplied long screws as necessary. You can remove
the attachment screws by pulling the screws in the direction of the arrow.
8. Attach the cable to the connector. Set the chip mount flange and cable cover flange in the
connector case grooves. Secure the cable in place using the cable retainer.
Attachment
screw
Supplied screw
9. Put the connector case on and fasten it with screws.
Connecting to the Power Supply
Connect the power cord as shown in the figure below. The power supply must meet the following
conditions:
Item
Rated supply voltage
Permitted supply voltage range
Maximum power consumption
Description
12 VDC
10 to 18 VDC (at the DL850EV connector end)
Approx. 150 VA Max.
(135 VA when driving 16 channels with four High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit
Isolation Modules and four High-Speed 10 MS/s 12-Bit Isolation Modules)
Battery
Connect to protective
earth ground
Positive
protective earth ground (
)
Negative
DC power connector
Note
• If both AC power and DC power are supplied, AC power takes precedence.
• If both AC power and DC power are supplied and AC power is cut off, the power instantaneously switches
to DC power.
3-14
IM DL850E-03EN
3.4 Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off
1
Turning the Power Switch On and Off
Before Turning On the Power, Check That:
• The instrument is installed properly (see section 3.2, “Installing the Instrument”).
• The power cord is connected properly (see page 3-12).
Turning the Power Switch On and Off
Flip the power switch on the left side panel to ON ( | ) to turn the instrument on, and to OFF (
the instrument off.
2
) to turn
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
5
6
App
Turning ON/OFF the DC Power (/DC)
Before Turning On the Power, Check That:
Index
• The instrument is installed properly (see section 3.2, “Installing the Instrument”).
• The power cord is connected properly (see page 3-12).
Turning the Power Switch On and Off
Flip the power switch on the left side panel to ON ( | ) to turn the instrument on, and to OFF (
the instrument off.
) to turn
Note
If AC power is supplied and the main power switch to the AC power is ON, AC power is used.
Status Display of the DC Power Supply
The power supply status is indicated on the LED on the left side panel.
AC LED
LED Status
Illuminated in green
Description
Operating on AC power
DC LED
LED Status
Illuminated in green
Illuminated in red
Illuminated in orange
Blinked in red
Off
IM DL850E-03EN
Description
Operating on DC power (AC power is not connected)
Operating on AC power, and the DC supply voltage is within the operating range (10
to 18 VDC)
Operating on DC power, and the DC supply voltage is outside the operating range
DC power is turning ON/OFF repeatedly (internal protection circuit is tripping)
Power is not supplied in this condition. This status is automatically cleared after 10
to 20 seconds.
Internal circuit operation failure. Repair is necessary.
Operating on AC power, and the DC supply voltage is within the operating range (10
to 18 VDC) or the DC power is not supplied
3-15
3.4 Connecting to a Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch On and Off
CAUTION
Abruptly turning off the power switch or unplugging the power cord while data is being saved
or the internal printer is printing may corrupt the media on which data is being saved or
damage the built-in printer. Also, the data being saved is not guaranteed. Always turn the
power switch off after data has been saved.
French
ATTENTION
Mettre brutalement l’instrument hors tension ou débrancher le cordon d’alimentation pendant
l’enregistrement de données ou le fonctionnement de l’imprimante interne peut corrompre le
support d’enregistrement des données ou endommager l’imprimante intégrée. Les données
en cours d’enregistrement pourront également être perdues. Toujours mettre l’instrument hors
tension après que les données ont été enregistrées.
Operations Performed When the Power Is Turned On
When the power switch is turned on, self testing and calibration start automatically. This lasts for
approximately 30 seconds. When the DL850E/DL850EV starts normally, the waveform display screen
appears. Check that the DL850E/DL850EV has started normally before you use it.
If the DL850E/DL850EV Does Not Start Normally When the Power Is Turned On
Turn off the power switch, and check the following items.
• Check that the power cord is securely connected.
• Check that the correct voltage is coming to the power outlet. → See page 3-12
• Initialize the settings to their factory defaults by turning on the power switch while holding down
the RESET key. For details about initializing the settings, see section 4.6, “Initializing Settings.”
If the instrument still does not work properly, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Note
• After turning the power off, wait at least 10 seconds before you turn it on again.
• On the DC power supply option, repeatedly turning the power switch on and off will stop the power from
being supplied because the internal protection will be activated. If you refrain from turning the power on
or off for 10 to 20 seconds, the internal protection will be released, and power supply will be restored. The
DC power supply LED lights in orange while power is not being supplied.
• It takes several seconds for the startup screen to appear.
Operations Performed When the Power Is Turned Off
When the power switch is turned off (or the power plug is removed), the instrument stores the current
settings in its memory. This means that if you turn the power switch on and begin measurement, the
instrument will perform measurements using the settings from immediately before the instrument was
last turned off.
Note
The instrument stores the settings using an internal lithium battery. The battery lasts for approximately five
years when the ambient temperature is 23°C. When the lithium battery voltage falls below a specified value
and you turn on the power, a message (error 901) appears on the screen. If this message appears frequently,
you need to replace the battery soon. Do not try to replace the battery yourself. Contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer to have the battery replaced.
To Make Accurate Measurements
• After turning on the power switch, wait at least 30 minutes to allow the instrument to warm up.
• Perform calibration after the instrument has warmed up (see section 4.7 for details). If auto
calibration is turned on, auto calibration is executed when you change the Time/div setting or start
waveform acquisition.
3-16
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5
Connecting Probes
1
2
Connecting Probes
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
Connect the probes (or other input cables such as BNC cables) to any of the input terminals of the
following modules. The input impedance is 1 MΩ ± 1 % and approximately 35 pF.
• High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module: 720210 (HS100M12) and 720211 (HS100M12)
• High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module: 701250 (HS10M12) and 720250 (HS10M12)
• High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module: 701251 (HS1M16)
• High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module: 701255 (NONISO_10M12)
•Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF):701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
•Frequency Module:701281 (FREQ) and 720281 (FREQ)
•SENT Monitor Module720243 (SENT)
•4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module:720254 (4CH 1M16)
4
5
6
App
Index
WARNING
When connecting a device under measurement to the instrument, be sure to turn off the
device. It is extremely dangerous to connect or remove measurement leads while the device
under measurement is on.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage or maximum rated voltage
to earth.
• To avoid electric shock, be sure to ground the instrument.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Otherwise,
the electrical protection function and the mechanical protection function will not be activated.
• Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the surge voltage may occur.
• Use only specified cables. It is extremely dangerous to use cables that do not meet the
safety standards. (Especially when you are handling high voltages of 42 V or more.)
• To measure high voltage with the 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250
(HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), or 720254 (4CH 1M16), use the
isolated probes (700929, 701947), passive probes 702902, 1:1 safety cables (combination
of 701901 and 701954), or differential probes (700924, 700925, 701926).
• The BNC portion of the 10 MHz passive probe (701940) is metal, so if you use it with
isolated input (the 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250 (HS10M12), 720250
(HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), 701275 (ACCL/VOLT), 701281(FREQ), 720281(FREQ)),
or 720254 (4CH 1M16), for safety, be sure to only use it with voltages at or below 42 V. (Do
not connect voltage above 42 V to both the High and Low sides.) For non-isolated inputs
(701255 (NONISO_10M12), etc.), fasten the module screws.
• To measure high voltage with the 701281 (FREQ) or, 720281 (FREQ) use an isolated
probe (700929, 701947) or passive probe 702902.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-17
3.5 Connecting Probes
In Using the High Voltage Differential Probes
Be sure to connect the ground lead of the differential probe (700924, 700925, 701926) to
the functional grounding terminal on the right side panel of the DL850E/DL850EV before
connecting to the measurement target. Not doing so may cause high voltage to appear in the
BNC connector of the differential probe.
Maximum Input Voltages and Maximum rated voltage to earth for the Modules
Applying a voltage exceeding the value indicated below may damage the input section. If the
frequency is above 1 kHz, damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value.
• For the 720210 (HS100M12) and 720211 (HS100M12)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029021
1000 V (DC + ACpeak) CAT II
• In combination with a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)3
200 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5
42V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947,2 or a safety
cable (1:1) (701901+701954)4
1000 Vrms (CAT II)
• In combination with a passive probe (10:1) 7029022
1000 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)6
42V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• For the 701250 (HS10M12) and 720250 (HS10M12)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029021
701250: 600 V (DC + ACpeak)
720250: 800 V (DC + ACpeak)
• In combination with a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)3
200 V (DC + ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
250 V (DC + ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage
the instrument when applied)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5
42V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029022, or a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)4
701250: 400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
720250: 400 Vrms (CAT II)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• For the 701251 (HS1M16)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029021
600 V (DC + ACpeak)
• In combination with a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)3
140 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5
42V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029022, or a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)4
400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
3-18
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5 Connecting Probes
1
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• For the 701255 (NONISO_10M12)
This module is non-isolated. Be sure to fasten the module screws when measuring a
voltage above 42 V on this module. In addition, use the 701940 (10:1) dedicated nonisolated passive probe.
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• Combined with the 701940 (10:1) passive probe7
600 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5
200 V (DC + ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
250 V (DC + ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage
the instrument when applied)
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
• For the 701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• Combined with the 701940 (10:1) passive probe7 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)5
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• Combined with the 701940 (10:1) passive probe8 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
5
6
• For the 701281 (FREQ) and 720281 (FREQ)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029021
420 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Safety cable (1:1) (combined with 701901+701954)3 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)5
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029022
701281: 300 Vrms (CAT II)
720281: 400 Vrms (CAT II)
• Safety cable (1:1) (combined with 701901+701954)4 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• For the 720243 (SENT)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or a passive probe (10:1) 7029021
420 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Safety cable (1:1) (combined with 701901+701954)3 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)5
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or a passive probe (10:1) 7029022
300 Vrms (CAT II)
• Safety cable (1:1) (combined with 701901+701954)4 or direct input (cable that does not
comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
IM DL850E-03EN
3-19
App
Index
3.5 Connecting Probes
• For the 720254 (4CH 1M16)
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029021
600 V (DC + ACpeak)
• In combination with a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)3
200 V (DC + ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
400 V (DC + ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage
the instrument when applied)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5
42V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• In combination with an isolated probe (10:1) 700929 or (100:1) 701947, or a passive
probe (10:1) 7029022, or a safety cable (1:1) (701901+701954)4
400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
With the 700929, 701947, or 702902
With the 701901 and 701954
H
700929
701947
702902
1
L
Direct input (cable that does not comply
with the safety standards)
701901
H
701954
3
L
2
With the 10:1 passive probe (701940)
H
BNC
5
L
4
H
7
6
L
8
Over-Range Indication
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
Au moment de brancher l’appareil à mesurer sur l’instrument, veiller à ce que l’appareil soit
hors tension. Il est extrêmement dangereux de brancher ou de débrancher des câbles lorsque
l’appareil à mesurer est sous tension.
3-20
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5 Connecting Probes
Utilisation de sondes différentielles haute tension
Bien relier le fil de terre de la sonde différentielle (700924, 700925, 701926) à la borne de
mise à la terre opérationnelle, sur le panneau droit de DL850E/DL850EV avant de le relier à
la cible de la mesure. Le fait de ne pas respecter cette consigne risque d’entraîner l’apparition
d’une tension élevée au niveau du connecteur BNC de la sonde différentielle.
Tensions d’entrée maximales et tension nominale maximale à la terre les modules
L’application d’une tension supérieure à la valeur indiquée ci-dessous pourrait endommager la
section d’entrée. Si la fréquence est supérieure à 1 kHz, une tension inférieure à cette valeur
pourra tout de même endommager la section d’entrée.
• Pour 720210 (HS100M12) et 720211 (HS100M12)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 7029021
1000 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) CAT II
• Avec le câble de sécurité (1:1; 701901 et 701954 conjointement)3
200 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• Si utilisé avec la sonde isolée 700929 (10:1) ou 701947 (100:1).2 Ou si utilisé avec le
câble de sécurité (1:1; 701901 et 701954 conjointement).4
1000 Vrms (CAT II)
• En combinaison avec une sonde passive (10:1) 7029022
1000 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
IM DL850E-03EN
3-21
1
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Ne pas dépasser les valeurs maximales de tension d’entrée, de tension nominale maximale
à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, l’instrument doit impérativement être relié à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours serrer les vis des modules, à défaut
de quoi les fonctions de protection électrique et de protection mécanique ne seront pas
activées.
• Éviter les connexions continues dans les environnements pouvant être soumis à surtension.
• Utilisez uniquement les câbles préconisés. Il est extrêmement dangereux d’utiliser des
câbles n’étant pas conformes aux normes de sécurité. (notamment lorsque vous travaillez
avec de hautes tensions de 42 V, voire supérieures).
• Pour mesurer la tension élevée avec 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250
(HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16) ou 720254 (4CH 1M16), utiliser des
sondes isolées (700929, 701947), 701251 (HS1M16) ou 720254 (4CH 1M16), utiliser des
sondes isolées (700929, 701947), des sondes passives 702902, des câbles de sécurité
1:1 (combinaison de 701901 et 701954) ou des sondes différentielles (700924, 700925,
701926).
• La partie BNC de la sonde passive de 10 MHz 701940 est en métal ; si vous l’utilisez
avec l’entrée isolée (720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 701250 (HS10M12),
701251 (HS1M16), 701275 (ACCL/VOLT), 701281(FREQ), 720281(FREQ) ou 720254
(4CH 1M16)), veillez à l’utiliser uniquement avec des tensions inférieures ou égales à 42 V
pour des raisons de sécurité (ne reliez pas une tension supérieure à 42 V aux côtés Haut
et Bas). Pour les entrées non isolées (701255 (NONISO_10M12), etc.), serrez les vis du
module.
• Pour mesurer la tension élevée avec 701281 (FREQ) ou 720281(FREQ), utiliser une sonde
isolée (700929, 701947) ou une sonde passive 702902.
4
5
6
App
Index
3.5 Connecting Probes
• Pour 701250 (HS10M12) et 720250 (HS10M12)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 7029021
701250: 600 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
720250: 800 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901+701954)3
200 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (comme valeur conforme à la norme de sécurité)
250 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (tension maximale admise, comme valeur qui n’endommage
pas l’instrument lorsqu’elle est appliquée)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 702902.2 Ou si utilisé avec le câble de sécurité (1:1; 701901 et 701954
conjointement).4
701250: 400 Vrms (catégorie de mesure Autre (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
720250: 400 Vrms (CAT II)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)(CAT II 30 Vrms)
• Pour 701251 (HS1M16)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 7029021
600 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)3
140 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 702902.2 Ou si utilisé avec le câble de sécurité (1:1; 701901 et 701954
conjointement).4
400 Vrms (catégorie de mesure Autre (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II 30 Vrms)
• Pour 701255 (NONISO_10M12)
Ce module n’est pas isolé. Veillez à serrer les vis du module lors de la mesure d’une
tension supérieure à 42 V sur ce module. En outre, utilisez la sonde passive isolée et non
isolée 701940 (10:1).
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• Associé à la sonde passive 701940 (10:1)
600 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
200 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (comme valeur conforme à la norme de sécurité)
250 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (tension maximale admise, comme valeur qui n’endommage
pas l’instrument lorsqu’elle est appliquée)
• Pour 701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• Associé à la sonde passive 701940 (10:1)7 ou à l’entrée directe (câble non conforme
aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• Associé à la sonde passive 701940 (10:1)8 ou à l’entrée directe (câble non conforme
aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
3-22
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5 Connecting Probes
1
• Pour 701281 (FREQ) et 720281 (FREQ)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En cas d’utilisation avec la sonde isolée 700929 (10:1) ou (100:1) 701947 ou la sonde
passive 702902 (10:1).1
420 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)3 ou entrée directe (câble non
conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• En cas d’utilisation avec la sonde isolée 700929 (10:1) ou (100:1) 701947 ou la sonde
passive 702902 (10:1).2
701281: 300 Vrms (CAT II)
720281: 400 Vrms (CAT II)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)4 ou entrée directe (câble non
conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
2
3
• Pour 720243 (SENT)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En cas d’utilisation avec la sonde isolée 700929 (10:1) ou la sonde passive 702902 (10:1).1
420 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)3 ou entrée directe (câble non
conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• En cas d’utilisation avec la sonde isolée 700929 (10:1) ou la sonde passive 702902 (10:1).2
300 Vrms (CAT II)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)4 ou entrée directe (câble non
conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Pour 720254 (4CH 1M16)
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 7029021
600 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Câble de sécurité (1:1) (associé à 701901 + 701954)3
200 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (comme valeur conforme à la norme de sécurité)
400 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (tension maximale admise, comme valeur qui n’endommage
pas l’instrument lorsqu’elle est appliquée)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)5
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• En combinaison avec une sonde isolée (10:1) 700929 ou (100:1) 701947 ou une sonde
passive (10:1) 702902.2 Ou si utilisé avec le câble de sécurité (1:1; 701901 et 701954
conjointement).4
400 Vrms (catégorie de mesure Autre (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité)6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II 30 Vrms)
IM DL850E-03EN
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
3-23
5
6
App
Index
3.5 Connecting Probes
Avec 700929, 701947 ou 702902
Avec 701901 et 701954
H
700929
701947
702902
1
L
Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux
normes de sécurité)
701901
H
701954
3
L
2
Avec la sonde passive 10:1 (701940)
H
BNC
5
L
4
H
7
6
L
8
Dépassement de plage
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes
• When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time, perform phase correction of the
probe as described in section 3.6, “Compensating the Probe (Phase Correction).” Make the phase
correction on each channel to which the probe is to be connected.
• You cannot perform phase correction of the probe on the frequency module (701281 (FREQ) and
720281 (FREQ)) and SENT monitor module (720243 (SENT)). When connecting a probe to the
701281 (FREQ), 720281 (FREQ), or 720243 (SENT), first perform phase correction on the probe
using another module.
• If the object to be measured is connected to the instrument directly, without using a probe, a correct
measurement cannot be performed due to the input impedance. Please be aware of this.
• Note that if you use a voltage probe other than an isolated probe (700929 or 701947) or passive
probe (702902), correct measurements cannot be displayed when the attenuation is not 1:1, 10:1,
100:1, or 1000:1.
• Follow the instructions given in section 1.1, “Configuring Voltage Measurements,” in the user’s
manual to set the probe attenuation or the current-to-voltage conversion ratio to match the actual
value using the setup menu. If they do not match, measured values cannot be read correctly.
3-24
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5 Connecting Probes
Connecting Current Probes
1
*
When using current probes made by YOKOGAWA, use the probe power supply (optional) on the right
side panel of the DL850E/DL850EV.
* YOKOGAWA current probes: the 701930, 701931, 701932, 701933,701917, and 701918
2
For details on the connection procedure, see the manual that came with the current probe.
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
5
6
CAUTION
Do not use the probe power supply terminals (optional) on the right side panel of the DL850E/
DL850EV for purposes other than supplying power to the current probes. Also, be sure to
use only the number of probes allowed. Otherwise, the DL850E/DL850EV or the devices
connected to them may get damaged.
Index
French
ATTENTION
N’utilisez pas les bornes d’alimentation de sonde (option) sur le volet droit du DL850E/DL850EV
à des fins autres que l’alimentation des sondes. Veillez également à n’utiliser que le nombre
de sondes préconisé. Faute de quoi, le DL850E/DL850EV ou tout appareil connecté pourrait
être endommagé.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using Current Probes
When connecting the current probe to the probe power supply terminal on the right side panel, make
sure that the current does not exceed the range shown below. Otherwise, the DL850E/DL850EV
operation may become unstable due to the activation of the excessive current protection circuit of the
power supply.
A
If the terminals are named A through D
B
(Total current consumption for A through D) ≤ 1 A
PROBE
POWER
(±12V DC )
C
D
IM DL850E-03EN
App
3-25
3.5 Connecting Probes
Specifications of the Probe Power Supply Terminals (Optional)
Item
Number of probes that can be used
Probes that can be used
Number of current probes that can be used
4
Current probe (701930, 701931, 701932, and 701933)
701917 (5 A): Up to 2
701918 (5 A): Up to 2
701930 (150 A): Up to 2
701931 (500 A): Up to 1
701932 (30 A): Up to 2
701933 (30 A): Up to 2
Supply voltage
±12 V, four outputs (up to 1 A total current)
* Up to four 700937 current probes can be used, but this probe is a discontinued product.
When using the current probe, the number of probes that can be used is limited by the current
generated by the device under measurement (current measured by the current probe). The measured
versus consumed current characteristics of current probes that can be connected to the instrument are
indicated below.
200
150
Positive
current
100
50
0
-50
Negative
current
-100
-150
-200
-250
-15
-10
-5
0
5
Measured current (A)
10
Current consumption (mA)
500
400
300
Positive
current
200
100
0
-100
Negative
current
-200
-300
-400
-500
-500 -400 -300 -200 -100
0
400
100 200 300 400
300
200
Positive
current
100
0
Negative
current
-100
-200
-300
-400
-150
15
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
Current probe (701931)
-100
0
50
100
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
600
500
150
500
400
300
Positive
current
200
100
0
-100
Negative
current
-200
-300
-400
-500
-600
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
Measured current (A)
600
500
400
300
Positive
current
200
100
0
-100
Negative
current
-200
-300
-400
Current probe (701917)
Current probe (701918)
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
250
Current consumption [mA]
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
Current probe (701933)
Current consumption (mA)
-50
Measured current (A)
Current probe (701932)
Measured current (A)
200
150
Positive
current
100
50
0
-50
Negative
current
-100
-150
-500
-600
-50
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
Current probe (701930)
Current consumption (mA)
Current consumption (mA)
250
Current consumption (mA)
DC
AC (f = 50 Hz)
Current probe (700937)
-200
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
Measured current (A)
30
40
50
-250
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
Measured current [A]
3
4
5
For details about each current probe, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
3-26
IM DL850E-03EN
3.5 Connecting Probes
1
Connecting Differential Probes
When using Yokogawa differential probes (700924, 700925, 701926), connect the BNC output
connector to the oscilloscope’s input terminal. Also, be sure to connect the GND lead to the functional
ground terminal of the DL850E/DL850EV. If necessary, use the auxiliary grounding lead extension.
For details on the connection procedure, see the manual that came with the differential probe.
2
3
Functional ground terminal
5
GND lead
6
WARNING
In Using the High Voltage Differential Probes
Be sure to connect the ground lead of the differential probe (700924, 700925, 701926) to
the functional grounding terminal on the right side panel of the DL850E/DL850EV before
connecting to the measurement target. Not doing so may cause high voltage to appear in the
BNC connector of the differential probe.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
Utilisation de sondes différentielles haute tension
Bien relier le fil de terre de la sonde différentielle (700924, 700925, 701926) à la borne de
mise à la terre opérationnelle, sur le panneau droit de DL850E/DL850EV avant de le relier à
la cible de la mesure. Le fait de ne pas respecter cette consigne risque d’entraîner l’apparition
d’une tension élevée au niveau du connecteur BNC de la sonde différentielle.
IM DL850E-03EN
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
3-27
App
Index
3.6
Correcting the Probe Phase
For the following modules, always correct the probe phase before you use a probe for measurement.
• High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module: 720210 (HS100M12) and 720211 (HS100M12)
• High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module: 701250 (HS10M12) and 720250 (HS10M12)
• High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module: 701251 (HS1M16)
• High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module: 701255 (NONISO_10M12)
•Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF):701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
•Frequency Module:701281 (FREQ) and 720281 (FREQ)
•SENT Monitor Module:720243 (SENT)
•4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module:720254 (4CH 1M16)
CAUTION
Do not apply external voltage to the probe compensation signal output terminal. This may
cause damage to the internal circuitry.
French
ATTENTION
Ne pas appliquer de tension externe sur la borne de sortie de signal afin d’ajuster la
compensation de sonde. Cela pourrait endommager le circuit interne.
1. Turn on the power switch.
2. Connect the probe to a signal input terminal (the terminal that you will actually apply the signal
to measure to).
3. Connect the tip of the probe to the probe compensation signal output terminal on the front panel
of the instrument, and connect the ground wire to the functional ground terminal.
4. Follow the instructions in section 4.5, “Performing Auto Setup,” to perform auto setup on the
probe.
5. Insert a screwdriver into the phase adjustment hole, and turn the variable capacitor so that the
displayed waveform is an appropriate square wave.
Functional
ground terminal
Probe compensation
signal output terminal
Phase adjustment hole
3-28
IM DL850E-03EN
3.6 Correcting the Probe Phase
1
Necessity of Phase Correction of the Probe
If the probe’s input capacitance is not within the appropriate range, the gain will not be steady in
relation to the frequency, and waveforms will not be displayed correctly. Also, because the input
capacitance is not the same for each probe, the probe’s have variable capacitors (trimmers) that need
to be adjusted. This adjustment is referred to as phase correction.
Always correct the phase of a probe that you are using for the first time.
Also, because the appropriate input capacitance range is different for each channel, you need to
perform phase correction when you change the channel that a probe is connected to.
The instrument generates the following square wave signal from the COMP signal output terminal.
Frequency: 1 kHz ± 1%
Computation:1 V ± 10 %
4
Differences in the Waveform due to the Phase Correction of the
Probe
Correct waveform
Too much adjustment
(increased gain in the high
frequency band)
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
Phase Compensation Signal
2
Not enough adjustment
(reduced gain in the high
frequency band)
5
6
App
Index
Notes about Using Probes with the Frequency Module or SENT
Monitor Module
You cannot perform phase correction on a probe connected to the frequency module and SENT
monitor module. To use a probe with the frequency module or SENT monitor module, first perform
phase correction on the probe using another module.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-29
3.7
Connecting Measurement Leads
Connecting Measurement Leads
When you measure voltage using the 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)),
701267 (HV (with RMS)), 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), and 720266 (TEMP/HPV),
connect the measurement leads of a plug-in type terminal to the input terminal.
H (red)
For the 701267
or 720268
L (black)
For the 701261, 701262,
701265, or 720266
WARNING
• When connecting a device under measurement to the instrument, be sure to turn off the
device. It is extremely dangerous to connect or remove measurement leads while the
device under measurement is on.
• When measuring high voltages, do not connect a plug-in type terminal with exposed
conducting parts to the input terminal to be used as a measurement lead. It is very
dangerous, if the connector comes loose.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, always connect measurement leads that
match the voltage range that you are measuring to the signal input terminals of the
701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701267 (HV (with RMS)),
720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), and 720266 (TEMP/HPV).
• When measuring high voltages using the 701267 (HV (with RMS)) or 720268 (HV (AAF,
RMS)), use a measurement lead(combination of 758933 and 701954) or 1:1 safety cables
(combination of 701904 and 701954).
Maximum Input Voltage and Maximum rated voltage to earth for the Modules
Applying a voltage exceeding the value indicated below may damage the input section. If the
frequency is above 1 kHz, damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value.
• For the 701261, 701262, 701265, and 720266
Maximum input voltage (across the input terminals, H and L,1 at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (across the input terminals, H or L, and earth,2 at a
frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
3-30
IM DL850E-03EN
3.7 Connecting Measurement Leads
For the 701261, 701262, 701265, or 720266
(Red)
Input
terminal
(Black)
H
1
For the 701267 or 720268
With the 758933 and 701954, or
701904 and 701954
(Red)
758933/
Input
terminal 701904
(Black)
H
4
3
701954
4
5
5
L
Index
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
• Toujours mettre l’appareil à mesurer hors tension avant de le brancher sur l’instrument. Il
est extrêmement dangereux de brancher un câble de mesure lorsque l’appareil à mesurer
est sous tension.
• Lors de la mesure de tension élevées, ne pas relier une borne de type enfichable, avec
des parties conductrices exposées, à la borne d’entrée à utiliser comme un fil de mesure. Il
est très dangereux que le connecteur se détache.
IM DL850E-03EN
3
App
Direct input (cable that does not comply
with the safety standards)
H
(Red)
6
Input
terminal
L
7
(Black)
Over-Range Indication
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
2
6
2
L
1
Making Preparations for Measurements
• For the 701267 (HV (with RMS)) and 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS))
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
•Combination of 758933 measurement leads and 701954 alligator clips or combination of
701904 1:1 safety cables and 701954 alligator clips3
850 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)6
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
•Combination of 758933 measurement leads and 701954 alligator clips or combination of
701904 1:1 safety cables and 701954 alligator clips5
(Use caution because the overvoltage tolerance of 701267 differs between the low and
high sides.)
701267: 700 Vrms (CAT II) on the H side,4 400 Vrms (CAT II)5 on the L side
720268: 1000 Vrms (CAT II)4,5, 600 Vrms (CAT III)4,5
• Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)7
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
3-31
3.7 Connecting Measurement Leads
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Afin d’éviter le risque de choc électrique, toujours connecter les fils de mesure
correspondant à la plage de tensions en cours de mesure aux bornes d’entrée de signal
de 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701267 (HV (avec RMS)),
720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV) et 720266 (TEMP/HPV)
• Lorsque vous appliquez de hautes tensions au 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) et 720268 (HV
(AAF, RMS)) utilisez un cordon de mesure (combinaison de 758933 et 701954) ou des
câbles de sécurité 1:1 (combinaison de 701904 et 701954).
Tensions d’entrée maximales et tension nominale maximale à la terre les modules
L’application d’une tension supérieure à la valeur indiquée ci-dessous pourrait endommager la
section d’entrée. Si la fréquence est supérieure à 1 kHz, une tension inférieure à cette valeur
pourra tout de même endommager la section d’entrée.
• Pour 701261, 701262, 701265 et 720266
Tension d’entrée maximale (via les bornes d’entrée, H et L,1 à une fréquence d’1 kHz ou
moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (via les bornes d’entrée, H ou L, et la terre,2 à une
fréquence d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Pour 701267 (HV (avec RMS)) et 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS))
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• Combinaison de fils de mesure 758933 et de pinces alligator 701954 ou combinaison de
câble de sécurité 1:1 701904 et de pinces alligator 701954. 3
850 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité6
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (à une fréquence 1 kHz ou inférieure)
• Combinaison de fils de mesure 758933 et de pinces alligator 701954 ou combinaison de
câble de sécurité 1:1 701904 et de pinces alligator 701954. 5
(Procéder avec soin, car la tolérance de surtension de 701267 diffère entre le bas et le
haut.)
701267: 700 Vrms (CAT II) sur le côté H, 4 400 Vrms (CAT II) 5 sur le côté L
720268: 1000 Vrms (CAT II) 4
• Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux normes de sécurité7
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Pour 701261, 701262 et 701265
H
(Rouge)
1
Borne
d’entrée
2
L
(Noir)
Pour 701267
Avec 758933 et 701954
Avec 701904 et 701954
(Rouge)
Borne 758933
d’entrée 701904
(Noir)
3-32
H
4
3
701954
5
L
Entrée directe (câble non conforme aux
normes de sécurité
H
(Rouge)
6
Borne
d’entrée
L
7
(Noir)
IM DL850E-03EN
3.7 Connecting Measurement Leads
Dépassement de plage
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
1
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
4
5
6
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
3-33
3.8
Connecting Thermocouples
Connecting Thermocouples
If you are connecting the compensation lead of the thermocouple to the input terminal (binding post
terminal) of the 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), or 720266
(TEMP/HPV), loosen the terminal knob, pass the lead through the terminal, and tighten the knob.
H
L
Positive lead
Negative lead
Extension wires
(or bare thermocouple wires)
To the thermocouple
WARNING
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, check the input
voltage level.
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
CAUTION
• The 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV), or
720266 (TEMP/HPV) is isolated from the DL850E/DL850EV. However, applying a voltage
exceeding the value below may damage the input section. If the frequency is above 1 kHz,
damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value.
Maximum input voltage (across the input terminals, H and L, at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (across the input terminal L and earth at a frequency of 1
kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Correct measurements cannot be obtained when the positive and negative thermocouple
leads are connected in reverse.
• Immediately after connecting the thermocouple, the heat balance may be disturbed at
the input terminal section and may cause measurement errors. Therefore, wait about ten
minutes before making a measurement.
• In an environment where the air from the air conditioning is directly applied to the input
terminals or where there are effects from a heat source, the heat balance may be disturbed
at the input terminal section and cause measurement errors.
When making measurements in this type of environment, take preventive measures such
as changing the position.
3-34
IM DL850E-03EN
3.8 Connecting Thermocouples
1
French
AVERTISSEMENT
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, vérifier le niveau de tension d’entrée.
3
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
4
5
ATTENTION
• 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701265 (TEMP/HPV) ou 720266
(TEMP/HPV) est isolé de DL850E/DL850EV. Cependant, le fait d’appliquer une tension
dépassant la valeur inférieure risque d’endommager la section d’entrée. Si la fréquence est
supérieure à 1 kHz, cela risque d’entraîner des dégâts, même si la tension est inférieure à
cette valeur.
Tension d’entrée maximale (via les bornes d’entrée, H et L, à une fréquence d’1 kHz ou
moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (via la borne d’entrée L et la terre à une fréquence
d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Il est impossible d’obtenir des mesures correctes si les fils de thermocouple positifs et
négatifs sont branchés à l’envers.
• Immédiatement après avoir branché le thermocouple, l’équilibreur thermique risque d’être
perturbé dans la zone de la borne d’entrée, ce qui risque de causer des erreurs de mesure.
C’est pourquoi, il faut attendre environ dix minutes avant d’effectuer une mesure.
• Dans un environnement dans lequel l’air provenant de la climatisation est directement
appliqué sur les bornes d’entrée ou dans lequel il existe des effets provenant de la source
de chaleur, l’équilibreur de chaleur risque d’être perturbé dans la zone de la borne d’entrée,
ce qui risque de causer des erreurs de mesure.
Si des mesures sont réalisées dans ce type d’environnement, prendre des mesures
préventives telles que le changement de position.
IM DL850E-03EN
Making Preparations for Measurements
2
3-35
6
App
Index
3.9
Connecting Bridgeheads
Strain is measured by connecting a strain gauge bridge (bridge head) or a strain gauge transducer to
the strain module.
This section will mainly describe the procedures and precautions related to the connection of the
bridge head (Model 701955, 701956, 701957, and 701958). For the connection of other strain gauge
bridges or strain gauge transducers, see the respective manuals.
CAUTION
Only connect a strain gauge bridge (bridge head) or a strain gauge transducer to the strain
module. Connecting other devices or applying a voltage that exceeds the values indicated
below to the strain module may damage the input section.
• Maximum input voltage (between Input+ and Input–)
10 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Maximum rated voltage to earth (between each terminal and earth ground)
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
French
ATTENTION
Brancher seulement un pont de jauge de contrainte (tête de pont) ou un transducteur de jauge
de contrainte au module de contrainte. Le fait de brancher d’autres appareils ou d’appliquer
une tension dépassant les valeurs indiquées ci-dessous sur le module de contrainte risque
d’endommager la zone d’entrée.
• Tension d’entrée maximale (entre l’entrée + et l’entrée –)
10 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Tension nominale maximale à la terre (entre chaque borne et mise à la terre)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Connecting the Strain Gauge
The bridge head (701955, 701956, 701957, and 701958) supports six types of connection methods:
single-gauge method, single-gauge three-wire method, adjacent-side two-gauge method, oppositeside two-gauge method, opposite-side two-gauge three-wire method, and four-gauge method. For
details, see the manual that came with the bridge head (701955, 701956, 701957, or 701958).
If you are using a strain gauge bridge or a strain gauge transducer other than the bridge head
(701955, 701956, 701957, and 701958), see the respective manuals.
3-36
IM DL850E-03EN
3.9 Connecting Bridgeheads
1
Connecting the Strain Module and the Bridge Head
When Using the Strain Module (701270) and the Bridge Head (701955 or 701956)
Using the cable that came with the bridge head (701955 or 701956), connect the Strain Module
(701270) and the bridge head.
2
Strain Module 701270
(STRAIN_NDIS)
3
Bridgehead
701955 or 701956
Cable
Using the cable that came with the bridge head (701957 or 701958), connect the Strain Module
(701271) and the bridge head.
Strain Module 701271
(STRAIN_DSUB)
Cable
6
Bridgehead
701957 or 701958
When Using a Bridge Head with a MIL Standard (MIL-C-26482) Connector Wiring
Bridgehead with MIL standard
connector wiring
Connector adapter cable
(700935) 1.5 m long
NDIS connector pinout
F
G
E
D
IM DL850E-03EN
A
B
C
A: Bridge+ (positive bridge
voltage)
B: Input– (negative
measurement signal)
C: Bridge– (negative bridge
voltage)
D: Input+ (positive
measurement signal)
E: Floating common
F: Sense+ (positive bridge
voltage sensing)
G: Sense– (negative bridge
voltage sensing)
MIL standard connector pinout
B
C
A
D
F
E
4
5
The connector on the Strain Module (701270) is a NDIS connector.* Use a connector adapter
cable (700935) by YOKOGAWA to make a MIL-NDIS conversion and connect to the Strain Module
(701270).
* Connector recommended by JSNDI (Japanese Society for Non-Destructive Inspection)
Strain Module 701270
(STRAIN_NDIS)
Making Preparations for Measurements
When Using the Strain Module (701271) and the Bridge Head (701957 or 701958)
Corresponding
terminals
A: Signal+
NDIS
MIL
B: Signal–
A
C
C: Excitation+
B
B
D: Excitation–
C
D
E: NC (no connection) D
A
F: NC (no connection)
3-37
App
Index
3.9 Connecting Bridgeheads
When Using the A1002JC Connector by YOKOGAWA
You can create your own cable by using the YOKOGAWA A1002JC connector that is compatible
with the strain module and use the cable to connect a strain gauge bridge or a strain gage
transducer to the strain module.
A1002JC NDIS connector
(two in a set)
Pinouts as viewed in the direction of arrow 1
F
E
G
D
A
B
C
1
A: Bridge+ (positive bridge voltage)
B: Input– (negative measurement signal)
C: Bridge– (negative bridge voltage)
D: Input+ (positive measurement signal)
E: Floating common
F: Sense+ (positive bridge voltage sensing)
G: Sense– (negative bridge voltage sensing)
Note
• The connector shell is connected to the case potential of the DL850E/DL850EV.
• Each of the signals from A to G is isolated within the module.
• When creating your own cable, we recommend that you use a shielded cable in order to shut out external
noise.
CAUTION
Take extra care when wiring the connectors. If the wiring is shorted or incorrect, it can damage
the DL850E/DL850EV or other instruments that are connected to the DL850E/DL850EV.
French
ATTENTION
Redoubler de vigilance lors du câblage des connecteurs. Si le câblage est shunté ou
incorrect, il risque d’endommager le dispositif DL850E/DL850EV ou d’autres instruments
reliés à DL850E/DL850EV.
Pinout of the D-Sub Connector
As viewed in the direction of arrow 1
1
D-Sub 9-pin
connector
Cable
Connector shell
1
3-38
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
1: Floating common
2: Sense– (negative bridge voltage sensing)
3: Shuntcal– (negative shunt signal)
4: Shuntcal+ (positive shunt signal)
5: Sense+ (positive bridge voltage sensing)
6: Bridge– (negative bridge voltage)
7: Input– (negative measurement signal)
8: Input+ (positive measurement signal)
9: Bridge+ (positive bridge voltage)
IM DL850E-03EN
3.10 Connecting a Logic Probe to the Logic Input
Module
1
To measure logic signals, connect a logic probe (the 702911, 702912, 700986, or 700987) to a logic
input module (the 720230).
CAUTION
French
ATTENTION
• Le fait d’appliquer une tension supérieure aux limites mentionnées ci-dessous risque
d’endommager la sonde logique ou l’instrument. Si la fréquence est supérieure à 1 kHz,
une tension inférieure à cette valeur pourra tout de même endommager la section d’entrée.
Tension d’entrée maximale (à une fréquence de 1 kHz ou moins)
• Sondes logiques 702911 et 702912 : 35 V
• Sonde logique à grande vitesse 700986 : 42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Sonde logique isolée 700987 :250 Vrms (cependant, la valeur crête c.a. doit
être inférieure à 350 V et c.c. à 250 V)
• Pour les sondes logiques 702911, 702912 et la sonde logique à grande vitesse 700986,
les huit lignes d’entrée d’une cosse unique partagent la même terre. De plus, la terre
de l’instrument et celles de chaque cosse sont reliées. Ne pas émettre de signaux de
tensions communes différentes vers chaque ligne d’entrée. Cela risquerait d’endommager
l’instrument, les sondes logiques reliées et les appareils reliés.
• Les bornes d’entrée d’une sonde logique isolée sont isolées les unes des autres et de
DL850E/DL850EV.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-39
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
• Applying a voltage greater than the limits listed below may damage the logic probe or the
instrument. For frequencies above 1 kHz, damage may occur even if the voltage is less
than the limits listed below.
Maximum input voltage (at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
• Logic probes (702911 and 702912): 35 V
• High-speed logic probe 700986: 42 V (DC + ACpeak)
• Isolated logic probe 700987:250 Vrms (however, ACpeak must be less than 350 V,
and DC must be less than 250 V)
• For logic probes (702911 and 702912), and high-speed logic probe 700986, the eight input
lines of a single pod share the same ground. Also, the instrument’s ground and the grounds
of each pod are connected. Do not apply signals with different common voltages to each
input line. Doing so may damage the instrument, connected logic probes, and connected
devices.
• The input terminals of an isolated logic probe are isolated from each other and from the
DL850E/DL850EV.
• Turn off the DL850E/DL850EV before you connect or remove a 26-pin connector from the
logic signal input connector.
• Do not stack the isolated logic probes during use. Also, allow enough space around the
probes to avoid a temperature increase inside the probes.
• Do not use the YOKOGAWA 700985 logic probe with the DL850E/DL850EV. The 700985
is shaped so that it can be connected to the logic signal input connector of the DL850E/
DL850EV, but it is not electrically compatible with the DL850E/DL850EV, so connecting the
two could damage the DL850E/DL850EV or the 700985.
2
4
5
6
App
Index
3.10 Connecting a Logic Probe to the Logic Input Module
• Éteindre DL850E/DL850EV avant de brancher un connecteur de 26 broches au connecteur
d’entrée du signal logique ou de l’en retirer.
• Ne pas empiler les sondes logiques isolées lors de leur utilisation. Laisser également
suffisamment d’espace autour des sondes pour éviter une augmentation de température à
l’intérieur des sondes.
• Ne pas utiliser la sonde logique YOKOGAWA 700985 avec DL850E/DL850EV. Le dispositif
700985 est conçu pour pouvoir être branché au connecteur d’entrée de signal logique
de DL850E/DL850EV, mais il n’est pas électriquement compatible au dispositif DL850E/
DL850EV. Par conséquent, le fait de brancher les deux ensemble risque d’endommager
DL850E/DL850EV ou 700985.
About the Logic Probe
Types of Logic Probes
YOKOGAWA provides the following four types of probes (as accessories) for connecting to the logic
signal input connector of the DL850E/DL850EV.
• 1 m Logic Probe 702911
• 3 m Logic Probe 702912
• High-Speed Logic Probe 700986
• Isolated Logic Probe 700987
Types of Measurement Leads That Can Be Used
Use the following leads to connect to the point of measurement.
Types of Connection Leads That Can Be Used with Logic Probes (702911, 702912)
and High-Speed Logic Probe 700986
The following two types are available.
• Connecting lead (alligator clip, parts No. B9879PX)
This lead is primarily for connecting to contact circuits. The lead consists of 8 signal lines (red)
and 8 earth lines (black).
• Connecting lead (IC clip, parts No. B9879KX)
This lead is primarily for connecting to electronic circuits. The lead consists of 8 signal lines (red)
and 2 earth lines (black).
Types of Measurement Leads That Can Be Used on the Isolated Logic Probe 700987
Use the following measurement lead.
• For measuring voltages of 42 V or more: Measurement lead for isolation logic 758917
An alligator adapter (758922), alligator adapter (758929), or alligator clip (dolphin type, 701954)
is needed to make measurements.
Note
Do not modify the connecting leads. Doing so may degrade their specifications.
3-40
IM DL850E-03EN
3.10 Connecting a Logic Probe to the Logic Input Module
1
Connecting Logic Probes
Logic Probes (702911, 702912) and High-Speed Logic Probe 700986
1. Attach the connecting lead (IC clip or alligator clip) that came with the logic probe, and push
the logic probe levers inwards to lock the connector into place. To remove the connecting leads
from the logic probe, push both of the levers outwards. Proceed to step 3.
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
Connecting the Isolated Logic Probe 700987
1. Connect the measurement leads to the logic probe’s input terminal.
2. Set the input switch. When you set it to AC, the threshold levels are 50 VAC ± 50% (Hi: 80 to
250 VAC, Lo: 0 to 20 VAC); when you set it to DC, the threshold levels are 6 V ± 50% (Hi: 10 to
250 VDC, Lo: 0 to 3 VDC).
Connecting the Logic Probe to a Logic Input Module
3. Turn the instrument’s power switch off.
4. Connect to the logic signal input connector of the logic input module (720230) the end of the
logic probe’s 26-pin connector that has a clamp filter (ferrite core; part number: A1190MN).
5
6
App
5. Turn on the DL850E/DL850EV.
Index
To the logic signal input connector
of the logic input module
Note
• When a logic probe is not connected to the DL850E/DL850EV, each bit is indicated as being at the high
level.
• For the logic probe specifications, see section 6.14, “Logic Probe Specifications.”
• The logic input display is turned off by default. For information about turning the display on and off, see
chapter 1, “Vertical and Horizontal Control,” in the user’s manual.
• Before using logic probes (702911, 702912) or isolated logic probe 700987, flip the attenuation switch
back and forth several times. The switch’s electrical contacts can weaken if not used for long periods of
time.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-41
3.11 Connecting an Acceleration Sensor
An acceleration sensor is connected when measuring acceleration on the acceleration/voltage module
(with AAF) (701275 (ACCL/VOLT)). For a details on acceleration sensors, see the respective manuals.
WARNING
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
CAUTION
• Applying a voltage that exceeds the values indicated below to the 701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
may damage the input section.
Maximum input voltage: 42 V (DC + ACpeak)
• When connecting acceleration sensors, do it without the bias current being supplied to the
sensor. Otherwise, damage to the internal circuitry of the acceleration sensors may result.
• The DL850E/DL850EV only supports acceleration sensors that are driven by constant
current with driving current of 4 mA and driving voltage of 22 V.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
ATTENTION
• Le fait d’appliquer une tension dépassant les valeurs indiquées ci-dessous sur 701275
(ACCL/VOLT) risque d’endommager la zone d’entrée.
Tension d’entrée maximale : 42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
• Lors du branchement des capteurs d’accélération, faire en sorte que le courant de
polarisation n’alimente pas le capteur. Cela risquerait en effet d’endommager les circuits
internes des capteurs d’accélération.
• DL850E/DL850EV ne prend en charge que les capteurs d’accélération alimentés par un
courant constant avec un courant d’entraînement de 4 mA et une tension d’entraînement
de 22 V.
3-42
IM DL850E-03EN
3.11 Connecting an Acceleration Sensor
1
Connecting Acceleration Sensors
When Connecting Built-in Amplifier Type Acceleration Sensors
The DL850E/DL850EV allows built-in amplifier type (low impedance) acceleration sensors to be
directly connected. To connect built-in amplifier type acceleration sensors, use BNC cables. Use
cables that are appropriate for the acceleration sensors being used.
Connect the acceleration sensors with the bias current turned off. After connection, turn on the supply
current to the acceleration sensors for making measurements.
Since the charge output type (high impedance) acceleration sensors do not have built-in amplifier
circuit, they cannot be directly connected to the DL850E/DL850EV. Use either of the following two
methods to connect the sensors.
4
Using the Charge Amplifier
Connect a charge-output-type acceleration sensor to the charge amplifier using a high-insulation,
low-noise cable. The acceleration signal (charge signal) that has been converted to a voltage signal
by the charge amplifier is input to the DL850E/DL850EV using a normal coaxial cable. The DL850E/
DL850EV measures the signal in the voltage measurement mode. The measured data can be
converted to acceleration values using the scale conversion function of the DL850E/DL850EV.
DL850E/DL850EV
High-insulation,
low-noise cable
Charge-output-type
acceleration sensor
When using the charge converter
DL850E/DL850EV
Normal coaxial
cable
Charge-output-type
acceleration sensor
Charge
converter
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
(acceleration measurement)
Note
The unit of measurement of acceleration on the DL850E/DL850EV is m/s2. If the sensitivity is indicated in
mV/G for the acceleration sensor that you are using, convert it to m/s2. (1 G = 9.81 m/s2)
IM DL850E-03EN
6
Index
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
(voltage measurement)
Connect a charge-output-type acceleration sensor to the charge converter using a high-insulation,
low-noise cable. By driving the charge converter using a constant current from the DL850E/DL850EV,
voltage signals similar to those of the built-in amplifier type acceleration sensor can be obtained. The
DL850E/DL850EV measures the signals in the acceleration measurement mode and supplies bias
current to the charge converter. Set the input sensitivity of the DL850E/DL850EV according to the
charge converter gain and the sensitivity of the charge output type acceleration sensor.
The DL850E/DL850EV only supports charge converters that are driven by constant current with
driving current of 4 mA and driving voltage of 22 V.
High-insulation,
low-noise cable
5
App
Normal coaxial
cable
Charge amp
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
When Connecting Charge Output Type Acceleration Sensors
2
3-43
3.11 Connecting an Acceleration Sensor
Precautions
• Do not apply shock outside the specifications (see the manual for the acceleration sensor) to the
acceleration sensors. Doing so can damage the sensors.
• Do not impose drastic temperature changes on the acceleration sensors. Temperature changes
may affect the output value of the acceleration sensors.
• By default, the bias current on the acceleration sensors is turned off. Be sure to turn it on before
using the acceleration sensors. Bias current is valid only when measuring acceleration. When
measuring other parameters, it is automatically turned off. The bias current on/off setting is saved
when the DL850E/DL850EV is turned off.
3-44
IM DL850E-03EN
3.12 Connecting Sensors to the Frequency Module
1
Sensors and Signal Output Sources That Can Be Connected
2
The table below shows the sensor and signal output source that can be connected. Appropriate input
presets are provided for each sensor and signal output source. For information about presets, see
Input Setup in section 1.7, “Configuring Frequency, Revolution, Period, Duty Cycle, Power Supply
Frequency, Pulse Width, Pulse Integration, and Velocity Measurements,” in the user’s manual.
Preset Name
Logic 5V
Logic 3V
Logic 12V
Logic 24V
ZeroCross
AC100V
AC200V
EM Pickup
Pull-up 5V*
Making Preparations for Measurements
Sensor and Signal Output Source
5-V logic signal, 5-V output sensor, and sensor with TTL output
3-V logic signal and 3-V output sensor
12-V driven relay/sequence circuit and 12-V driven sensor
24-V driven relay/sequence circuit and 24-V driven sensor
Sensor/Encoder that outputs positive and negative voltages and sensor that outputs sine waves
100-VAC power supply (connected through the isolated probe (700929 or 701947) or passive
probe 702902)
200-VAC power supply (connected through the isolated probe (700929 or 701947) or passive
probe 702902)
Power-generating electromagnetic pickup
Open collector (0 to 5 V) output sensor, contact output
3
4
5
6
* For the internal equivalent circuit when the preset setting is Pull-up 5V, see the “Frequency Measurement”
section in chapter 2, “Vertical Axis” in the feature’s guide (IM DL850E-01EN).
App
WARNING
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
Index
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
IM DL850E-03EN
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
3-45
3.12 Connecting Sensors to the Frequency Module
Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting to Sensors or Signal
Output Sources
CAUTION
• The maximum input voltage for direct input is indicated below. Applying a voltage exceeding
this value can damage the input section. To apply high voltage that is 42 V or higher, be
sure to connect through an isolated probe (700929 or 701947) or passive probe 702902.
Maximum input voltage: 42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II)
• The minimum input voltage is 0.2 Vpp. At voltage amplitude less than 0.2 Vpp, the
measured values may be unstable.
• Attach/Remove the sensors after confirming that the rotating object to be measured is
stopped.
• Set the preset to electromagnetic pickup (EM Pickup) only when using the electromagnetic
pickup.
French
ATTENTION
• La tension d’entrée maximale de l’entrée directe est indiquée ci-dessous. Le fait d’appliquer
une tension dépassant cette valeur risque d’endommager la section d’entrée. Pour
appliquer une tension élevée de 42 V au moins, bien réaliser le branchement à l’aide d’une
sonde isolée (700929 ou 701947) ou d’une sonde passive 702902.
Tension d’entrée maximale : 42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II)
• La tension d’entrée minimale est 0,2 Vpp. Pour une amplitude de tension inférieure à
0,2 Vpp, les valeurs mesurées risquent d’être instables.
• Brancher/retirer les capteurs après avoir confirmé que l’objet rotatif à mesuré a été arrêté.
• Prérégler le paramétrage sur détection électromagnétique (EM Pickup) uniquement lors de
l’utilisation de la détection électromagnétique.
Connecting the Electromagnetic Pickup
• The DL850E/DL850EV allows power-generating electromagnetic pickup to be connected directly.
The DL850E/DL850EV does not support electromagnetic pickups that require external power
supply or those that require a terminator at the output.
• To connect electromagnetic pickups, use BNC cables. Use cables that are appropriate for the
electromagnetic pickups being used.
• When the input is set to electromagnetic pickup, determination is not made on whether the input
voltage level exceeds the specified input voltage range. Therefore, the LEDs (see page 3-10) do
not illuminate eve when the input voltage level is over range.
Rotating object under
measurement
DL850E/DL850EV
BNC connector
Power-generating
electromagnetic pickup
3-46
701281 (FREQ)
720281 (FREQ)
IM DL850E-03EN
3.13 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Voltage Input
Module
1
To measure voltages with the 16-CH voltage input module (720220 (16CH VOLT)), connect wires to
the terminal block.
WARNING
When connecting a device under measurement to the instrument, be sure to turn off the device.
It is extremely dangerous to connect or remove wires while the device under measurement is on.
The L input terminals are
Terminal block
L H Sub channel
1
2
electrically connected inside
the instrument (same potential).
16
Wire insertion hole
H
Input terminal
L
1
2
Ground
Screwdriver insertion hole
• When you release or lock the terminal block release levers, be careful not to injure yourself
on the levers’ protrusions.
Over-Range Indication
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
CAUTION
When you attach the terminal block, if you try to attach it upside down, you may damage the
terminal block and the module. Check the vertical orientation of the block before you install it.
IM DL850E-03EN
3-47
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage or maximum rated voltage
to earth.
• To avoid electric shock, be sure to ground the instrument.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Otherwise,
the electrical protection function and the mechanical protection function will not be activated.
• Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the surge voltage may occur.
• To prevent electric shock, connect wires to the terminal block that match the voltage range
that you are measuring.
• Applying a voltage exceeding the value indicated below may damage the input section. If the
frequency is above 1 kHz, damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value.
Maximum input voltage (across the input terminals, H and L,1 at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (across the input terminals, H or L, and earth,2 at a
frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Wire the L input terminals for all of the sub channels on the same module to the same
potential. The L input terminals of the sub channels are all common. Because the L input
terminals are electrically connected inside the DL850E/DL850EV, connecting different
potentials to them could result in short circuiting and damage to the 16-CH voltage input module.
2
4
5
6
App
Index
3.13 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Voltage Input Module
French
AVERTISSEMENT
Toujours mettre l’appareil à mesurer hors tension avant de le brancher sur l’instrument. Il est
extrêmement dangereux de brancher un câble de mesure lorsque l’appareil à mesurer est
sous tension.
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Ne pas dépasser les valeurs maximales de tension d’entrée, de tension nominale maximale
à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, l’instrument doit impérativement être relié à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours serrer les vis des modules, à défaut de
quoi les fonctions de protection électrique et de protection mécanique ne seront pas activées.
• Éviter les connexions continues dans les environnements pouvant être soumis à surtension.
• Afin d’éviter un risque de choc électrique, raccorder les câbles au bornier qui correspondent
à la plage de tensions en cours de mesure.
• L’application d’une tension supérieure à la valeur indiquée ci-dessous pourrait endommager
la section d’entrée. Si la fréquence est supérieure à 1 kHz, une tension inférieure à cette
valeur pourra tout de même endommager la section d’entrée.
Tension d’entrée maximale (via les bornes d’entrée, H et L,1 à une fréquence d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (via les bornes d’entrée, H ou L et la terre,2 à une
fréquence d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Câbler les bornes d’entrée L pour toutes les sous-voies sur le même module, au même
potentiel. Les bornes d’entrée L des sous-voies sont toutes communes. Les bornes d’entrée
L étant reliées électriquement à l’intérieur du dispositif DL850E/DL850EV, le fait d’y relier
différents potentiels risque d’entraîner un court-circuit et d’endommager le module d’entrée
de la tension 16-CH.
Les bornes d'entrée L sont
reliées électriquement à
l'intérieur de l'instrument
(même potentiel).
Bornier
L H Sous-voie
1
2
H
Borne d'entrée
L
16
Orifice d'insertion de câble
1
2
Terre
Orifice d'insertion de tournevis
• Lors du déblocage ou blocage des leviers de desserrage du bornier, faire attention de ne
pas se blesser contre les leviers.
Dépassement de plage
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
ATTENTION
Lors du branchement du bornier, s’il est branché à l’envers, cela risque d’endommager le
bornier et le module. Vérifier l’orientation verticale du bornier avant de l’installer
3-48
IM DL850E-03EN
3.13 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Voltage Input Module
What to Prepare
1
Remove approximately 7 mm of the insulation from the ends of the wires.
Electrical wire: 0.20 mm2 to 1.00 mm2 recommended (solid wire or thin stranded wire). AWG
size: 24-18.
2
Wiring
Approx. 7 mm
Flat-blade Screwdriver
3
Connecting Wires to the Terminal Block
First, turn off the DL850E/DL850EV. Make sure that the other end of the wire that you are connecting
to the terminal block is not connected to the device under measurement, or make sure that the device
under measurement that you are going to connect to is turned off.
1. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver into the screwdriver insertion hole right next to the wire
Making Preparations for Measurements
Tip size: 0.4 mm (thickness) × 2.5 mm (width)
Shape: DIN5264-A (Use a straight driver.)
4
5
insertion hole.
Insert the flat-blade screwdriver into the hole firmly until the wire insertion hole will open.
2. Insert the wire that you prepared into the wire insertion hole.
6
Insert the wire until it reaches the back of the wire insertion hole.
3. Pull the flat-blade screwdriver out of the screwdriver insertion hole.
When you pull out the flat-blade screwdriver, hold the wire in place so that it does not come out with the
screwdriver.
App
4. Pull lightly on the wire to make sure that it doesn’t come out.
After you have finished connecting the wires, turn on the DL850E/DL850EV and the device under
measurement.
Wire insertion hole
Terminal block
Screwdriver
insertion hole
Index
Module: 720220 (16CH VOLT)
Wire
Flat-blade screwdriver
Note
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Block
It is normally not necessary to remove the terminal block, but it is possible to do so.
Removal
Push terminal block release levers 1 and 2 to their release positions, and pull out the terminal block.
Attachment
Push terminal block release levers 1 and 2 to their lock positions, and insert the terminal block. Push the
terminal block firmly all the way to the back. However, the terminal block will not go all the way to the back
if it is upside down. Do not try to force the terminal block all the way to the back.
Removing
Release
Release lever 1
Attaching
Hold
Release lever 2
IM DL850E-03EN
3-49
3.14 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Temperature/
Voltage Input Module
If you are using the 16-CH temperature/voltage input module (720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)) to
measure temperature and voltage, connect thermocouples or wires to the 16-channel scanner box.
WARNING
When connecting a device under measurement to the instrument, be sure to turn off the
device. It is extremely dangerous to connect or disconnect thermocouples or wires while the
device under measurement is on.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the Modules
• To avoid electric shock, be sure to ground the instrument.
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock, be sure to fasten the module screws. Otherwise,
the electrical protection function and the mechanical protection function will not be activated.
Precautions to Be Taken When Using the 16-CH Scanner Box
• Do not connect or disconnect the 16-CH scanner box or the cables that are connected to it
while the power is on.
• Do not apply input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage or maximum rated voltage
to earth.
• Avoid continuous connection under an environment in which the surge voltage may occur.
• To prevent electric shock, connect wires to the terminal block that match the voltage range
that you are measuring.
• Applying a voltage exceeding the value indicated below may damage the input section. If the
frequency is above 1 kHz, damage may occur even when the voltage is below this value.
Maximum input voltage (across the input terminals, + and −,1 at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth (across the input terminals, + or −, and earth,2 at a
frequency of 1 kHz or less)
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• The − input terminals of the sub channels are electrically insulated inside the scanner
box. If you connect a wire that has a potential difference greater than 42 V (DC + ACpeak)
between sub channels, the insulation may be damaged, which will lead to the 16-CH
scanner box being damaged.
Terminal block
Sub channel
+
CH
1
−
+
CH 2
−
+
− CH 8
Terminal block
Sub channel
+
CH
9
−
+
CH 10
−
+
− CH 16
+
Input terminal
−
1
2
Ground
Screw
Wire insertion hole
Over-Range Indication
If over-range is indicated, the DL850E/DL850EV may be receiving a voltage higher than the
observed waveform or measured waveform values. To prevent electric shock, change the
vertical scale with the SCALE knob so that the entire amplitude of the waveform is displayed
within the waveform display area, and check the input voltage level.
3-50
Over-range indication
Indicates the number of the channel that over-range is occurring on.
Channel indication when over-range is occurring on multiple channels
Indicates the smallest number among the channels that over-range is
occurring on.
IM DL850E-03EN
3.14 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
1
CAUTION
• Correct measurements cannot be obtained when the positive and negative thermocouple
leads are connected in reverse.
• Immediately after connecting the thermocouple, the heat balance may be disturbed at
the input terminal section and may cause measurement errors. Therefore, wait about ten
minutes before making a measurement.
• In an environment where the air from the air conditioning is directly applied to the input
terminals or where there are effects from a heat source, the heat balance may be disturbed
at the input terminal section and cause measurement errors.
When making measurements in this type of environment, take preventive measures such
as changing the position.
2
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
French
5
AVERTISSEMENT
Lors du raccordement d’un appareil en cours de mesure à l’instrument, s’assurer que l’appareil
est éteint. Il est extrêmement dangereux de brancher ou débrancher des thermocouples ou
des câbles lorsque l’appareil en cours de mesure est allumé.
6
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation des modules
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, l’instrument doit impérativement être relié à la terre.
• Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, toujours serrer les vis des modules, à défaut de
quoi les fonctions de protection électrique et de protection mécanique ne seront pas activées.
App
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation de boîtier de scanner 16-CH
• Ne pas brancher ou débrancher le boîtier de scanner 16-CH ou les câbles qui y sont reliés
s’ils sont sous tension.
• Ne pas dépasser les valeurs maximales de tension d’entrée, de tension nominale maximale
à la terre.
• Éviter les connexions continues dans les environnements pouvant être soumis à surtension.
• Afin d’éviter un risque de choc électrique, raccorder les câbles au bornier qui correspondent
à la plage de tensions en cours de mesure.
• L’application d’une tension supérieure à la valeur indiquée ci-dessous pourrait endommager
la section d’entrée. Si la fréquence est supérieure à 1 kHz, une tension inférieure à cette
valeur pourra tout de même endommager la section d’entrée.
Tension d’entrée maximale (via les bornes d’entrée, + et −,1 à une fréquence d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.)
Tension nominale maximale à la terre (via les bornes d’entrée, + ou −, et la terre,2 à une
fréquence d’1 kHz ou moins)
42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
• Les bornes d’entrée − des sous-voies sont électriquement isolées à l’intérieur du boîtier
de scanner. En cas de branchement d’un câble présentant une différence de potentiel
supérieure à 42 V (c.c. + crête c.a.) entre les sous-voies, l’isolation risque d’être
endommagée, ce qui causera des dégâts sur le boîtier de scanner 16-CH.
Bornier
Sous-voie
+
CH
1
−
+
CH 2
−
+
− CH 8
Bornier
Sous-voie
+
CH
9
−
+
CH 10
−
+
− CH 16
+
Borne d'entrée
−
Index
1
2
Terre
Vis
Orifice d'insertion de câble
IM DL850E-03EN
3-51
3.14 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
Dépassement de plage
En cas de dépassement de plage, le DL850E/DL850EV risque de recevoir une tension
supérieure à la forme d’onde observée ou aux valeurs de forme d’onde mesurées. Pour éviter
tout risque de choc électrique, modifier l’échelle de gain vertical à l’aide du bouton SCALE, de
sorte que l’amplitude entière de la forme d’onde s’affiche sur l’afficheur, et vérifier le niveau de
tension d’entrée.
Dépassement de plage
Indique le numéro de canal sur lequel le dépassement de plage a lieu.
L’indication du canal en cas de dépassement
de plage sur des canaux multiples
Indique le numéro le plus petit parmi les canaux
sur lequel le dépassement a lieu.
ATTENTION
• Il est impossible d’obtenir des mesures correctes si les fils de thermocouple positifs et
négatifs sont branchés à l’envers.
• Immédiatement après avoir branché le thermocouple, l’équilibreur thermique risque d’être
perturbé dans la zone de la borne d’entrée, ce qui risque de causer des erreurs de mesure.
C’est pourquoi, il faut attendre environ dix minutes avant d’effectuer une mesure.
• Dans un environnement dans lequel l’air provenant de la climatisation est directement
appliqué sur les bornes d’entrée ou dans lequel il existe des effets provenant de la source
de chaleur, l’équilibreur de chaleur risque d’être perturbé dans la zone de la borne d’entrée,
ce qui risque de causer des erreurs de mesure.
Si des mesures sont réalisées dans ce type d’environnement, prendre des mesures
préventives telles que le changement de position.
What to Prepare
Thermocouple or Wiring
Remove approximately 7 mm of the insulation from the ends of the thermocouple or wires.
Electrical wire: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 recommended (solid wire or thin stranded wire).
AWG size: 26-16.
Approx. 7 mm
Flat-blade Screwdriver
Tip size: 0.6 mm (thickness) × 3.5 mm (width)
Screw tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 N•m)
Connecting Wires to the Terminal Block
First, turn off the DL850E/DL850EV. Make sure that the other end of the wire that you are connecting
to the terminal block is not connected to the device under measurement, or make sure that the device
under measurement that you are going to connect to is turned off.
When you first use the 16-CH scanner box, follow the procedure from step 3.
1. Remove the protection cover screw using a screwdriver.
2. Pull the protection cover up, and pull it out from the guide hole.
Protection cover screw
Guide hole
3-52
IM DL850E-03EN
3.14 Connecting Wires to the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
1
3. Loosen the terminal block screw using a flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Insert the thermocouple or wire that you prepared into the wire insertion hole.
Insert the thermocouple or wire until its end reaches the back of the wire insertion hole.
5. Tighten the terminal block screw using a flat-blade screwdriver.
Wire insertion hole
Terminal block
Wire
2
Flat-blade Screwdriver
3
7. Insert the protection cover into the guide hole.
8. Tighten the protection cover screw using a screwdriver.
5
Fixing the Device in Place
If necessary, you can use the accessory attaching plate, B8074LN, to fix the scanner box to the panel.
1. Align the small holes on the bottom side of the scanner box to the small projections of the
6
attaching plate.
2. Screw the scanner box and the attaching plate together using the accessory binding screws
(M4 × 5 mm).
App
Screw tightening torque: 1.2 N•m
Attaching plate
B8074LN
Index
Projections
Binding screws
(M4 x 5 mm)
Connecting the 16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module and the
Scanner Box
Using the cable that came with the scanner box (701953), connect the 720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)
and the scanner box.
16-CH Temperature/Voltage
Input Module
720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)
IM DL850E-03EN
Making Preparations for Measurements
4
6. Pull lightly on the wire to make sure that it doesn’t come out.
Cable
16-CH Scanner Box
701953
3-53
3.15 Connecting a Cable to the CAN Bus Monitor
Module
To monitor CAN bus signals, connect a cable to the CAN bus monitor module’s D-sub connector.
Connector Pinout
The pinout of the D-sub connector (9 pin, male) is shown below.
Pinout
5
9
6
1
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Signal
(NC)
CAN_L
GND
(NC)
(NC)
GND
CAN_H
(NC)
(NC)
Function
Not used (can not be connected to)
CAN low signal
Ground
Not used (can not be connected to)
Not used (can not be connected to)
Ground
CAN high signal
Not used (can not be connected to)
Not used (can not be connected to)
* One-inch screws (number 4-40 UNC) are used.
Note
The connector shell is connected to GND. Additionally, GND and the connector shell are isolated from the
electric potential of the DL850E/DL850EV case (earth).
CAUTION
Applying a voltage greater than the maximum input voltage may damage the input section.
French
ATTENTION
Le fait d’appliquer une tension dépassant la tension d’entrée maximale risque d’endommager
la section d’entrée.
Connecting the Cable (Signal wires)
When you connect a cable to the D-sub connector, be sure to tighten the screws to ensure that the
cable is connected securely.
CAN bus monitor module
720240 (CAN MONITOR)
Cable
Screws
3-54
IM DL850E-03EN
3.16 Connecting a Cable to the CAN & LIN Bus
Monitor Module
1
2
To monitor CAN bus signals, connect a cable to the CAN bus monitor module’s D-sub connector.
Connector Pinout
The pinout of the D-sub connector (9 pin, male) is shown below.
3
Pinout
LIN bus signal input terminal
5
9
1
6
Making Preparations for Measurements
CAN bus signal input terminal
4
5
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAN bus signal input terminal
Signal
Function
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
CAN_L
CAN low signal
CAN_GND Ground
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
CAN_GND Ground
CAN_H
CAN high signal
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
LIN bus signal input terminal
Signal
Function
LIN
LIN signal
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
LIN_GND Ground
VBAT
Battery supply voltage
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
LIN_GND Ground
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
(NC)
Not used (can not be connected to)
* One-inch screws (number 4-40 UNC) are used.
App
Index
Note
The shell of the CAN bus signal input connector is connected to CAN_GND. The shell of the LIN bus signal
input connector is connected to LIN_GND. Additionally, CAN_GND and its connector shell and LIN_GND and
its connector shell are isolated from the electric potential of the DL850E/DL850EV case (earth).
CAUTION
Applying a voltage greater than the maximum input voltage may damage the input section.
French
ATTENTION
Le fait d’appliquer une tension dépassant la tension d’entrée maximale risque d’endommager
la section d’entrée.
Connecting the Cable (Signal wires)
When you connect a cable to the D-sub connector, be sure to tighten the screws to ensure that the
cable is connected securely.
CAN & LIN bus monitor module
720241 (CAN & LIN)
Cable
Screws
IM DL850E-03EN
6
3-55
3.17 Attaching the Panel Sheet
Depending on the suffix code, attach the supplied front panel sheet if necessary. You can attach the
panel sheet over the panel sheet that was attached when the DL850E/DL850EV was shipped from the
factory.
Attaching the Panel Sheet
There are three panel sheet attachment hooks on both the left and right sides of the front panel.
Hook the panel sheet onto the three hooks on the left side.
Then, bend the panel sheet slightly, and hook it onto the three hooks on the right side.
3-56
Panel sheet attachment hook
IM DL850E-03EN
3.18 Loading Roll Paper into the Built-In Printer
(Option)
1
2
This section explains how to load roll paper into the optional built-in printer.
Printer Roll Paper
Part Number:
B9988AE
Specifications:
Heat sensitive paper, 10 m
Minimum Quantity: 10 rolls
4
5
Handling Roll Paper
The roll paper is made of heat sensitive paper that changes color thermochemically. Please read the
following information carefully.
6
Storage Precautions
The heat-sensitive paper changes color gradually at temperatures of approximately 70°C or higher.
The paper can be affected by heat, humidity, light, and chemicals, whether something has been
recorded on it. As such, please follow the guidelines listed below.
• Store the paper in a cool, dry, and dark place.
• Use the paper as quickly as possible after you break its protective seal.
• If you attach a plastic film that contains plasticizing material, such as vinyl chloride film or
cellophane tape, to the paper for a long time, the recorded sections will fade due to the effect of
the plasticizing material. Use a holder made of polypropylene to store the roll paper.
• When pasting the record paper to another material, do not use paste that contains organic
solvents such as alcohol or ether. Doing so will change the paper’s color.
• We recommend that you make copies of the recordings if you intend to store them for a long
period of time. Because of the nature of heat-sensitive paper, the recorded sections may fade.
Handling Precautions
• Only use genuine, YOKOGAWA-supplied roll paper.
• If you touch the roll paper with sweaty hands, there is a chance that you will leave fingerprints on
the paper, or blur the recorded sections.
• If you rub something hard against the surface of the roll paper, the paper may change color due
to frictional heat.
• If the roll paper comes into contact with products such as chemicals or oil, the paper may change
color or the recorded sections may disappear.
IM DL850E-03EN
3
Making Preparations for Measurements
Only use roll paper specifically made for use with the DL850E/DL850EV series. The DL850E/DL850EV
comes with one set of roll paper included. Use this when you first load roll paper into the built-in printer.
When you need a new supply of roll paper, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
3-57
App
Index
3.18 Loading Roll Paper into the Built-In Printer (Optional)
Attaching the Roll Paper
CAUTION
• Do not touch the print head. If you do, you may burn yourself.
• Do not touch the roll paper cutter section at the front end of the printer cover. Doing so may
cause injury.
French
ATTENTION
• Ne pas toucher la tête d’impression. Vous pourriez vous brûler.
• Ne pas toucher la section du coupe-papier à l’extrémité du cache de l’imprimante. Vous
pourriez vous blesser.
1.
Raise the handle.
2.
Printer cover
OPEN COVER
button
Press the OPEN COVER button to open
the printer cover.
3.
Set the roll paper with
the same orientation
as shown in the figure.
Roll paper cutter section
Print head
4.
Guide
Align the ends of the roll paper with
the guides, and set the roll in place.
3-58
5.
Close the cover, and press LOCK on the
center of the cover until you hear a click.
IM DL850E-03EN
3.19 Connecting an Antenna to the GPS Interface
(Option)
1
To synchronize the clock using GPS, connect the supplied GPS antenna to the clock sync signal input
terminal.
DL850E/DL850EV
2
3
GPS antenna
Making Preparations for Measurements
Clock sync signal input terminal
4
5
SMA connector
6
CAUTION
• Attach or remove the GPS antenna from the DL850E/DL850EV with the power turned off.
• If installed indoors, place the GPS antenna near a window or a location where it has a good
line of sight to GPS satellites.
Otherwise, time synchronization may not work properly.
• Do not install the GPS antenna in water or in contact with other liquids.
French
ATTENTION
• Brancher l’antenne GPS à DL850E/DL850EV ou l’en retirer avec l’alimentation coupée.
• Si elle est installée à l’intérieur, placer l’antenne GPS à proximité d’une fenêtre ou de l’endroit
où la connexion avec les satellites GPS est bonne.
La synchronisation des durées risque sinon de ne pas se faire correctement.
• Ne pas installer l’antenne GPS dans l’eau ou au contact d’autres liquides..
IM DL850E-03EN
3-59
App
Index
Chapter 4
4.1
Common Operations
Key and Jog Shuttle Operations
1
2
Key Operations
How to Use Setup Menus That Appear When Keys Are Pressed
The operation after you press a key varies depending on the key that you press.
HISTORY menu
FFT menu
E
B
F
B
G
H
4
Common Operations
A
3
MODE menu
5
F
6
C
App
D
A:Press the soft key to display a selection menu.
Press the soft key that corresponds to the appropriate setting.
B: Press the soft key to use the jog shuttle to configure this setting. Use the jog shuttle or the arrow
keys to set the value or select an item.
To set a value, press NUM LOCK, and then use the CH1 to CH16 keys.
C:A related setup menu appears when you press the soft key.
D:Press the soft key to execute the specified feature.
E:Selects which item to configure when configuring a feature that consists of two items that operate
with different settings, such as the FFT1 and FFT2 features.
F:The selected setting switches each time you press the soft key.
G:Displays a dialog box or a keyboard.
Use the jog shuttle, SET key, and arrow keys to configure the settings in the dialog box or
operate the keyboard.
H:Pressing a key sets the item to the setting that corresponds to that key.
How to Display the Setup Menus That Are Written in Purple below the Keys
In the explanations in this manual, “SHIFT+key name (written in purple)” is used to indicate the
following operation.
1.Press SHIFT. The SHIFT key illuminates to indicate that the keys are shifted.
Now you can select the setup menus written in purple below the keys.
2. Press the key that you want to display the setup menu of.
ESC Key Operation
If you press the ESC key when a setup menu or available settings are displayed, the screen returns
to the menu level above the current one. If you press the ESC key when the highest level menu is
displayed, the setup menu disappears.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-1
Index
4.1 Key and Jog Shuttle Operations
RESET Key Operation
If you press RESET when you are using the jog shuttle to set a value or select an item, the setting
is reset to its default value (depending on the operating state of the DL850E/DL850EV, the setting
may not be reset).
SET Key Operations
The operation varies as indicated below depending on what you are setting.
• For a setup menu that has two values that you use the jog shuttle to adjust
Press SET to switch the value that the jog shuttle adjusts.
• For a menu that has the jog shuttle + SET mark (
Press SET to confirm the selected item.
+ SET ) displayed on it.
Arrow Key Operations
The operation varies depending on what you are setting.
• When setting a value
Up and down arrow keys: Increases and decreases the value
Left and right arrow keys: Changes which digit to set
• When selecting the item to set
You can use the up and down arrow keys.
How to Enter Values in Setup Dialog Boxes
1. Use the keys to display the appropriate setup dialog box.
2. Use the jog shuttle or the arrow keys to move the cursor to the setting that you want to set.
3.Press SET. The operation varies as indicated below depending on what you are setting.
•
•
•
•
A selection menu appears.
A check box is selected or cleared.
An item is selected.
A table of settings is selected.
Displaying a Selection Menu and Selecting an Item
Displays the selection menu
Select Time or Freq.
After selecting an item with the jog
shuttle, press SET to confirm it.
Setting Items in a Table
After moving the cursor to the table, press SET
to select the setting the you want to change.
Press SET to select
a table entry.
How to Clear Setup Dialog Boxes
Press ESC to clear the setup dialog box from the screen.
4-2
IM DL850E-03EN
4.2
Entering Values and Strings
1
2
Entering Values
Using Dedicated Knobs
You can use the following dedicated knobs to enter values directly.
• Vertical POSITION knob
• SCALE knob
• TIME/DIV knob
• ZOOM magnification knob (MAG)
• Zoom POSITION knob (for scrolling zoom waveforms)
3
4
Using the Keypad
Common Operations
Using the Jog Shuttle
Select the appropriate item using the soft keys, and change the value using the jog shuttle, the SET
key, and the arrow keys. This manual sometimes describes this operation simply as “using the jog
shuttle.”
5
6
Press NUM LOCK to illuminate the NUM LOCK key, and use the CH1 to CH16 keys to enter a
value. After you enter the value, press ENTER to confirm it.
App
Index
Use the keypad to enter the value.
Note
Some items that you can set using the jog shuttle are reset to their default values when you press the RESET
key.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-3
4.2 Entering Values and Strings
Entering Character Strings
Use the keyboard that appears on the screen to enter file names and comments. Use the jog shuttle,
the SET key, and the arrow keys to operate the keyboard and enter a character string.
How to Operate the Keyboard
1. Press the InputMode soft key and then the English soft key.
2. After bringing up the keyboard, use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the character that you
want to enter. You can also move the cursor using the up, down, left, and right arrow keys.
3. Press SET to enter the character.
• If a character string has already been entered, use the arrow soft keys (< and >) to move the cursor to
the position you want to insert characters into.
• To switch between uppercase and lowercase letters, press the Caps soft key.
• To delete the previous character, press the BS soft key.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 3 to enter all of the characters in the string.
Select
on the keyboard or press the History soft key to display a list of character strings that you have
entered previously.
Use the jog shuttle to select a character string, and press SET to enter the selected character string.
5. Press the ENTER soft key, or move the cursor to ENTER on the keyboard, and press SET to
confirm the character string and clear the keyboard.
Character insertion position
Select to enter a string from the history.
Select the keyboard language
(English, Japanese).
Switches between uppercase
and lowercase
Moves the character insertion
position
Deletes the previous character
Confirms the characters that
you have entered
Select to enter a string from the
history.
List of previously entered strings
After selecting an item using the jog shuttle
or the arrow keys, press SET to confirm it.
Note
• @ cannot be entered consecutively.
• File names are not case-sensitive. Comments are case-sensitive. The following file names cannot be
used due to MS-DOS limitations:
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and LPT1 to LPT9
4-4
IM DL850E-03EN
4.3
Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices
1
2
Connecting a USB Keyboard
You can connect a USB keyboard and use it to enter file names, comments, and other items.
Usable Keyboards
3
You can use the following keyboards that conform to USB Human Interface Devices (HID) Class
Ver. 1.1.
• When the USB keyboard language is English:
104 keyboards
• When the USB keyboard language is Japanese: 109 keyboards
4
Common Operations
Note
• Do not connect incompatible keyboards.
• The operation of USB keyboards that have USB hubs or mouse connectors is not guaranteed.
• For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
5
USB Ports for Peripherals
6
Connect a USB keyboard to the USB port for peripherals on the left side panel.
Connection Procedure
Connect a USB keyboard directly to the DL850E/DL850EV using a USB cable. You can connect
or remove the USB cable regardless of whether the DL850E/DL850EV power switch is turned
on (hot-plug support). Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the DL850E/DL850EV,
and connect the type B connector to the keyboard. When the power switch is on, the keyboard is
detected and enabled approximately 6 seconds after it is connected.
Note
• Only connect a compatible USB keyboard, mouse, printer, or storage device to the USB port for
peripherals.
• Do not connect multiple keyboards. You can connect one keyboard, one mouse, and one printer to the
DL850E/DL850EV.
• Do not connect and disconnect multiple USB devices repetitively. Wait for at least 10 seconds after you
connect or remove one USB device before you connect or remove another USB device.
• Do not remove USB cables during the time from when the DL850E/DL850EV is turned on until key
operation becomes available (approximately 20 to 30 seconds).
Entering File Names, Comments, and Other Items
When a keyboard is displayed on the screen, you can enter file names, comments, and other items
using the USB keyboard.
Entering Values
You can use a USB keyboard to enter the values of items with 123 marks on the menu screens by
pressing CTRL+N on the USB keyboard to put the DL850E/DL850EV in the NUM LOCK state.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-5
App
Index
4.3 Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices
Using a USB Mouse
You can connect a USB mouse and use it to perform the same operations that you can perform with
the DL850E/DL850EV keys. Also, by clicking a menu item, you can perform the same operation that
you can perform by pressing the menu item’s soft key or selecting the menu item and pressing the
SET key.
USB Ports for Peripherals
Connect a USB mouse to a USB port for peripherals on the left side panel of the DL850E/DL850EV.
Usable USB Mouse Devices
You can use mouse devices (with wheels) that are compliant with USB HID Class Version 1.1.
Note
• For USB mouse devices that have been tested for compatibility, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Some settings cannot be configured by a mouse without a wheel.
Connection Procedure
To connect a USB mouse to the DL850E/DL850EV, use one of the USB ports for peripherals. You
can connect or disconnect the USB mouse at any time regardless of whether the DL850E/DL850EV
is on or off (hot-plugging is supported). When the power switch is on, the mouse is detected
approximately 6 seconds after it is connected, and the mouse pointer ( ) appears.
Note
• Only connect a compatible USB keyboard, mouse, printer, or storage device to the USB port for
peripherals.
• Even though there are two USB ports for peripherals, do not connect two mouse devices to the DL850E/
DL850EV.
4-6
IM DL850E-03EN
4.3 Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices
1
Operating the DL850E/DL850EV Using a USB Mouse
• Operations That Correspond to the Front Panel Keys (Top Menu)
Displaying the Top Menu
2
Right-click on the display. A menu of the DL850E/DL850EV front panel keys appears.
Selecting an Item from the Top Menu
Click on the item that you want to select. A setup menu that corresponds to the item that you
selected appears at the bottom of the display. The top menu disappears.
To display an item’s submenu, point to the item. To select an item on a submenu, click on it, just
as you would to select an item on the top menu.
Top Menu
Right-click to display the top menu.
3
4
Common Operations
Submenu
Submenus appear for items that have them.
5
Pointer
6
The setup menu that you select
using the mouse appears.
App
Index
Note
The following keys are not displayed in the top menu:
ESC, RESET, and SET
IM DL850E-03EN
4-7
4.3 Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices
• Setup Menu Operations (Same as soft key operations)
Selecting a Setup Menu Item
Click the setup menu item that you want to select.
If a selection menu appears after you select an item, click the selection menu item that you want
to choose.
If an item such as ON or OFF appears, click on the item to change its setting.
For menu items that are usually selected using the job shuttle and the SET key, clicking on the
item that you want to select will confirm your selection and close the dialog box.
Click in this area to display a selection menu.
Clicking the selection menu item that you want to select will
confirm your selection.
Click in this area to display a menu for selecting items using the
jog shuttle and SET.
Clicking the menu item that you want to select will confirm your
selection.
Click in this area to change the selected item.
Clearing the Menu
To clear the menu, click outside of it.
• Specifying Values
The following description explains how to specify values for menu items that have a 123 icon next
to them.
• If there are two 123 icons next to a single menu item, click on the item to select an item to
configure.
• To increase a value, rotate the mouse wheel back.
• To decrease a value, rotate the mouse wheel forward.
• To increase a value, move the pointer above the value so that the pointer becomes a , and
then click the left mouse button.
• To decrease a value, move the pointer below the value so that the pointer becomes a , and
then click the left mouse button.
• To move the decimal place, point to the left or right of the value you want to set so that the
pointer becomes a
or a
, and then click the left mouse button. The decimal place will
move one place to the right or left each time you click the left mouse button.
Change the value by clicking and using the mouse wheel.
Click within this area to select the item that you want to set.
4-8
IM DL850E-03EN
4.3 Using USB Keyboards and Mouse Devices
1
• Selecting Check Boxes
To select a check box, click it. To clear a check box, click it again.
2
Click the item that you want to select.
Note
3
• Selecting a File, Folder, or Media Drive from the File List Window
4
To close a dialog box, click outside of it.
Common Operations
Click on a file, folder, or media drive to select it.
Rotate the mouse wheel to scroll through the file list.
To cancel your selection, click outside of the File List window. The File List window will close
when you cancel your selection.
5
6
App
Click on the file, folder, or
media drive that you want
to select.
Index
Scroll bar
Click on the item that you want to select.
• Setting V/DIV and TIME/DIV
Setting V/DIV
Move the pointer close to the V/DIV value in the upper left of the display. The pointer becomes
. Rotate the mouse wheel forward to increase the V/DIV value, and rotate it back to
a
decrease the value.
Setting TIME/DIV
Move the pointer close to the TIME/DIV value in the upper right of the display. The pointer
. Rotate the mouse wheel forward to increase the TIME/DIV value, and rotate it
becomes a
back to decrease the value.
V/DIV setting
TIME/DIV setting
IM DL850E-03EN
4-9
4.4
Synchronizing the Clock
This section explains how to set the DL850E/DL850EV clock, which is used to generate timestamps
for measured data and files. The DL850E/DL850EV is factory shipped with a set date and time. You
must set the clock before you start measurements.
UTILITY System Config Menu
Press UTILITY, the System Config soft key, and then the Date/Time soft key to display the following
screen.
Turns the display of the date
and time on and off
Set the display format.
Set the date and time.
Set the time difference from
Greenwich Mean Time.
Setting the Display Format (Format)
You can display the date in one of the following formats.
2008/09/30 (year/numeric month/day)
30/09/2008 (day/numeric month/year)
30-Sep-08 (day-English abbreviation of the month-last two digits of the year)
30 Sep 2008 (day month (English abbreviation) year)
Setting the Time Difference from Greenwich Mean Time (Time Diff.
GMT)
Set the time difference between the region where you are using the DL850E/DL850EV and Greenwich
Mean Time.
Selectable range: -12 hours 00 minutes to 13 hours 00 minutes
For example, Japan standard time is ahead of GMT by 9 hours. In this case, set Time Hour to 9 and
Minute to 00.
Checking the Standard Time
Using one of the methods below, check the standard time of the region where you are using the
DL850E/DL850EV.
• Check the Date, Time, Language, Regional Options on your PC.
• Check the standard time at the following URL:http://www.worldtimeserver.com/
Note
• The DL850E/DL850EV does not support Daylight Saving Time. To set the time to Daylight Saving Time,
reset the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
• Date and time settings are backed up using an internal lithium battery. They are retained even if the power
is turned off.
• The DL850E/DL850EV has leap-year information.
4-10
IM DL850E-03EN
4.5
Performing Auto Setup
1
The auto setup feature automatically sets the V/div, Time/div, trigger level, and other settings to the
most suitable values for the input signals.
SETUP Menu
2
3
Press SETUP to display the following menu.
4
Common Operations
Executes auto setup
5
Undoes auto setup
6
App
Index
Center Position after the Execution of Auto Setup
The center position after you execute auto setup will be 0 V.
Applicable Modules
Auto setup is performed on the following modules.
701250 (HS10M12), 720250 (HS10M12), 701251 (HS1M16), 701255 (NONISO_10M12), 701267 (HV
(with RMS)), 720268 (HV (AAF, RMS)), 701261 (UNIVERSAL), 701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF)), 701275
(ACCL/VOLT), 720210 (HS100M12), 720211 (HS100M12), 720220 (16CH VOLT), 720254 (4CH
1M16)
Channels That Auto Setup Is Performed On
Auto setup is performed on all channels except logic channels.
Logic waveforms are displayed with the same settings as before you executed auto setup.
Waveforms Displayed before the Execution of Auto Setup
When you perform auto setup, the data in the acquisition memory is overwritten, and the waveforms
that were displayed before you executed auto setup are cleared.
Undoing Auto Setup
You can press the Undo soft key to revert to the settings that were in effect before you executed auto
setup. You cannot undo auto setup if you switch to a different setup menu or clear the SETUP menu
using the ESC key.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-11
4.5 Performing Auto Setup
Signals That Auto Setup Can Be Applied To
Frequency:
Approx. 50 Hz or higher
Absolute input voltage: Signals whose maximum value is at least approx. 20 mV (at 1:1 setting)
Type:
Simple, repeating signals
Note
The auto setup feature may not work properly for signals that include a DC component or high-frequency
components.
Settings after the Execution of Auto Setup
Waveform Acquisition and Display Settings
T/div
The waveform with the shortest period out of the waveforms affected by auto
setup is used to set T/div. T/div is set to the value at which 1.6 to 4 periods of
the waveform can be displayed.
START/STOP
START
Acquisition mode
Normal
Acquisition count
Infinite
Record length
10 k
Time base
Int.
Real-time HD recording
Off
Dual capturing
Off
Accumulation
Off
Vertical axis settings
V/Div
Offset voltage
Coupling
Bandwidth limit
Display on/off
DIV/Scale
Position
V Zoom
Trigger Settings
Trigger mode
Trigger type
Trigger source
Trigger level/slope
Hysteresis
Hold-off
Trigger position
Trigger delay
Computation Settings
Math
The value that causes the absolute values of the input waveform to be
between 1.6 and 4.5 div
0V
DC
Full
Channels whose absolute input voltage values reach or exceed 20 mV (1:1)
are displayed (except for Scan).
The displays of modules that are not affected by auto setup do not change.
DIV
0.00 div
×1
Auto
SIMPLE
The channel with the longest period out of the channels whose amplitude is 1
div or greater
The level between the maximum and minimum values/rising
Low
0.0 nsec
50%
0.0 μsec
Off
The values of settings not listed here do not change.
4-12
IM DL850E-03EN
4.6
Initializing Settings
1
You can reset the DL850E/DL850EV settings to their factory default values. This feature is useful when
you want to cancel all of the settings that you have entered or when you want to redo measurement
from scratch.
2
3
SETUP Menu
Press SETUP to display the following menu.
4
Initializes the settings
Common Operations
5
Undoes initialization
6
App
Index
Settings That Cannot Be Reset to Their Factory Default Values
• Date and time settings
• Communication settings
• Language setting (English or Japanese)
Undoing the Reset Operation
If you reset the settings by mistake, you can press the Undo soft key to revert to the previous settings.
However, you cannot undo the reset operation if you switch to a different setup menu or clear the
SETUP menu by pressing the ESC key.
To Reset All Settings to Their Factory Default Settings
While holding down the RESET key, turn the power switch on. All settings except the date and time
settings (display on/off setting will be reset) and the setup data stored in internal memory will be reset
to their factory default values.
Note
This operation cannot be undone.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-13
4.7
Calibrating the DL850E/DL850EV
CAL Menu
Press SHIFT+SETUP (CAL) to display the following menu.
Executes calibration
Executes power integration calibration
(/G5 option only)
Turns auto calibration on and off
Calibration
The following items are calibrated. Execute calibration when you want to make accurate
measurements.
• Vertical axis ground level and gain
Note
Calibration is performed automatically when the power switch is turned on.
Notes about Calibration
• Allow the DL850E/DL850EV to warm up for at least 30 minutes before you execute calibration.
If you execute calibration immediately after power-on, the calibrated values may drift due to
temperature changes or other environmental changes.
• Execute calibration in an environment with a stable temperature ranging from 5 to 40°C (23 ± 5°C
recommended).
• Do not apply signals when calibrating. Calibration may not be executed properly when input signals
are being applied to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Auto Calibration (Auto Cal)
Auto calibration is executed when you start signal acquisition if you have changed Time/div and any of
the time periods listed below has elapsed since the power was turned on.
• 3 minutes
• 10 minutes
• 30 minutes
• One hour and every hour thereafter
If calibration is executed while signals are being applied to the DL850E/DL850EV, we recommend that
you recalibrate the DL850E/DL850EV without any signals being applied to it.
4-14
IM DL850E-03EN
4.8
Starting and Stopping Waveform Acquisition
1
2
Starting and Stopping Waveform Acquisition.
Press START/STOP to start or stop waveform acquisition.
The key is illuminated while the DL850E/DL850EV is acquiring waveforms.
3
Waveform Acquisition and Indicators
• When the START/STOP key is illuminated, the DL850E/DL850EV is acquiring waveforms. “Running”
appears in the lower left of the screen.
• When the START/STOP key is not illuminated, waveform acquisition is stopped. “Stopped” appears
in the lower left of the screen.
• Averaging stops when you stop waveform acquisition.
• If you restart waveform acquisition again, averaging starts from the beginning.
Common Operations
DL850E/DL850EV Operation When the Acquisition Mode Is Set to
Averaging
4
5
6
START and STOP Operations during Accumulation
• Accumulation stops when you stop acquisition.
• If you restart waveform acquisition, past waveforms are cleared, and accumulation starts over.
App
Note
You can use the snapshot feature to retain the displayed waveform on the screen. This feature allows you to
retain a waveform on the screen while the DL850E/DL850EV continues signal acquisition.
IM DL850E-03EN
4-15
Index
4.9
Displaying Help
Displaying Help
Press HELP ( ? ) to display help.
The table of contents and index appear in the left frame, and text appears in the right frame.
Switching between Frames
To switch to the frame that you want to control, use the left and right arrow (►, ◄) keys.
Moving Cursors and Scrolling
To scroll through the screen or to move the cursor in the table of contents or index, turn the jog shuttle.
Moving to the Link Destination
To move to a description that relates to blue text or to move from the table of contents or index to the
corresponding description, move the cursor to the appropriate blue text or item, and press SET.
Displaying Panel Key Descriptions
With help displayed, press a panel key to display an explanation of it.
Returning to the Previous Screen
To return to the previous screen, press RESET.
Hiding Help
With help displayed, press HELP ( ? ) to clear help.
4-16
IM DL850E-03EN
Chapter 5
5.1
External Signal I/O
External Trigger Input (TRIGGER IN)
1
2
CAUTION
Only apply signals that meet the following specifications. Signals that do not meet the
specifications may damage the DL850E/DL850EV, because of factors such as excessive
voltage.
3
French
4
ATTENTION
Appliquer uniquement des signaux respectant les spécifications ci-dessous. Les signaux
ne respectant pas les spécifications risquent d’endommager DL850E/DL850EV, à cause de
facteurs tels que la surtension.
5
External Signal I/O
External Trigger Input Terminal
6
TRIGGER
IN
App
OUT
This terminal is used when an external signal is used as the trigger source.
Item
Connector type
Input level
Minimum pulse width
Logic
Trigger delay time
Externally synchronized operation
Specifications
BNC
TTL (0 to 5 V)
100 ns
Rising and falling edges
Within 100 ns + 1 sample period
Possible (through the connection of the TRIGGER IN and TRIGGER OUT
terminals of two DL850E/DL850EVs)
Circuit Diagram and Timing Chart for External Trigger Input
+5 V
Equivalent
to LCX14
4.7 kΩ
100 Ω
Minimum pulse width
TRIGGER IN
(When set to
)
100 pF
Trigger delay time
Internal trigger
Note
You can synchronize the operation of two DL850E/DL850EVs by using the trigger output function.
No.1
IM DL850E-03EN
TRIGGER
OUT
DL850E/
DL850EV
No.2
TRIGGER
IN
DL850E/
DL850EV
5-1
Index
5.2
Trigger Output (TRIGGER OUT)
CAUTION
Do not short the TRIGGER OUT terminal or apply external voltage to it. Doing so may damage
the instrument.
French
ATTENTION
Ne pas court-circuiter la borne TRIGGER OUT et ne pas appliquer de tension de sortie. Cela
pourrait endommager l’instrument.
External Trigger Output Terminal
TRIGGER
IN
OUT
The following CMOS level signals can be transmitted.
Trigger Output (Normal)
When the output format is set to normal, the terminal transmits a falling signal when a trigger
occurs. The signal level is normally high but goes low when a trigger occurs.
Trigger Output (Pulse)
When the output format is set to pulse, the terminal transmits a pulse signal when a trigger occurs.
You can set the pulse width.
Sample Clock Synchronization Signal Output (Sample Pulse)
When the output format is set to sample pulse, the terminal transmits a pulse signal at regular
intervals when waveform acquisition is started. You can set the pulse rate.
Start/Stop Level Signal Output (Start/Stop)
When the output format is set to start/stop, the terminal transmits start/stop level signals. The signal
level is high during waveform acquisition and goes low when waveform acquisition is complete.
Specifications
Item
Connector type
Output level
Output formats
•Normal mode
Specifications
BNC
CMOS level (0 to 5 V)
Logic
Output delay
Output hold time
•Pulse mode
Logic
Output delay
Pulse width
•Sample pulse mode Logic
Pulse rate
•Start/Stop mode
5-2
Logic
Low when a trigger occurs and high after acquisition is completed
Within 100 ns + 1 sample period
100 ns or more
Transmits a pulse when a trigger occurs
Within 100 ns + 1 sample period
1 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms
Transmits pulses at a given frequency during waveform acquisition
5 Hz to 200 kHz (1-2-5 steps)
However, the interval must be longer than the DL850E/DL850EV
sampling interval. The interval can be set to 1 over the integer
multiple of the DL850E/DL850EV sampling interval.
High level output during waveform acquisition
Low level output while waveform acquisition is stopped
IM DL850E-03EN
5.2 Trigger Output (TRIGGER OUT)
1
Circuit Diagram and Timing Chart for Trigger Out
Equivalent to HC245
100 Ω
Trigger output
• Normal mode
Trigger occurrence
(the time at the trigger position)
2
• Pulse mode
Trigger occurrence
(the time at the trigger position)
3
Internal trigger
Internal trigger
Output delay
4
Output delay
Trigger output
Trigger output
Output hold time
Output hold time
5
Trigger occurrence
Trigger output
6
Trigger occurrence
H
L
Post-trigger time
Waveform acquisition
IM DL850E-03EN
External Signal I/O
Low Level and High Level Hold Times (In normal mode)
Trigger
Pre
Post
App
Pre
Trigger
Post
Index
5-3
5.3
External Clock Input (EXT CLK IN)
CAUTION
Only apply signals that meet the following specifications. Signals that do not meet the
specifications may damage the DL850E/DL850EV, because of factors such as excessive
voltage.
French
ATTENTION
Appliquer uniquement des signaux respectant les spécifications ci-dessous. Les signaux
ne respectant pas les spécifications risquent d’endommager DL850E/DL850EV, à cause de
facteurs tels que la surtension.
External-clock input terminal
EXT CLK IN
Use this terminal to operate the DL850E/DL850EV using an external clock signal.
Item
Connector type
Input level
Detected edge
Minimum pulse width
External clock frequency range
Specifications
BNC
TTL (0 to 5 V)
Rising
50 ns or more for both high and low
Up to 9.5 MHz
Circuit Diagram for External Clock Input
+5 V
100 Ω
4.7 kΩ
Equivalent
to LCX14
EXT CLK IN
100 pF
5-4
IM DL850E-03EN
5.4
Video Signal Output (VIDEO OUT (XGA))
1
2
CAUTION
• Only connect the DL850E/DL850EV to a monitor after turning both the DL850E/DL850EV
and the monitor off.
• Do not short the VIDEO OUT terminal or apply external voltage to it. Doing so may damage
the DL850E/DL850EV.
French
3
4
ATTENTION
5
External Signal I/O
• Ne brancher le DL850E/DL850EV sur un moniteur qu’après avoir mis hors tension le
DL850E/DL850EV et le moniteur.
• Ne pas court-circuiter la borne VIDEO OUT et ne pas appliquer de tension de sortie. Cela
pourrait endommager le DL850E/DL850EV.
6
Video Signal Output Terminal
App
VIDEO OUT
( XGA )
You can use video signal output to display the DL850E/DL850EV screen on a monitor. Any multisync
monitor that supports XGA can be connected.
Item
Connector type
Output format
Output resolution
10
15
5
11
1
6
D-Sub 15-pin receptacle
Specifications
D-sub 15-pin
Analog RGB output
XGA output, 1024 × 768 dots, approx. 60 Hz Vsync
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal
Red
Green
Blue
—
—
GND
GND
GND
—
GND
—
—
Horizontal sync signal
Vertical sync signal
—
Specifications
0.7 VP-P
0.7 VP-P
0.7 VP-P
Approx. 36.4 kHz, TTL positive logic
Approx. 60 Hz, TTL positive logic
Connecting to a Monitor
1. Turn off the DL850E/DL850EV and the monitor.
2. Connect the DL850E/DL850EV and the monitor using an RGB cable.
3. Turn on the DL850E/DL850EV and the monitor.
IM DL850E-03EN
5-5
Index
5.5
GO/NO-GO Determination I/O and External
Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)
Connecting to Other Instruments
CAUTION
• Do not apply external voltage to the NO-GO OUT and GO OUT output pins. Doing so may
damage the instrument.
• When connecting the GO/NO-GO determination signal output to another device, do
not connect the wrong signal pin. Doing so may damage the DL850E/DL850EV or the
connected instrument.
• Do not connect a USB cable to the GO/NO-GO I/O connector. Doing so may damage the
instrument.
French
ATTENTION
• Ne pas appliquer de tension externe aux broches de sortie NO-GO OUT et GO OUT. Cela
pourrait endommager le DL850E/DL850EV.
• Lors de la connexion de la sortie de signal de détermination GO/NO-GO à un autre
instrument, veiller à ne pas connecter les mauvaises broches de signal. Cela pourrait
endommager le DL850E/DL850EV ou l’instrument connecté.
• Ne pas brancher de câble USB sur le connecteur de sortie GO/NO-GO. Cela pourrait
endommager l’instrument.
About the External I/O Cable (720911; sold separately)
• Do not use the cable for anything other than the DL850E/DL850EV external I/O.
• Refer to the following figure to connect the cable to an external device.
Approx. 1.5 m
6
To the DL850E/DL850EV
1
Process the wires at the end of
the stripped cable as necessary.
Wire color
Red
Yellow
White
Green
Blue
5-6
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
Signal
EXT EVENT IN
START IN
GO OUT
NOGO OUT
GND
RJ-11 connector
Logic
Negative logic
Negative logic
Negative logic
Negative logic
IM DL850E-03EN
5.5 GO/NO-GO Determination I/O and External Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)
1
GO/NO-GO Determination I/O
You can apply an external signal to the DL850E/DL850EV’s GO/NO-GO I/O terminal and perform GO/
NO-GO determination, and you can output the results of GO/NO-GO determination from the GO/NOGO I/O terminal.
GO/NO-GO I/O Connector
Type
The connector uses an RJ-11 modular jack. Use the external I/O cable accessory (720911; sold
separately). If you are using a commercially sold cable (four-conductor modular telephone cable),
wire the pins according to the above figure.
Within 0 to 5 V, threshold level: TTL
Pinout
1
Connector on
the DL850E/DL850EV
Signal
EXT EVENT IN
START IN
GO OUT
NOGO OUT
GND
NC (no connection)
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
Manual event. Event input occurs on low edge.
Starts on low edge
Active low (GO)
Active low (NO-GO)
5
External Signal I/O
6
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
I/O Level
EXT I/O
2
6
App
Input Signal
START IN (Negative logic)
Use this signal to perform GO/NO-GO determination by synchronizing to an external input signal.
The signal is only valid when on the GO/NO-GO menu, Remote is set to ON. If Remote is set to
OFF, GO/NO-GO determination is performed regardless of the external signal input (the GO/ NOGO determination result is output).
Signal Input Circuit
5V
START IN
4.7 kΩ
Equivalent to
LCX14
HIGH
120 Ω
IM DL850E-03EN
100 pF
LOW
START
5-7
Index
5.5 GO/NO-GO Determination I/O and External Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)
Output Signal
NOGO OUT (Negative logic)
When the determination result is NO-GO (fail), the output signal level temporarily changes from high
(H) to low (L).
GO OUT (Negative logic)
When the determination result is GO, the output signal level temporarily changes from high (H) to
low (L).
Signal Output Circuit
5V
4.7 kΩ
100 pF
GO OUT
NO-GO OUT
120 Ω
GO/NO-GO I/O Timing
100 ms or more
50 ms
0 ms
or more or more
START IN
Acquisition
Acquisition
Judgment
NOGO OUT
Result
Judgment
Result
GO OUT
START IN is not referenced when Remote is
set to OFF; GO OUT and NO-GO OUT are
output according to internal GO/NO-GO
determination.
5-8
The signal remains low until the DL850E/DL850EV
is ready to accept the next measurement.
The duration is longer during output to a built-in
printer or internal storage medium.
IM DL850E-03EN
5.5 GO/NO-GO Determination I/O and External Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)
1
External Start/Stop Input (EXT I/O)
You can use an external signal to start and stop the DL850E/DL850EV.
External Start/Stop Input Terminal
The External Start/Stop Input terminal and the GO/NO-GO I/O terminal are the same terminal. This
terminal is used as an external start/stop input when the GO/NO-GO determination I/O function is not
used (when on the GO/NO-GO menu, Mode is set to OFF).
Specifications
The connector uses an RJ-11 modular jack. Connect the separately sold 720911 cable to the
connector.
EXT I/O
6
1
Signal
EXT EVENT IN
START IN
NC (no connection)
NC (no connection)
GND
NC (no connection)
4
Manual event. Event input occurs on low edge.
Starts on low edge, stops on high
5
6
Input level: TTL (0 to 5 V)
Circuit Diagram for External Start/Stop Input
+5 V
4.7 kΩ
2
(pin no.)
LCX14
STOP
High
Low
100 pF
Index
START
+5 V
4.7 kΩ
2
App
120 Ω
• Contact input is possible
LCX14
120 Ω
100 pF
5
Close to start,
open to stop
Note
• Low and high edges are used to detect starts and stops.
• You can select whether to enable high edges (stops) in the external start/stop signal or disable. For
information about how to do so, see section 18.8, “Configuring the Environment Settings,” in the user’s
manual.
IM DL850E-03EN
3
External Signal I/O
Connector on
the DL850E/DL850EV
Pin no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
5-9
5.6
IRIG Signal Input (IRIG option)
CAUTION
Only apply signals that meet the following specifications. Signals that do not meet the
specifications may damage the DL850E/DL850EV, because of factors such as excessive
voltage.
French
ATTENTION
Appliquer uniquement des signaux respectant les spécifications ci-dessous. Les signaux
ne respectant pas les spécifications risquent d’endommager DL850E/DL850EV, à cause de
facteurs tels que la surtension.
IRIG Signal Input Terminal
IRIG
You can use an IRIG (Inter Range Instrumentation Group) signal to set the time on the DL850E/DL850EV.
Item
Input connector
Number of input connectors
Supported IRIG signals
Input impedance
Maximum input voltage
Used for
Clock sync range
Post-sync accuracy
5-10
Specifications
BNC
1
A002, B002, A132, and B122
You can switch between 50 Ω and 5 kΩ.
±8 V
Synchronizing the DL850E/DL850EV time
Synchronizing the sample clock
±80 ppm
No drift from the input signal
IM DL850E-03EN
5.7
GPS Signal Input (GPS option)
1
2
CAUTION
Only apply signals that meet the following specifications. Signals that do not meet the
specifications may damage the DL850E/DL850EV, because of factors such as excessive
voltage.
3
French
4
ATTENTION
5
External Signal I/O
Appliquer uniquement des signaux respectant les spécifications ci-dessous. Les signaux
ne respectant pas les spécifications risquent d’endommager DL850E/DL850EV, à cause de
facteurs tels que la surtension.
6
GPS Signal Input Terminal
App
You can use a GPS (Global Positioning System) signal to set the time on the DL850E/DL850EV.
Item
Input connector
Number of input connectors
Receiver type
Function
Accuracy after synchronization1
Sync time
Compatible antenna
Index
Specifications
SMA
1
GPS L1 C/A code SBAS:WAAS EGNOS MSAS
DL850E/DL850EV time synchronization
Sample clock synchronization
± 200 ns (when locked to GPS signal)
Within 5 minutes after the power is turned on
Active antenna, 3.3 V power supply
A1058ER standard accessory
1 The figure is based on results obtained when the GPS antenna is installed in a location with good
line of sight to GPS satellites.
The accuracy may not be attained depending on the measurement location, the location of satellites
when the measurement is taken, the weather, and influence caused by obstruction.
IM DL850E-03EN
5-11
Chapter 6
6.1
Specifications
Signal Input Section
Item
Type
Number of slots
Maximum number of input
channels
Maximum record length
Real Time Math channels
(option)
Triggering Section
Item
Trigger mode
Selectable trigger level
range
Trigger hysteresis
Selectable trigger position
range
Selectable trigger delay
range
Selectable hold-off time
range
Manual trigger key
Simple trigger
Trigger source
Trigger slope
Time trigger
IM DL850E-03EN
Specifications
Plug-in input unit
8
16 channels per slot, 128 channels per unit (when a 16-CH voltage input module is installed in each
slot)
The maximum length when all channels are being used depends on the number of channels in
each module.
The maximum values when the entire memory is used are listed below.
Standard
250 Mpoint when 1 channel is being used. 10 Mpoint per channel when 16 channels
are being used.
/M1 option
1 Gpoint when 1 channel is being used. 50 Mpoint per channel when 16 channels
are being used.
/M2 option
2 Gpoint when 1 channel is being used. 100 Mpoint per channel when 16 channels
are being used.
The DL850E/DL850EV is equipped with 16 dedicated channels for performing computations. This
enables you to perform the following computations in real time on 16 analog input channels or
16 realtime math output channels: digital filter, basic arithmetic, basic arithmetic with coefficients,
differentiation and integration, angle of rotation, logic signal/analog waveform conversion, quartic
polynomial, rms value, power, integrated power, common logarithm, square root, cosine, sine, arc
tangent, electrical angle, knocking filter, coefficient multiplied by addition or subtraction of sources,
frequency, period, edge count, resolver, IIR filter, demodulation of the pulse width modulated signal,
reactive power, CAN ID detectionand, torque, angle difference, and 3 phase resolver. (For detailed
specifications of Real Time Math channel’s math features, see section 6.5, Features.)
Real Time Math features are as follows:
•Even when the display is in roll mode, you can view the math results.
•There are no restrictions on the record length. You can specify a record length that is the same as
a normal input channel.
•Math results can be used to trigger the DL850E/DL850EV.
•Because both acquisition and computations can be performed at the same time, you can make
the waveform update period shorter than it is with normal math operations.
Specifications
Auto, Auto Level, Normal, Single, N Single, or On Start
0 ± 10 div
When measuring voltage:
Select from ±0.1 div, ±0.5 div, and ±1 div.
When measuring temperature: Select from ±0.5°C, ±1.0°C, and ±2.0°C.
When measuring strain:
Select from ±2.5%, ±12.5%, and ±25%.
When measuring acceleration: Select from ±0.1 div, ±0.5 div, and ±1 div.
When measuring frequency:
Select from ±0.01 div, ±0.5 div, and ±1 div.
0 to 100% (of the display record length; resolution: 0.1%)
0 to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
0 to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
A dedicated manual trigger key can be used.
CHn (select an input channel), EXT, LINE, or Time
Rising, falling, or rising or falling
Date (year, month, and day), time (hour and minute), and time interval (10 seconds to 24 hours)
6-1
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
6.2
1
App
Index
6.2 Triggering Section
Item
Enhanced trigger
Trigger source
Trigger type
6-2
Specifications
CHn (select an input channel)
A -> B(N):
After the trigger A conditions are met, the DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the
trigger B conditions are met N times.
Count:
1 to 10000
Condition A:
Enter/Exit
Condition B:
Enter/Exit
A Delay B:
After the specified amount of time elapses after the trigger A conditions are met,
the DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the trigger B conditions are first met.
Time:
0 to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
Condition A:
Enter/Exit
Condition B:
Enter/Exit
Edge on A:
While the trigger A conditions are met, the DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the OR
of multiple trigger source edges.
Condition A:
True/False
AND:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the AND of multiple state conditions.
OR:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers on the OR of multiple trigger source edges or
states (or Window triggers)
Pulse Width:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers after state condition B has been met for a
specified duration (width).
B>Time:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the time from when the trigger B conditions
are met to when they change from being met to not being met is greater than the
specified time.
Time:
20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
B<Time:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the time from when the trigger B conditions
are met to when they change from being met to not being met is less than the
specified time.
Time:
20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
B Time Out: The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the trigger B conditions continue to be met
for the specified period of time.
Time:
20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
B Between:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period during which the trigger B
conditions continue to be met is within the specified time range.
Time
T1: 10 ns to 9.99999999 s
T2: 20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
Period:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period meets one of the following
conditions.
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period of the trigger T conditions is
T>Time:
longer than the specified time.
Time:
20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
T<Time:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period of the trigger T conditions is less
than the specified time.
Time:
20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
T1<T<T2:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period of the trigger T conditions is
within the specified time range.
Time:
T1: 20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
T2: 30 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
T<T1, T2<T: The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the period of the trigger T conditions is
outside of the specified time range.
Time:
T1: 20 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
T2: 30 ns to 10 s (resolution: 10 ns)
Window:
The DL850E/DL850EV triggers when the trigger source enters or exits the range
of two specified levels.
The DL850E/DL850EV can trigger on the OR of the window triggers of multiple
channels.
Wave Window: This trigger is for monitoring power supplies.
The DL850E/DL850EV creates templates in real time by comparing 1, 2, or
4 cycles directly preceding the current waveforms using a tolerance value,
compares the current waveforms to the real-time templates, and triggers if one of
the current waveforms falls outside of its real-time template.
•The trigger A and B conditions can be set to High, Low, or Don’t Care for each channel. The AND
of the conditions (the parallel pattern) is used to determine the result.
•For OR and AND, the condition can be set to High, Low, IN, OUT, or Don’t Care for each channel.
IM DL850E-03EN
6.3
Time Axis
1
Item
Specifications
Selectable time scale range The display of minutes per div, hours per div, and days per div is also possible.
100 ns/div1 to 1 s/div (in 1-2-5 steps), 2 s/div, 3 s/div, 4 s/div, 5 s/div, 6 s/div, 8 s/div, 10 s/div, 20 s/div,
30 s/div, 1 min/div to 10 min/div (in 1 min steps), 12 min/div, 15 min/div, 30 min/div, 1 h/div to 10 h/div
(in 1 h steps), 12 h/div, 1 day/div, 2 days/div, 3 days/div, 4 days/div, 5 days/div, 6 days/div, 8 days/div,
10 days/div, 20 days/div
Time accuracy2
±0.005%
External clock input
Connector type:
BNC
Input level:
TTL level
Detected edge:
Rising
Frequency range:
Up to 9.5 MHz
Minimum pulse width: 50 ns or more for both High and Low
1 1 μs/div when the High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 or 720211) is not installed
2 Under standard operating conditions after the warm-up time has passed
6.4
Specifications
App
Up to three screen divisions can be displayed at the same time.
Each division can contain one of the following windows: TY, ZOOM1, ZOOM2, XY1,
XY2, FFT1, or FFT2.
* The LCD may include a few defective pixels (within 5 ppm over the total number of pixels including RGB). The LCD may
contain some pixels that are always illuminated or that never light. Please be aware that these are not defects.
IM DL850E-03EN
4
6
Specifications
10.4-inch TFT LCD
210.4 mm × 157.8 mm
1024 × 768 (XGA)
801 × 656 (normal) or 1001 × 656 (wide)
Divisions:
3
5
Display
Item
Display
Display screen size
Display resolution*
Resolution of the waveform
display
Display format
2
6-3
Index
6.5
Features
Waveform Acquisition and Display
Item
Acquisition mode
Record length
Zoom
Display format
Maximum number of
displayed traces
Display interpolation
Graticule
Auxiliary display on/off
X-Y display
Accumulation
Snapshot
Clear trace
Dual capturing
Main waveform
Captured waveform
Hard disk recording
(when the /HD0 or /HD1
option is installed)
Specifications
Normal:
Envelope:
Normal waveform acquisition
The peak values are held at the maximum sample rate regardless of the
Time/div setting.
Averaging:
The number of times to average can be set to 2 to 65536 in 2n steps.
Box average:
Increases the A/D resolution by up to 4 bits (16 bits max.).
1 kpoint, 2.5 kpoint, 5 kpoint, 10 kpoint, 25 kpoint, 50 kpoint, 100 kpoint, 250 kpoint, 500 kpoint,
1 Mpoint, 2.5 Mpoint, 5 Mpoint, 10 Mpoint, 25 Mpoint, 50 Mpoint, 100 Mpoint, 250 Mpoint,
500 Mpoint (on models with the /M1 or /M2 option), 1000 Mpoint (on models with the /M1 or /M2
option), 2000 Mpoint (on models with the /M2 option)
The displayed waveform is expanded along the time axis (up to two locations can be zoomed at
separate zoom factors).
Auto scrolling:
The DL850E/DL850EV automatically scrolls to the zoom position.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 16 analog waveform windows
64 traces per display group. You can switch between four display groups.
Sampled points can be displayed through the use of dots (OFF), sine interpolation, linear
interpolation, or pulse interpolation.
Three graticule types to choose from
Scale values, waveform labels, the extra window, the level indicator, and the numeric display can
be turned on and off.
The X and Y axes can be selected from CHn and MATHn (Max. four traces × two windows).
Persistence mode
The currently displayed waveforms can be retained on the screen.
Snapshot waveforms can be saved and loaded.
The displayed waveform is cleared.
The data of a single waveform can be acquired at two different sample rates.
Maximum sample rate: 100 kS/s (roll mode area)
Maximum sample rate: 100 MS/s*
Record length:
5 kpoint, 10 kpoint, 25 kpoint, 50 kpoint, 100 kpoint, 250 kpoint, 500 kpoint
Maximum sample rate: Depends on the number of channels being used. 1 MS/s when 1 channel
is being used. 100 kS/s when 16 channels are being used.
Capacity:
Depends on the amount of free space on the HDD
Operation overview:
When waveform acquisition occurs according to the specified trigger
mode, the DL850E/DL850EV stores the data to an internal hard disk or an
external hard disk that supports eSATA. Note that hard disks that can be
used are those whose disk partition style is MBR and the format is FAT32.
* 10 MS/s when the High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 or 720211) is not installed
Vertical and Horizontal Control
Item
Channel on/off
ALL CH menu
Vertical axis zooming
Vertical position setting
Linear scaling
Roll mode
6-4
Specifications
CHn and MATHn can be turned on and off separately.
You configure the settings of all channels while displaying waveforms.
You can use a USB keyboard or mouse.
×0.1 to ×100 (varies depending on the module)
You set the scale using upper and lower limits or switch between different scales.
Waveforms can be moved in the range of ±5 div from the center of the waveform display frame.
The linear scaling mode can be set separately for each channel (only for voltage, stress, and
frequency). It can be set to AX+B or P1-P2.
Roll mode is enabled automatically when the trigger mode is set to Auto, Auto Level, Single, or On
Start, and the time axis setting is greater than or equal to 100 ms/div.
IM DL850E-03EN
6.5 Features
1
Analysis
Item
Zooming and searching
History search feature
Cursor measurement
Automated measurement
of waveform parameters
Statistical processing
Phase shifting
GO/NO-GO determination
The DL850E/DL850EV automatically measures the waveform parameters of the data in the
acquisition memory and performs statistical processing on the parameters once per period.
The DL850E/DL850EV automatically measures the waveform parameters of each history waveform
and performs statistical processing on the parameters.
Operators:
+, −, ×, ÷, binary computation, phase shift, and power spectrum
Expressions can be created through the combination of the following operators and constants.
ABS, SQRT, LOG, EXP, NEG, SIN, COS, TAN, ATAN, PH, DIF, DDIF, INTG, IINTG, BIN, P2, P3,
F1, F2, FV, PWHH, PWHL, PWLH, PWLL, PWXX, DUTYH, DUTYL, FILT1, FILT2, HLBT, MEAN,
LS-, RS-, PS-, PSD-, CS-, TF-, CH-, MAG, LOGMAG, PHASE, REAL, IMAG
You can monitor the waveform of a specified channel with its phase shifted
The following two types of GO/NO-GO determination are available:
• Determination using zones on the screen
• Determination using the automated measurement values of waveform parameters.
The following operations can be performed at the time of determination:
Output of screen capture data, saving of waveform data (to binary, ASCII, floating-point, or
MATLAB), sounding of a notification buzzer, transfer of e-mail
Screen Capture Data Output
Item
Built-in printer
(/B5 option)
External printer
File format
Specifications
A hard copy of the screen can be output.
Prints screen captures on an external printer connected over an Ethernet or USB.
PNG, JPEG, or BMP
Data Storage
Item
History
Internal HDD and external
storage media
IM DL850E-03EN
Specifications
Automatically holds up to 5000 pages of waveforms (depending on the record length)
Waveform data, setup data, automated measurement values, and the results of statistical
processing can be saved.
6-5
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Normal statistical
processing
Cyclic statistical
processing
Statistical processing of
the history data
Computation
User-defined computation
(/G2 option)
Specifications
You can search for and then expand and display a portion of the displayed waveform.
You can choose from the following search methods.
Edge:
The DL850E/DL850EV counts the number of rising or falling edges
Logic pattern:
The DL850E/DL850EV counts the number of times a logic pattern is
detected.
Event:
The DL850E/DL850EV searches for an event number.
Time:
The DL850E/DL850EV searches for a date and time.
You can search through history waveforms for specified conditions.
Zone search:
The DL850E/DL850EV displays waveforms that pass through or do not pass
through a specified area on the screen.
Parameter search: The DL850E/DL850EV displays a waveform when the results of the
automated measurement of its parameters meet the specified conditions.
Horizontal, Vertical, H&V, Degree (only during T-Y waveform display) and Marker
Automated measurement of waveform parameters
Up to 32 items can be displayed.
P-P, Amp, Max, Min, High, Low, Avg, Mid, Rms, SDev, +OverShoot, −OverShoot, Rise, Fall, Freq,
Period, +Width, −Width, Duty, Pulse, Burst1, Burst2, AvgFreq, AvgPeriod, Int1TY, Int2TY, Int1XY,
Int2XY, Delay(between channels)
Applicable items:
Automated measurement values of waveform parameters
Statistical items:
Max, Min, Avg, Sdv, and Cnt
Maximum number of cycles:
64000 cycles (when the number of parameters is 1)
Maximum total number of parameters: 64000
Statistical processing is performed while waveforms are acquired.
App
Index
6.5 Features
Real Time Math (Option)
Item
Math expression
Max. number of math channels
Math source channels
Math result
Digital filter
Math rate
Filter types
Specifications
Real Time Math using hardware
16 (select analog waveform storage or Real Time Math result storage)
Analog channel 1 to channel 16 (multi-channel modules can also be selected as math
sources)
16 bits (2400 LSB/div). Results are converted to 16-bit values according to the scaling
setting and stored in memory.
Math can be performed independently on each channel. Math can be performed on up
to 16 channels at the same time.
Max. math rate (sample rate): 1 MS/s. The math rate is selected automatically
depending on the set frequency. The possible rates are 1 MS/s, 100 kS/s, 10 kS/s,
1 kS/s and 100 S/s.
Mean (moving average)
Filter format:
FIR (moving average)
Filter type:
LPF
Number of moving Selectable from 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, and 128
average points:
Gauss:
Filter format:
FIR
Filter type:
LPF
Filter order:
5 to 49
Cutoff frequency:
300 kHz to 2 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 300 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
Resolution: 298 Hz to 30 Hz, in steps of 2 Hz
Resolution: 29.8 Hz to 2 Hz, in steps of 0.2 Hz
Cutoff characteristic: –3.0 × (f/fc)2 (where f is the frequency and fc is the cutoff
frequency)
Sharp:
Filter format:
FIR
Filter type:
Filter order:
LPF, HPF, BPF
5 to 194
LPF:
Cutoff frequency: 300 kHz to 2 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 300 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
Resolution: 298 Hz to 30 Hz, in steps of 2 Hz
Resolution: 29.8 Hz to 2 Hz, in steps of 0.2 Hz
HPF:
Cutoff frequency: 300 kHz to 200 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 200 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
BPF:
Center frequency: 300 kHz to 300 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 300 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
Bandwidth: 200 kHz, 150 kHz, 100 kHz, 50 kHz, 20 kHz,
15 kHz, 10 kHz, 5 kHz, 2 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 1 kHz,
500 Hz, 200 Hz (there are limits based on the
center frequency)
Cutoff characteristic: –40 dB @ 2fc (LPF), –40 dB @ 0.5fc (HPF)
Phase:
Linear phase characteristics
6-6
IM DL850E-03EN
6.5 Features
Item
Specifications
IIR:
Filter format:
Filter type:
Filter order:
LPF:
HPF:
BPF:
1
IIR (Butterworth)
LPF, HPF, BPF
4
2
Cutoff frequency: 300 kHz to 2 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution:
29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution:
2.98 kHz to 0.3 kHz, in steps of 20 Hz
Resolution:
298 Hz to 2 Hz, in steps of 2 Hz
3
Cutoff frequency: 300 kHz to 20 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution:
29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution:
2.98 kHz to 20 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
4
Center frequency: 300 kHz to 60 Hz
Resolution: 300 kHz to 12 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution:
11.8 kHz to 1.2 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution:
1.18 kHz to 60 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
Bandwidth:
200 kHz, 150 kHz, 100 kHz, 50 kHz, 20 kHz,
15 kHz, 10 kHz, 5 kHz, 2 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 1 kHz,
500 Hz, 200 Hz, 100 Hz (there are limits based
on the center frequency)
Cutoff characteristic: –24 dB/Oct
Delay
Delay resolution
Real Time Math
Math rate
Math type
IM DL850E-03EN
Max. math rate: 10 MS/s or 1 MS/s for polynomials
Basic arithmetic:
Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of two channels (no coefficients)
Differentiation:
Differentiation using a fifth order Lagrange interpolation formula
Integration:
Integration reset condition: When waveform acquisition starts, when a channel is
turned on or off
Selectable reset conditions:
Over limit (±10 div)
Zero crossing to positive:When the source signal is moving in the positive
direction and crosses zero
Zero crossing to negative:When the source signal is moving in the negative
direction and crosses zero
Basic arithmetic with coefficients:
Expressions:+, –, ×, /
Coefficients: A, B, and C can be defined.
Addition:
(A × S1) + (B × S2) + C
Subtraction: (A × S1) – (B × S2) + C
Multiplication: (A × S1) × (B × S2) + C
Division:
(A × S1)/(B × S2) + C
Range of coefficients A, B, and C:–9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
6-7
6
Specifications
Interpolation
Delay
Phase:
Nonlinear phase characteristics
IIR-Lowpass filter:
Filter format: IIR (Butterworth)
Filter type: LPF
Filter order: 4
Cutoff frequency:128 kHz, 64 kHz, 32 kHz, 16 kHz, 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz,
500 Hz, 250 Hz, 125 Hz, 62.5 Hz (no limits based on the sample
rate)
Interpolation can be turned on and off for each channel.
Delay can be set for each channel.
100 ns to 10 ms
100 ns to 100 µs, in steps of 100 ns
101 µs to 1 ms, in steps of 1 µs
1.01 ms to 10 ms, in steps of 10 µs
5
App
Index
6.5 Features
Item
Specifications
Angle of rotation:
Specify the A, B, and Z phase signals, and the angle of the bit signal from the pulse
integration logic input is computed as an absolute value. Max. setting of the number
of pulses per rotation: 65535
Logic signal/analog waveform conversion:
Uses the logic signal as an analog signal, and performs a scaling conversion
Quartic polynomial:
A × s4 + B × s3 + C × s2 + D × s + E
Range of coefficients A, B, C, D, and E: –9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
Rms value:
N
1
s(n)2
Nn=1
The math period is from one zero crossing of the specified signal to the next zero
crossing.
Alternatively, the period is the specified time: 1 to 500 ms, resolution: 1 ms
Effective power:
1
T
T
(s1 • s2)dt
0
The math period is the integrated value of the time from one zero crossing of the
specified signal to the next zero crossing.
Effective power integration:
T
(s1 • s2)dt
0
The value “s1 × s2” is integrated over time.
Common logarithm (Log1):
K × Log10(s1/s2)
Common logarithm (Log2):
K × Log10(s1)
Square root (Sqr1):
s12 ± s22
Square root (Sqr2):
s
Cosine:
cos(angle)
Sine:
sin(angle)
Arc tangent:
atan(s1/s2)
Electrical angle:
•Calculates the phase difference between (1) the angle that was determined from
the logic signals that were specified for phases A, B, and Z, and (2) the fundamental
wave component that was determined from the discrete Fourier transform of the
waveform that was specified as the target.
•Calculates the phase difference (electrical angle) between the angle of rotation and
drive current of the motor.
Knocking filter:
When the signal level of the math source waveform that is being differentiated is less
than or equal to the elimination level, the output is set to 0.
Coefficient multiplied by addition or subtraction of sources:
K × (s1 ± s2 ± s3 ± s4)
Range of coefficient K: –9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
Period:
The period from one edge condition to the next edge condition is measured.
Resolution: 100 ns. Max. period: 10 s
Frequency:
The period is measured, and the frequency is calculated as 1/period.
Edge count:
Counts the specified edges
6-8
IM DL850E-03EN
6.5 Features
Item
1
Specifications
IIR:
Filter format:
Filter type:
Filter order:
LPF:
IM DL850E-03EN
6-9
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
IIR (Butterworth)
LPF, HPF, BPF
4
Cutoff frequency: 3 MHz to 0.2 Hz
Resolution: 3 MHz to 300 kHz, in steps of 20 kHz
Resolution: 298 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 0.3 kHz, in steps of 20 Hz
Resolution: 298 Hz to 30 Hz, in steps of 2 Hz
Resolution: 29.8 Hz to 0.2 Hz, in steps of 0.2 Hz
HPF:
Cutoff frequency: 3 MHz to 20 Hz
Resolution: 3 MHz to 300 kHz, in steps of 20 kHz
Resolution: 298 kHz to 30 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 29.8 kHz to 3 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 2.98 kHz to 20 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
BPF:
Center frequency: 3 MHz to 60 Hz
Resolution: 3 MHz to 120 kHz, in steps of 20 kHz
Resolution: 118 kHz to 12 kHz, in steps of 2 kHz
Resolution: 11.8 kHz to 1.2 kHz, in steps of 200 Hz
Resolution: 1.18 kHz to 60 Hz, in steps of 20 Hz
Bandwidth: 2 MHz, 1.5 MHz, 1 MHz, 500 kHz, 200 kHz,
150 kHz, 100 kHz, 50 kHz, 20 kHz, 15 kHz,
10 kHz, 5 kHz, 2 kHz, 1.5 kHz, 1 kHz, 500 Hz,
200 Hz, 100 Hz (there are limits based on the
center frequency)
Cutoff characteristic: –24 dB/Oct
Phase:
Nonlinear phase characteristicst
Interpolation:
Interpolation can be turned on and off.
Resolver:
The angle of rotation is computed from the carrier signal, sine signal, and cosine
signal.
Supported carrier frequencies:1 kHz to 20 kHz
Tracking filter band setting: 2 kHz, 1 kHz, 250 Hz, 100 Hz
Maximum measurable angular acceleration:
140000 rps2 (when the tracking filter is set to 2 kHz)
54000 rps2 (when the tracking filter is set to 1 kHz)
1800 rps2 (when the tracking filter is set to 250 Hz)
180 rps2 (when the tracking filter is set to 100 Hz)
Demodulation of the pulse width modulated (PWM) signal:
The PWM-modulated signal is integrated over the modulation period and converted
into an analog signal.
Reactive power:
The reactive power is computed from apparent power and effective power.
CAN ID detection:
The frame of the CAN bus signal with the specified ID is detected.
Torque:
The torque is computed from the measured frequenvy and the specified coefficient.
Angle difference math:
S1 – S2 (Angle)
Subtract the value (angle) of source channel 2 from the value (angle) of source
channel 1.
3 Phase Resolver:
Calculates the angle of rotation from the two sine signals that are generated from the
detection coil of the 3 phase resolver depending on the angle of the rotor.
Supported carrier frequencies:1 kHz to 20 kHz
Tracking filter band setting: 2 kHz, 1 kHz, 250 Hz, 100 Hz
App
Index
6.5 Features
Item
Specifications
Math source waveforms Analog channels 1 to 16 and the sub channels of scanner and CAN modules.
•Math results can be specified as sources of another channel.
•However, you can only specify math results of channels whose numbers are smaller
than the channel that you are specifying sources for.
Math delay
A uniform delay for each math operation, regardless of the number of math channels
Mean
The mean can be calculated on the math results.
Number of taps: 32 (fixed)
The calculation period changes automatically according to the DL850E/DL850EV
sample rate.
Zoom Method
Zooming by Setting a
Magnification
Zooming by Setting
Upper and Lower
Display Limits
V Zoom is set in steps of 1, 2, or 5 to a value in the range of 10.00E–21 to 500.0E+18.
Upper limit: ±5.0000E+22; lower limit: ±1.0000E–23
Power Math (Option)
Item
Math expression
Math source channels
Max. math rate
Math data update rate
Math result output channels
Math result
Power analysis
Max. number of analyzable
systems
Max. number of simultaneous
math parameters
Supported wiring systems
Delta math function
Math items
6-10
Specifications
Real time math using hardware
Analog channel 1 to channel 16 (multi-channel modules cannot be selected as math sources)*
10 MS/s
100 kS/s max.
Power analysis math CH13, CH14; harmonic analysis math CH15, CH16 (fixed)
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Results are converted to 16-bit values according to the scaling setting and stored in memory.
Up to two three-phase systems can be computed simultaneously.
126 when one system is measured
54 × 2 systems when two systems are measured
Single-phase, two-wire (1P2W); single-phase, three-wire (1P3W); or three-phase, three-wire
(3P3W),
Three-phase, three wire system that uses a three-voltage, three-current method (3P3W;
3V3A); three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W)
Three-phase, three-wire (3P3W) → three-phase, three wire system that uses a three-voltage,
three-current method (3P3W; 3V3A)
Three-phase, three-wire (3V3A) → three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W) (delta → star)
Three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W) → three-phase, three-wire (3V3A) (star → delta)
Rms voltage and current of each phase
Voltage and current simple average of each phase (DC)
AC voltage and current components of each phase (AC)
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
Power factor
Current phase difference
Voltage and current frequencies
Maximum voltage and current, minimum voltage and current
Maximum power, minimum power
Integrated watt-hour, integrated watt-hour of each polarity (positive and negative)
Integrated ampere-hour, integrated ampere-hour of each polarity (positive and negative)
Apparent energy
Reactive energy
Impedance of the load circuit
Series resistance of the load circuit
Series reactance of the load circuit
Parallel resistance of the load circuit
Parallel reactance of the load circuit
Three-phase voltage unbalanced factor
Three-phase current unbalanced factor
Motor output math
Power efficiency (select motor output result and power math result or power math result of
two systems
IM DL850E-03EN
6.5 Features
Item
Rms math system
Math sync mode
Channel selection for edge
Sync channel filter
Harmonic analysis
Max. number of analyzable
systems
Max. number of analyzable
frequencies
FFT points
Supported wiring systems
Delta math function
Sync channel
Sync channel filter
1
1 system
4
3
Fundamental wave 1 kHz
512
Single-phase, two-wire (1P2W); single-phase, three-wire (1P3W); or three-phase, three-wire
(3P3W),
Three-phase, three wire system that uses a three-voltage, three-current method (3P3W;
3V3A); three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W)
Three-phase, three-wire (3P3W) → three-phase, three wire system that uses a three-voltage,
three-current method (3P3W; 3V3A)
Three-phase, three-wire (3V3A) → three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W) (delta → star)
Three-phase, four-wire system (3P4W) → three-phase, three-wire (3V3A) (star → delta)
Rms analysis mode, power analysis mode
Rms analysis mode:
Rms values of the 1st to 40th harmonic
Rms percentage content of the 1st to 40th harmonic
Phase angles of the 1st to 40th harmonic
Total rms value
Distortion factor (IEC)
Distortion factor (CSA)
Power analysis mode:
Active powers from the 1st to the 35th harmonic
Active power percentage content from the 1st to the 35th harmonic
Phase angles of the 1st to 35th harmonic
Total active powers
Total reactive powers
Total apparent powers
Power factor
1st harmonic rms voltage
1st harmonic rms current
1st harmonic voltage phase angle
1st harmonic current phase angle
Rms analysis mode: Analysis source channel
Power analysis mode: Select one channel from voltage and current.
Low-pass filter can be selected.
Cutoff frequency: Select from 128 kHz, 64 kHz, 32 kHz, 16 kHz, 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz,
500 Hz, 250 Hz, 125 Hz, and 62.5 Hz.
* If power math is not to be performed, the data on channels 13 to 16 are also applicable.
Example: If only harmonic analysis is to be performed, the data on channels 1 to 14 are applicable.
IM DL850E-03EN
2
6-11
5
6
Specifications
Math mode
Math items
Specifications
Select true rms value or rectified mean value calibrated to the rms value
Edge:Select a signal. Computed using zero-crossings.
Auto Timer:Specify the time. Computed at specified time intervals.
AC:Select a signal. Computed using zero-crossings. Signal stop determined by a
stop prediction function.
AC+DC:Select a signal. Computed using zero-crossings. Signal stop determined by a
stop prediction function.
Switches to Auto Timer after stopping.
Select a single channel from own phase voltage, own phase current, or other voltage/current.
If sync mode is set to Edge, low-pass filter can be selected.
Cutoff frequency: Select from 128 kHz, 64 kHz, 32 kHz, 16 kHz, 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz,
500 Hz, 250 Hz, 125 Hz, and 62.5 Hz.
App
Index
6.5 Features
Other Features
Item
Initialization
Auto setup
Action
E-mail transmission
Calibration
System settings
Overview
Self tests
Help feature
PROTECT key
NUM key
Japanese string input
6.6
FFT
Item
Waveform to be computed
Number of channels
Computation range
Computed points
Time windows
Display window
6.7
Specifications
CHn or MATHn
1 (on models without the /G2 option), 2(on models with the /G2 option)
From the specified computation start point until the specified number of points have been computed
1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20 k, 50 k, or 100 k
Rect, Hanning, Hamming, FlatTop, and Exponential (on models with the /G2 option)
When the Exponential time window is selected, the following settings must be configured.
Damping rate: The weight of the last data point, with the weight of the first data point in the
specified number of FFT points taken to be 100% (= 1).
Selectable range: 1 to 100%
Resolution:
1%
Force1:
Set the area over which computation is performed in terms of a percentage from
the first FFT point, taking the number of FFT points to be 100%.
Selectable range: 1 to 100%
Resolution:
1%
Force2:
This setting applies to the output (response) signal (second parameter) of a twowaveform FFT.
Selectable range: 1 to 100%
Resolution:
1%
The FFT computation results are displayed in a separate window independent from the normal
waveform display.
Display range:
Set the display range by setting Center and Sensitivity.
Built-in Printer
Item
Print system
Sheet width
Effective print width
Dot density
Feeding direction resolution
Used for
6-12
Specifications
Resets settings to the factory default (excluding the date and time setting, communication interface
settings, language setting, and time difference from GMT setting). The reset can be undone.
Automatically sets the voltage axis, time axis, trigger, etc. The automatic settings can be undone.
Outputs screen capture data, saves waveform data (to binary, ASCII, floating-point, or MATLAB),
sounds a notification buzzer, transfers an e-mail, or performs some combination of the previous
actions whenever a trigger occurs or waveform acquisition stops
Sends e-mail using SMTP
Auto or manual
Screen color, date and time, message language, menu language, click sound on/off, and grid
thickness
The system specifications can be displayed.
Memory test, key test, printer test, and storage test
Displays a description of the settings
You can lock the keys to prevent unintentional operations.
You can enter numbers directly.
Compact-VJE Ver.3.0
Specifications
Thermal line dot system
112 mm
104 mm (832 dots)
8 dot/mm
8 dot/mm
Producing a hard copy of the screen
IM DL850E-03EN
6.8
Storage
1
SD Memory Card
Item
Number of slots
Maximum capacity
Supported cards
2
Specifications
1
32 GB
SD and SDHC compliant memory cards
3
Internal HDD (/HD1 option)
Item
Number of drives
Size
Available space
4
Specifications
1
2.5 in.
500 GB, FAT32
5
USB Storage Device
Item
Compatible USB storage
devices
Available space
Specifications
Mass storage devices that are compliant with USB Mass Storage Class Ver. 1.1
6
Specifications
2 TB
Partition style: MBR, Format: FAT32/FAT16
* See section 6.9, “USB Ports for Peripherals.”
App
External HDD Interface (/HD0 option)
Item
Connection interface
Number of drives
Available space
6.9
Index
USB Ports for Peripherals
Item
Connector type
Electrical and mechanical
specifications
Supported transfer mode
Compatible devices
Number of ports
Power supply
IM DL850E-03EN
Specifications
eSATA
1
2 TB
Disk partition style: MBR, Format: FAT32
Specifications
USB type A (receptacle)
USB Rev. 2.0 compliant
HS (High Speed; 480 Mbps), FS (Full Speed; 12 Mbps), LS (Low Speed; 1.5 Mbps)
Mass storage devices that are compliant with USB Mass Storage Class Ver. 1.1
104 or 109 keyboards that are compliant with USB HID Class Version 1.1
Mouse devices that are compliant with USB HID Class Version 1.1
2
5 V, 500 mA (for each port)
6-13
6.10 Auxiliary I/O Section
External Trigger Input (TRIGGER IN)
Item
Connector type
Input level
Minimum pulse width
Detected edge
Trigger delay time
Specifications
BNC
TTL
100 ns
Rising or falling
Within 100 ns + 1 sample
Trigger Output (TRIGGER OUT)
Item
Connector type
Output level
Output formats
Normal mode
Pulse mode
Sample pulse mode
Start/Stop mode
Specifications
BNC
5 V CMOS
Logic
Output delay
Output hold time
Logic
Output delay
Pulse width
Logic
Pulse rate
Logic
Low when a trigger occurs and high after acquisition is completed
Within 100 ns + 1 sample period
100 ns or more
Transmits a pulse when a trigger occurs
Within 100 ns + 1 sample period
1 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms
Transmits pulses at a given frequency during waveform acquisition
5 Hz to 200 kHz (1-2-5 steps)
However, the interval must be longer than the DL850E/DL850EV sampling
interval. The interval can be set to 1 over the integer multiple of the DL850E/
DL850EV sampling interval.
High level output during waveform acquisition
Low level output while waveform acquisition is stopped
External Clock Input (EXT CLK IN)
Item
Connector type
Input level
Minimum pulse width
Detected edge
Sampling jitter
Specifications
BNC
TTL
50 ns
Rising
Within 100 ns + 1 sample
Video Signal Output (VIDEO OUT)
Item
Connector type
Output format
Output resolution
Specifications
D-sub 15 pin receptacle
Analog RGB
XGA-compliant output, 1024 × 768 dots
Approx. 60 Hz Vsync (dot clock frequency: 66 MHz)
GO/NO-GO Determination I/O
Item
Connector type
Input level
Output level
6-14
Specifications
RJ-11 modular jack
TTL or contact
5 V CMOS
IM DL850E-03EN
6.10 Auxiliary I/O Section
1
External Start/Stop Input
Item
Connector type
Input level
Specifications
RJ-11 modular jack
TTL or contact
2
COMP Output (Probe-compensation-signal output terminal)
Item
Output signal frequency
Output amplitude
3
Specifications
1 kHz ± 1%
1 Vp-p ± 10%
4
Probe Power Output (/P4 Option)
Item
Number of output terminals
Output voltage
Output current
Specifications
4
±12 V
Up to 1 A
5
6
Time Sync Signal Input (IRIG; /C20 option)
Clock sync range
Post-sync accuracy
Specifications
BNC
1
A002, B002, A132, and B122
You can switch between 50 Ω and 5 kΩ.
±8 V
Synchronizing the DL850E/DL850EV time
Synchronizing the sample clock
±80 ppm
No drift from the input signal
Specifications
Item
Input connector
Number of input connectors
Supported IRIG signals
Input impedance
Maximum input voltage
Used for
App
Index
GPS Interface (/C30 option)
Item
Input connector
Number of input connectors
Receiver type
Function
Accuracy after
synchronization1
Sync time
Compatible antenna
Specifications
SMA
1
GPS L1 C/A code SBAS:WAAS EGNOS MSAS
DL850E/DL850EV time synchronization
Sample clock synchronization
± 200 ns (when locked to GPS signal)
Within 5 minutes after the power is turned on
Active antenna, 3.3 V power supply
A1058ER standard accessory
1 The figure is based on results obtained when the GPS antenna is installed in a location with good line of sight to GPS
satellites. The accuracy may not be attained depending on the measurement location, the location of satellites when the
measurement is taken, the weather, and influence caused by obstruction.
IM DL850E-03EN
6-15
6.11 Computer Interface
USB-PC Connection
Item
Connector type
Electrical and mechanical
specifications
Supported transfer mode
Number of ports
Supported protocols
PC system requirements
Specifications
USB type B receptacle
USB Rev. 2.0 compliant
HS (High Speed; 480 Mbps) and FS (Full Speed; 12 Mbps)
1
Functions as a device that conforms to one of the following two protocols.
USBTMC-USB488 (USB Test and Measurement Class Ver. 1.0)*
GP-IB commands can be used through USB.
Mass Storage Class Ver.1.1
Only reading from a PC to the internal hard disk of the DL850E/DL850EV is possible.
(Operations, such as writing, deleting and formatting, are impossible.)
Windows 7, 8.1, 10
* A separate driver is required.
Ethernet
Item
Connector type
Ports
Electrical and mechanical
specifications
Transmission system
Communication protocol
Supported services
Specifications
RJ-45 modular jack
1
IEEE802.3
Ethernet (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T)
TCP/IP
DHCP, DNS, SNTP client, SMTP client, FTP server and client, LPR, Web server, and VXI11
GP-IB (/C1 or /C20 option)
Item
Connector type
Electrical specifications
Functional specifications
Protocol
Code
Mode
Address
Remote mode release
6-16
Specifications
24-pin connector
Complies with IEEE St’d 488-1978 (JIS C 1901-1987)
SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, and C0
IEEE St’d 488.2-1992
ISO (ASCII)
Addressable mode
Talker and listener addresses can be specified from 0 to 30.
Remote mode can be cleared with the SHIFT+CLEAR TRACE key (except during Local Lockout).
IM DL850E-03EN
6.12 General Specifications
Item
Standard operating
conditions
Recommended calibration
period
Warm-up time
Storage environment
Operating environment
Specifications
Ambient Temperature:
23 ± 5°C
Ambient humidity:
20 to 80% RH
Supply voltage and
Within ±1% of rating
frequency errors:
After the DL850E/DL850EV has been warmed up for 30 minutes and then calibration has been
performed
1 year
At least 30 minutes
Temperature:
Humidity:
Altitude:
Temperature:
Humidity:
Altitude:
2
3
4
−20 to 60°C
20 to 85% RH (no condensation)
3000 m or less
5 to 40°C
20 to 85% RH (when the printer is not being used)
35 to 85% RH (when the printer is used)
In both cases, no condensation
2000 m or less
5
100 to 120 VAC, 220 to 240 VAC (auto switching)
90 to 132 VAC, 198 to 264 VAC
6
50/60 Hz
48 to 63 Hz
App
Built in (not replaceable)
200 VA
1500 VAC for one minute between the power supply and case
10 MΩ or more for 500 VDC between the power supply and case
Approx. 355 mm (W) × 259 mm (H) × 180 mm (D), not including the handle and protrusions
Approx. 6.5 kg (weight of the DL850E/DL850EV only without paper and with the /B5, /M2, /HD1, /
C1, and /P4 options installed)
Instrument cooling method Forced air cooling. Exhaust on the left side and top panel.
DL850EV DC power supply model
(/DC option; the AC power supply specifications are the same as those shown for the standard model)
Supply format
Auto DC/AC switching (AC preferred), isolation between DC power input terminal and the DL850EV
Rated supply voltage
12 VDC
Permitted supply voltage 10 to 18 VDC
Power consumption
Approx. 90 VA (typical value1):When driving 2 channels (High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation
Module × 1)
Approx. 105 VA (typical value1):When driving 8 channels (High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation
Module × 2 and High-Speed 10 MS/s 12-Bit Isolation Module × 2)
Approx. 135 VA (typical value1):When driving 16 channels (High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation
Module × 4 and High-Speed 10 MS/s 12-Bit Isolation Module × 4)
Maximum power
Approx. 150 VA
consumption
Standby power
30 mW (typical value1, DC power consumption when power is supplied both to AC and DC power)
(during DC standby)
Voltage input protection Overcurrent detection: Breaker (15 A)
circuit
Reverse connection protection: Breaker shutdown
Undervoltage detection: Cut off at a voltage less than approx. 9.5 V
Overvoltage detection: Cut off at a voltage greater than approx. 18 V
Withstand voltage
30 VDC for one minute between the DC power input terminal and earth terminal
External dimensions
Approx. 355 mm (W) × 259 mm (H) × 202 mm (D),
(DL850EV with the /DC option installed, not including the handle and protrusions)
Weight
Weight increase by the DC power option Approx. 800 g
Indicator function
Indicates the status of the power supply to the DL850EV using two LEDs
Instrument cooling
Forced air cooling. Exhaust on the left side and top panel.
method
In DC mode, air is vented from the left side, top panel, and rear panel.
Battery backup
The settings and clock are backed up with an internal lithium battery.
Backup battery life
Approx. five years (at an ambient temperature of 25°C)
IM DL850E-03EN
Specifications
Standard model
Rated supply voltage
Permitted supply voltage
range
Rated supply frequency
Permitted supply voltage
frequency range
Power fuse
Maximum power
consumption
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
External dimensions
Weight
1
6-17
Index
6.12 General Specifications
Item
Safety standard
Emissions
Specifications
Compliant standards2
EN 61010-1, EN 61010-2-030, EN 61010-031, EN 60825-1
• Overvoltage category (installation category) II3
• Measurement Category: See the specifications of each module.4
• Pollution degree 25
Approved (DL850E, DL850EV, 701250, 720250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 720268, 701261,
701262, 701265, 720266, 701270, 701271, 701275, 701281, 720281, 720210, 720211, 720220,
720221, 720230, 720240, 720241, 720243, 720254, 700986, 700987, 701953, 701955, 701956,
701957, 701958, 702911, 702912)
• Bridgehead for the strain module
Use the 701955 or 701956 with the 701270, and use the 701957 or 701958 with the 701271.
Compliant standards
EN 61326-1 Class A, EN 61326-2-1, EN 55011 Class A, Group 1, EMC Regulatory Arrangement
in Australia and New Zealand EN 55011 Class A, Group 1, Korea Electromagnetic Conformity
Standard ( 한국 전자파적합성기준 )
Approved (DL850E, DL850EV, 701250, 720250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 720268, 701261,
701262, 701265, 720266, 701270, 701271, 701275, 701281, 720281, 720210, 720211, 720220,
720221, 720230, 720240, 720241, 720243, 720254, 700986, 700987, 701953, 701955, 701956,
701957, 701958, 702911, 702912)
EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
This product is a Class A (for industrial environments) product. Operation of this product in a
residential area may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the
interference.
If the measurement lead or probe is connected to the input module, or if this instrument is
connected to an object to be measured, emissions requirements may not be satisfied. In this
case, the user sometimes need to take proper actions.
Test items
1. Power supply terminal noise
2. Radiation emission
3. Power supply harmonic regulation
4. Power supply voltage fluctuation and flicker
Cable conditions (DL850E/DL850EV)
Current probe
When connecting a current probe to the input terminal and probe power terminal of a module,
attach a single ferrite core6 to both cables on the side of the cables closest to the DL850E/
DL850EV.
GP-IB cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length.
USB cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Ethernet cable
Use a shielded cable that is 30 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
External clock input, external trigger input, external trigger output
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
IRIG cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
External HDD cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length.
Video signal output cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core7 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
External I/O cable
Use a shielded cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the
cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
DC power cable
Attach a ferrite core7 to the DC power cable.
Probe power cable
Use the dedicated cable, and attach a ferrite-core6 to the side of the cable closest to the
DL850E/DL850EV by passing the cable twice through the core.
Example of passing the cable through twice
Cable conditions (input module)
6-18
IM DL850E-03EN
6.12 General Specifications
Item
IM DL850E-03EN
6-19
1
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Immunity
Specifications
50 Ω terminator 700976 (for the 701281, 720211, 720243, 720254, 720250, 720266, 720268,
and 720281)
Isolated probe 700929 (for the 701250, 701251, 701255, 701275, and 720210)
Attach a ferrite-core6 to the side of the cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV by passing the
cable twice through the core.
Twisted pair cable for the 701261, 701262, and 701265
Use a cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite-core6 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV by passing the cable twice through the core.
Twisted pair cable for the 701261, 701262, and 701265
Use a cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite-core6 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV by passing the cable twice through the core.
Twisted pair cable for the 720220 and 720221(701953)
Use a cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite-core8 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV by passing the cable twice through the core.
Measurement lead 758933 (for the 701267)
Bundle the H and L measurement leads. Attach a ferrite core6 to the DL850E/DL850EV side
of the bundled leads.
D-sub 9-pin shielded cable (for the 720240 and 720241)
Use a cable that is 3 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Bridgeheads 701955 and 701956 (for the 701270)
Use a cable that is 5 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Bridgeheads 701957 and 701958 (for the 701271)
Use a cable that is 5 m or less in length, and attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the cable
closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Logic probe input cables 700986, 700987, 702911, and 702912 (for the 720230)
Attach a ferrite core6 to the side of the cable closest to the DL850E/DL850EV.
Compliant standards
EN 61326-1 Table 2 (for use in industrial locations), EN 61326-2-1
Approved (DL850E, DL850EV, 701250, 720250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 720268, 701261,
701262, 701265, 720266, 701270, 701271, 701275, 701281, 720281, 720210, 720211, 720220,
720221, 720230, 720240, 720241, 720243, 720254, 700986, 700987, 701953, 701955, 701956,
701957, 701958, 702911, 702912)
If the measurement lead or probe is connected to the input module, or if this instrument is
connected to an object to be measured, immunity requirements may not be satisfied. In this
case, the user sometimes need to take proper actions.
Influence in the immunity environment (criteria A)
Noise increase
701250: ≤±20 mV (1:1 input, 5 mV/div range conversion)
701251: ≤±3 mV (1:1 input, 1 mV/div range conversion)
701255: ≤±25 mV (1:1 input, 5 mV/div range conversion)
701267: ≤±30 mV (1:1 input, 20 mV/div range conversion)
701261: ≤±3 mV (5 mV/div range conversion)
701262: ≤±3 mV (5 mV/div range conversion)
701265: ≤±0.05 mV (0.1 mV/div)
701270: ≤±100 μSTR (±500 μV range, gauge factor = 2)
701271: ≤±100 μSTR (±500 μV range, gauge factor = 2)
701275: ≤±6 mV (1:1 input, 5 mV/div range conversion)
701281: ≤±0.01 Hz (frequency, 0.1 Hz/div range conversion)
720210: ≤±50 mV (1:1 input, 10 mV/div range conversion)
720211: ≤±50 mV (1:1 input, 10 mV/div range conversion)
720220: ≤±20 mV (0.2 V/div range conversion)
720221: ≤±2 mV (1 mV/div range; data update period = 100 ms when you are using the
701953)
720230: No bit errors
720240: No erros
720241: No erros
720243: No erros
720254: ≤±15 mV (1:1 input, 10 mV/div range conversion)
720250: ≤±20 mV (1:1 input, 5 mV/div range conversion)
720266: ≤±0.05 mV (0.1 mV/div)
720268: ≤±300 mV (50 mV/div range conversion)
720281: ≤0.01 Hz (frequency, 0.1 Hz/div range conversion)
Test conditions
701250: 10 MS/s, envelope mode, 50 mV/div, no input filter, with the tip of the probe (700929
(10:1)) shorted
App
Index
6.12 General Specifications
Item
Environmental standard
Specifications
701251: 1 MS/s, envelope mode, 10 mV/div, no input filter, with the tip of the probe (700929
(10:1)) shorted
701255: 10 MS/s, envelope mode, 50 mV/div, no input filter, with the tip of the probe (701940
(10:1)) shorted
701267: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 0.2 V/div, no input filter, with the end of the cable shorted
701261: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 5 mV/div, no input filter, with the end of the cable shorted
701262: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 5 mV/div, no input filter, with the end of the cable shorted
701265: 500 S/s, envelope mode, 0.1 mV/div, no input filter, with the end of the cable shorted
701270: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 500 μSTR, gauge factor: 2.0, no input filter
701955 bridge voltage: 2 V
701956 bridge voltage: 10 V
701271: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 500 μSTR, gauge factor: 2.0, no input filter
701957 bridge voltage: 2 V
701958 bridge voltage: 10 V
701275: 100 kS/s, envelope mode, 50 mV/div, no input filter, with the tip of the probe (700929
(10:1)) shorted
701281: 1 MS/s, envelope mode, Frequency, no input filter, with the tip of the probe shorted
720210: 100 M/s, envelope mode, 0.1 V/div, no input filter, with the tip of the probe (700929
(10:1)) shorted
720211: 100 M/s, envelope mode, 0.1 V/div, no input filter, 50 Ω terminator
720220: 12.5 kS/s, envelope mode, 0.2 V/div, no input filter, with the end of the cable shorted
720221: 25 kS/s, envelope mode, 1 mV/div, data update period = 100 ms with the end of the
cable shorted when you are using the 701953
720230: Logic probes 700986, 700987, 702911, and 702912, with the tips of the logic
probes shorted
720240: Bit rate: 1 Msps, one shot operation
720241: Bit rate: 19.2 kbps, external signal input
720243: Clock tick: 3 μs, external signal input
720254: 1 MS/s, envelope mode, 10 mV/div, no input filter (1:1 input), 50 Ω terminator
720250: 10 MS/s, envelope mode, 5 mV/div, no input filter (1:1 input), 50 Ω terminator
720266: 500 S/s, envelope mode, 0.1 mV/div, no input filter, 50 Ω terminator
720268: 1 MS/s, envelope mode, 50 mV/div, no input filter, 50 Ω terminator
720281: 1 MS/s, envelope mode, Frequency, no input filter, 50 Ω terminator
Test items
1. Electrostatic discharge
Air discharge: ±8 kV. Contact discharge: ±4 kV. Criteria B.
2. Radiated immunity
80 M to 1 GHz, 10 V/m, 1.4 G to 2 GHz, 3 V/m, 2 GHz to 4.0 GHz, 3 V/m, criteria A
3. Conducted immunity
10 V, criteria A
4. Fast transient/burst
Power line: ±2 kV. Signal line: ±1 kV, criteria B
5. Power frequency magnetic field
Omitted, because the device does not exert considerable influence on the magnetic field
6. Surge immunity
±1 kV between lines, ±2 kV common, criteria B
7. Voltage dip and interruption
1 cycle, 100%, criteria B
Other tests, criteria C
Definitions of criteriaDefinitions of criteria
Criteria A: During testing, “influence in the immunity environment” described above is met.
Criteria B:The instrument continues to function and is controllable throughout testing. The
instrument does not change operation modes, and data changes do not persist.
Criteria C:Temporary losses of functionality (such as measurement stopping, etc.) are
recovered from through the intervention of the operator.
Compliant Standard9
EN 50581 Monitoring and control instruments including industrial monitoring and control
instruments.
Approved (DL850E, DL850EV, 701250, 720250, 701251, 701255, 701267, 720268, 701261,
701262, 701265, 720266, 701270, 701271, 701275, 701281, 720281, 720210, 720211, 720220,
720221, 720230, 720240, 720241, 720243, 720254, 700986, 700987, 701953, 701955, 701956,
701957, 701958, 702911, 702912)
1The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
2 If the 701260 module is inserted into the DL850E/DL850EV, it will not comply with safety standard EN 61010-1:2010 or
EN 61010-2-030:2010.
3The overvoltage category (installation category) is a value used to define the transient overvoltage condition and includes
the rated impulse withstand voltage. Category I applies to electric equipment whose power is supplied from a circuit that
incorporates withstand voltage control. Category II applies to electrical equipment that is powered through a fixed installation
such as a wall outlet wiring to a switchboard.
6-20
IM DL850E-03EN
6.12 General Specifications
4 The measurement category of this instrument’s signal input terminals varies depending on the modules that are installed. Use
the instrument within the scope of the measurement category that corresponds to the module specifications. Do not use the
instrument outside the scope of the measurement category that corresponds to the module specifications. The scope of each
measurement category is as follows.
Measurement category Other (O) applies to measurement of circuits that are not directly connected to a main power supply.
This category applies to measurement of secondary electric circuits in equipment across a transformer. If the module
specifications fall under measurement category O, the estimated transient voltage that may appear at the signal input terminals
is 1500 V.
Measurement category II applies to measurement of circuits, such as household electric appliances and portable electric tools,
that are connected to low-voltage installations.
Measurement category III applies to measurement of facility circuits, such as distribution boards and circuit breakers.
Measurement category IV applies to measurement of power source circuits, such as entrance cables to buildings and cable
systems, for low-voltage installations.
5Pollution Degree applies to the degree of adhesion of a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates withstand voltage or surface
resistivity. Pollution degree 2 applies to normal indoor atmospheres (with only non-conductive pollution).
6 TDK: ZCAT2035-0930A, YOKOGAWA part number: A1190MN
7 TDK: ZCAT3035-1330, YOKOGAWA part number: A1179MN
8 TDK: ZCAT1325-0530A, YOKOGAWA part number: A1181MN
9 If the 701260 or 701280 module is inserted into the DL850E/DL850EV, it will not comply with environment regulation standard
EN 50581:2012.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
6-21
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (701250)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
6-22
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, and GND
10 MS/s
Isolated unbalanced
DC to 3 MHz
5 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929(10:1), 702902(10:1), or 701947(100:1):2
600 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):4
200 V (DC+ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
250 V (DC+ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage the
instrument when applied)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):6
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
In combination with 700929 (10:1)/702902 (10:1)/701947 (100:1),3 or in combination with
701901+701954 (1:1):5
400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):7
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.5% of 10 div)
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
10 Hz or less (1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.1 Hz or less when using the
701947)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value8)
±400 µV or ±0.06 div whichever is greater (typical value8)
2300Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
12 bit (150 LSB/div)
Zero point:
5 mV/div to 20 V/div: ±(0.05% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Select from Full, 500 kHz, 50 kHz, 5 kHz, and 500 Hz
Cut-off characteristics:
−18 dB/OCT (typical value8)
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
Voltage probe: Recommended
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV, Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
Clamp-on probe
720930 (50 A), 720931 (200 A)
High voltage differential probe (connect the GND cable provided with the probe to the
DL850E/DL850EV case)
700924 (1000:1, 100:1/1400 V (DC+ACpeak)): For measuring 1400 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1)
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2: For measuring 200 V
(DC+ACpeak) or less), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type) red/black 2-piece set) is required
separately
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
H
2
L
3
4
Combined with the 701901+701954
701901
H
6
701954 4
3
L
5
Specifications
700929
702902
701947
2
5
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
1
App
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
BNC
6
L
Index
7
8 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
6-23
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720250)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
6-24
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, and GND
10 MS/s
Isolated unbalanced
DC to 3 MHz
5 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929(10:1), 702902(10:1), or 701947(100:1):2
800 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):4
200 V (DC+ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
250 V (DC+ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage the
instrument when applied)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):6
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
In combination with 700929 (10:1)/702902 (10:1)/701947 (100:1),3 or in combination with
701901+701954 (1:1):5
400 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):7
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
±0.5 % of 10 div
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
10 Hz or less (1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.1 Hz or less when using the
701947)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value8)
±400 µV or ±0.06 div whichever is greater (typical value8)
2300 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
12 bit (150 LSB/div)
Zero point:
±(0.05% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Select from Full, 500 kHz, 50 kHz, 5 kHz, and 500 Hz
Cut-off characteristics:
−18 dB/OCT (typical value8)
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
Clamp-on
1 A:10 mV (for the 720930), 1 A: 2.5 mV (for the 720931)
probe:
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
Voltage probe: Recommended
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV, Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
Clamp-on probe
720930 (50 A), 720931 (200 A)
High voltage differential probe (connect the GND cable provided with the probe to the
DL850E/DL850EV case)
700924 (1000:1, 100:1/1400 V (DC+ACpeak)): For measuring 1400 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1)
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2: For measuring 200 V
(DC+ACpeak) or less), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type) red/black 2-piece set) is required
separately
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
H
700929
702902
701947
2
L
L
6
5
App
Index
7
8 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
4
Specifications
3
L
H
6
3
H
701954 4
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
BNC
2
5
Combined with the 701901+701954
701901
1
6-25
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Speed High-Resolution 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (701251)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
6-26
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, and GND
1 MS/s
Isolated unbalanced
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
DC to 300 kHz
2 mV/div and 1mV/div:
DC to 200 kHz
1 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
600 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):4
140 V (DC+ACpeak)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):6
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
In combination with 700929 (10:1)/702902 (10:1)/701947 (100:1),3 or in combination with
701901+701954 (1:1):5
400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):7
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.25% of 10 div)
2 mV/div:
±(0.3% of 10 div)
1 mV/div:
±(0.5% of 10 div)
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
1 Hz or less (0.1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.01 Hz or less when using
the 701947)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value8)
±100 µV or ±0.01 div whichever is greater (typical value8)
2300 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
16 bit (2400 LSB/div)
Zero point:
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
2 mV/div:
±(0.05% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
1 mV/div:
±(0.10% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Gain:
1 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Select from Full, 40 kHz, 4 kHz, and 400 Hz
Cut-off characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value8)
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
Clamp-on
1 A:10 mV (for the 720930), 1 A: 2.5 mV (for the 720931)
probe:
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
Voltage probe: Recommended
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV. Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
Clamp-on probe
720930 (50 A), 720931 (200 A)
High voltage differential probe (connect the GND cable provided with the probe to the
DL850E/DL850EV case)
700924 (1000:1, 100:1/1400 V (DC+ACpeak)): For measuring 1400 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1)
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2: For measuring 200 V
(DC+ACpeak) or less), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type) red/black 2-piece set) is
required separately
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
H
2
L
3
4
Combined with the 701901+701954
701901
H
6
701954 4
3
L
5
Specifications
700929
702902
701947
2
5
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
1
App
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
BNC
6
L
Index
7
8 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
6-27
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Non-Isolation Module (701255)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when sine wave of
amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, and GND
10 MS/s
Non-isolated, unbalanced
DC to 3 MHz
5 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 701940 (10:1):2
600 V (DC+ACpeak)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):3
200 V (DC+ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
250 V (DC+ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage the
instrument when applied)
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.5% of 10 div)
BNC connector (metallic type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
10 Hz or less (1 Hz or less when using the 701940)
±400 µV or ±0.06 div whichever is greater (typical value4)
12 bit (150 LSB/div)
Zero point:
5 mV/div to 20 V/div:
±(0.05% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Select from Full, 500 kHz, 50 kHz, 5 kHz, and 5400 Hz
Cut-off characteristics:
−18 dB/OCT (typical value4)
Voltage probe:
1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe:
1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
Clamp-on probe: 1 A:10 mV (for the 720930), 1 A: 2.5 mV (for the 720931)
Voltage probe (10:1 passive probe): Recommended
701940, 17 to 46 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV. Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
Clamp-on probe
720930 (50 A), 720931 (200 A)
High voltage differential probe (connect the GND cable provided with the probe to the
DL850E/DL850EV case)
700924 (1000:1, 100:1/1400 V (DC+ACpeak)): For measuring 1400 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
Compatible probes/cables
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Recommended:
Combined with the 10:1 passive probe
(701940)
2
H
L
Direct input
(cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
701255
Input
terminal
GND
3
GND
H
L
Earth
GND is connected to the case potential.
GND is connected to the case potential.
4 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-28
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS) (701267)
Item
Standard operating
conditions
Vertical (voltage) axis
accuracy DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC
coupled low frequency
attenuation point
Common mode rejection
ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Response time (only when
observing RMS)
Bandwidth limit
Connection cable
IM DL850E-03EN
2
2
AC, DC, GND, AC-RMS, and DC-RMS
100 kS/s
Isolated unbalanced
Waveform observation mode:
DC to 40 kHz
RMS observation mode:
DC, 40 Hz to 10 kHz
3
4
20 mV/div to 200 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
Combined with the 758933+701954 or 701904+701954:2
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):5
850 V (DC+ACpeak)
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
5
Working voltage of safety standard
Combined with the 758933+701954 or
701904+701954
Across probe tip H and earth:3
700 Vrms (CAT II)
Across probe tip L and earth:4
400 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
Across the input terminal, H or L, and earth:6 42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Waveform observation mode
DC accuracy
±(0.25% of 10 div)
RMS observation mode
DC accuracy
±(1.0% of 10 div)
AC accuracy (when a sine wave is input)
±(1.5% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 2 or less) ±(2.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 3 or less) ±(3.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
Plug-in terminal (safety terminal)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
1 Hz or less
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value7)
±1 mV or ±0.02 div whichever is greater (typical value7)
3510 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
16 bit (2400 LSB/div)
Zero point:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value7)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value7)
Rising (0 to 90% of 10 div):
100 ms (typical value7)
Falling (100 to 10% of 10 div):
250 ms (typical value7)
Select from Full, 10 kHz,1 kHz, and 100 Hz
Cut-off characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value7)
Measurement lead 758933 and alligator clip for measuring 850 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
1:1 safety cables 701904 and alligator clip for measuring 850 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
(the alligator clip (dolphin type) 701954 is recommended)
6-29
6
Specifications
Effective measurement
range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine
wave of amplitude ±3 div is
applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity
setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or
less)
Maximum rated voltage to
earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or
less)
Specifications
Temperature:
23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
1
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
1. Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 758933+701954 or 701904+701954
(Red)
758933/
Input
701904
terminal
(Black)
H
3
2
701954
4
L
Direct input (cable that does not comply
with the safety standards)
(Red)
Input
terminal
(Black)
H
5
L
6
7 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-30
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
High-Voltage 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with AAF, RMS) (720268)
Item
Standard operating
conditions
Specifications
Temperature:
23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
Crest factor (only when
observing RMS)
IM DL850E-03EN
Sample Rate
Cutoff Frequency (fc)
100 kS/s or higher
40 kHz
100 S/s to 50 kS/s
40% of the sample rate
50 S/s or less
40 Hz
Measurement lead 758933 and alligator clip for measuring 1000 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
1:1 safety cables 701904 and alligator clip for measuring 1000 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
(the alligator clip (dolphin type) 701954 is recommended)
3 or less
6-31
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Effective measurement
range
Number of input channels
2
Input coupling
AC, DC, GND, AC-RMS, and DC-RMS
Maximum sample rate
1 MS/s
Input format
Isolated unbalanced
Frequency characteristics1 Waveform observation mode:
DC to 300 kHz
(−3 dB point when a sine
RMS observation mode:
DC, 40 Hz to 100 kHz
wave of amplitude ±3 div is
applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity
20 mV/div to 200 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
setting
Maximum input voltage
Combined with the 758933+701954 or 701904+701954 2, 7:
850 V (DC+ACpeak)
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):4 42 V (DC+ACpeak)
less)
1000 Vrms (CAT II),
Maximum rated voltage to
Combined with the 758933+701954 or 701904+701954 3:
600 Vrms (CAT III)
earth
Between input and case
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)5: 42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II,
Between each input
30 Vrms)
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or
less)
Vertical (voltage) axis
Waveform observation mode
accuracy DC accuracy1
DC accuracy
±(0.25% of 10 div)
RMS observation mode
DC accuracy
±(1.0% of 10 div)
AC accuracy (when a sine wave is input)
±(1.5% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 10 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 2 or less) ±(2.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 10 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 3 or less) ±(3.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 10 kH
1kHz to 10kHz: Add 1.0% to the above AC
accuracy.
Input connector
Plug-in terminal (safety terminal)
Input impedance
2 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 12 pF
−3 dB point when AC
1 Hz or less
coupled low frequency
attenuation point
Common mode rejection
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
ratio
Residual noise level
±2 mV or ±0.04 div whichever is greater (typical value6)
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
5400 VACrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
Insulation resistance
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
A/D conversion resolution
16 bit (2400 LSB/div)
Temperature coefficient
Zero point:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Response time (only when Rising (0 to 90% of 10 div):
120 ms (typical value6)
observing RMS)
Falling (100 to 10% of 10 div):
280 ms (typical value6)
Bandwidth limit
Select from Full, 40 kHz, 4 kHz, 400 Hz, and AUTO
Cut-off characteristics:
Setting other than AUTO:
−18 dB/OCT (typical value6)
AUTO: Digital filter
Cutoff frequency (fc) when set to AUTO
Connection cable
1
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Maximum setting range of
DC offset
Input bias current
Table of cutoff frequency
characteristics of the
anti-aliasing filter (AAF)
Specifications
±5 div
2 nA or less
When the filter is set to Auto, the anti-aliasing filter and low-pass filter are automatically set
according to the sample rate.
Sample Rate
1 MS/s
500 kS/s
200 kS/s
100 kS/s
50 kS/s
20 kS/s
10 kS/s
5 kS/s
2 kS/s
1 kS/s
500 S/s
200 S/s
100 S/s
50 S/s
Ext sample
AAF
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
20 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
800 Hz
400 Hz
200 Hz
80 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
Low-Pass Filter
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
40 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
OFF
1. Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 758933+701954 or 701904+701954
(Red)
Input
758933/
terminal
701904
(Black)
H
701954
2
L
3
Direct input (cable that does not comply
with the safety standards)
H
(Red)
Input
4
terminal
L
5
(Black)
Withstand voltage: 2210 Vrms for 1 minute
Allowable transient surge voltage (between earth and input): ±3100 Vpeak
6 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
7 When using this module other than DL850, DL850V, DL850E, DL850EV, or SL1000, the maximum input voltage is 1000 Vrms:
nowever, 1000 VDC or 1414 Vpeak MAX.
6-32
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
Universal (Voltage/Temp.) Module (701261) /Universal (Voltage/Temp.)
Module (with AAF) (701262)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Maximum input voltage4
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
S
0 to 1700°C
B
0 to 1800°C
W
Au7Fe3
0 to 2300°C
0 to 300K
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
Except, 0 to 200°C: ±8°C
200 to 800°C: ±5°C
±(0.1% of reading + 2°C)
Except, 400 to 700°C: ±8°C
Effective range is 400 to 1800°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
0 to 50K:
±4K
50 to 300K: ±2.5K
DC to 40 kHz
DC to 100 Hz
Both temperature and voltage input:
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
150 V (DC + ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage the
instrument when applied)
Both temperature and voltage input:
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Maximum rated voltage to earth5
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical resolution
[Voltage measurement]
During voltage input:
2400 LSB/div
[Temperature measurement] When measuring temperature: 0.1°C
−3 dB point when AC coupled
[Voltage measurement] 0.5 Hz or less
low frequency attenuation point
Input connector
Binding post
Input impedance
Approx. 1 MΩ
Common mode rejection ratio
[Voltage measurement]
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
[Temperature measurement] 120 dB or more (50/60 Hz, with 2-Hz filter ON, signal source
resistance of 500 Ω or less) (typical value6)
Residual noise level
[Voltage measurement]
±100 µV or ±0.01 div, whichever is greater (typical value6)
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
[Voltage measurement]
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Temperature coefficient
[Voltage measurement]
Zero point: ±(0.01% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
IM DL850E-03EN
6-33
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Function
Temperature (thermocouple) or voltage measurement (switchable)
Effective measurement range
[Voltage measurement]
20 div (display range: 10 div)
Number of input channels
2
Input coupling
TC, DC, AC, and GND
TC:
Temperature (thermocouple) measurement
DC:
Voltage measurement (DC coupling)
AC:
Voltage measurement (AC coupling)
Voltage measurement maximum 100 kS/s
sample rate
Temperature measurement data 500 Hz
update rate
Input format
Isolated unbalanced
Measurement range/accuracy1
[Voltage measurement]
Voltage sensitivity: 5 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
Voltage accuracy:
±(0.25% of 10 div)
Thermocouple standards
[Temperature measurement]2
• K, E, J, T, N, R, S, B:
Type
Measurement Range Accuracy
IEC 60584-1
K
−200
to 1300°C
DIN IEC 60584-1
E
−200 to 800°C
JIS C1602
J
−200 to 1100°C
• W: W-5%/Re/W-26%/Re
±(0.1% of reading + 1.5°C)
T
−200 to 400°C
(Hoskins Mfg. Co.)
Except ±(0.2% of reading + 1.5°C) for −200°C to 0°C
L
−200 to 900°C
ASTM E988
U
−200 to 400°C
• L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710
N
0 to 1300°C
• U: Cu-CuNi, DIN43710
R
0 to 1700°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
1
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Reference junction compensation
accuracy (when the input terminal
temperature is balanced)
Bandwidth limit
Specifications
K, E, J, T, L, U, N:
R, S, B, W:
Au7Fe:
[Temperature measurement]
±1°C
±1.5°C
±1K
(Digital filter + analog filter)
Select from Full, 30 Hz, 8 Hz, and 2 Hz + 150 Hz secondary
analog filter
[Voltage measurement]
Select from Full, AUTO, 4 kHz, 400 Hz, or 40 Hz.
Cutoff characteristics: −12 dB/OCT (typical value,6 setting other
than AUTO)
Cutoff frequency (fc) when set to AUTO (701262 only)
Sample Rate
100 kS/s or higher
100 kS/s to 50 S/s
50 S/s or less
Cutoff Frequency (fc)
40 kHz
40% of the sample rate
20 Hz
Cutoff characteristics for AUTO: −65 dB at 2 × fc (typical value6)
When the filter is set to Auto, the anti-aliasing filter and low-pass filter are automatically set
according to the sample rate.
Table of cutoff frequency
characteristics of the
anti-aliasing filter (AAF)
Sample Rate
100 kS/s
50 kS/s
20 kS/s
10 kS/s
5 kS/s
2 kS/s
1 kS/s
500 S/s
200 S/s
100 S/s
50 S/s
20 S/s to 5 S/s
2 S/s or less
Ext sample
AAF
40 kHz
20 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
800 Hz
400 Hz
200 Hz
80 Hz
40 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
40 kHz
Low-Pass Filter
OFF
OFF
OFF
4 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 Does not include the reference junction temperature compensation accuracy.
3 This module supports Au7Fe with 0.07% metal content with respect to gold.
H
L
4
5
6. Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-34
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (701265)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Function
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Data update rate
Input format
Measurement range/accuracy1
For the thermocouple
standards, see the 701261
specifications.
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Input connector
Input impedance
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Type
K
E
J
T
L
U
N
R
S
Measurement Range
−200 to 1300°C
−200 to 800°C
−200 to 1100°C
−200 to 400°C
−200 to 900°C
−200 to 400°C
0 to 1300°C
0 to 1700°C
0 to 1700°C
B
0 to 1800°C
W
Au7Fe3
0 to 2300°C
0 to 300K
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
5
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
Except, 0 to 200°C: ±8°C
200 to 800°C: ±5°C
±(0.1% of reading + 2°C)
Except, 400 to 700°C: ±8°C
Effective range is 400 to 1800°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
0 to 50K:
±4K
50 to 300K: ±2.5K
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Index
During voltage input:
2400 LSB/div
When measuring temperature: 0.1°C
0.5 Hz or less
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
120 dB or more (50/60 Hz, with 2-Hz filter ON, signal source
resistance of 500 Ω or less) (typical value6)
±4 µV or ±0.01 div, whichever is greater (typical value6)
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Zero point: ±(0.01% of 10 div)/°C + 0.05µV/°C) (typical value6)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Reference junction compensation K, E, J, T, L, U, N:
±1°C
accuracy (when the input terminal R, S, B, W:
±1.5°C
temperature is balanced)
Au7Fe:
±1K
Bandwidth limit (digital filter)
Select from Full, 30 Hz, 8 Hz, and 2 Hz
IM DL850E-03EN
6
App
DC to 100 Hz
DC to 100 Hz
Both temperature and voltage input:
[Voltage measurement]
4
±(0.1% of reading + 1.5°C)
Except ±(0.2% of reading + 1.5°C) for −200°C to 0°C
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Binding post
Approx. 1 MΩ
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
3
Accuracy
Both temperature and voltage input:
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
[Voltage measurement]
2
Specifications
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Maximum input voltage4
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth5
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical resolution
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Temperature (thermocouple) or voltage measurement (switchable)
[Voltage measurement]
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
TC, DC, and GND
TC:
Temperature (thermocouple) measurement
DC:
Voltage measurement (DC coupling)
500 Hz
Isolated unbalanced
[Voltage measurement]
Voltage sensitivity: 100 μV/div to 10 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
Voltage accuracy:
±(0.08% of 10 div + 2 µV)
[Temperature measurement]2
[Voltage measurement]
[Voltage measurement]
6-35
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Input bias current
Specifications
20 nA or less
The zero point appears to be offset when the input is open due to the effects of bias current
on this module. However, this is not a malfunction.
Connect the input to the object to be measured.
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 Does not include the reference junction temperature compensation accuracy.
3 This module supports Au7Fe with 0.07% metal content with respect to gold.
H
L
4
5
6 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-36
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Temperature, High Precision Voltage Isolation Module (low noise)
(720266)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Function
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Data update rate
Input format
Measurement range/accuracy1
For the thermocouple
standards, see the 701261
specifications.
DC offset setting range
Input connector
Input impedance
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Type
K
E
J
T
L
U
N
R
S
Measurement Range
−200 to 1300°C
−200 to 800°C
−200 to 1100°C
−200 to 400°C
−200 to 900°C
−200 to 400°C
0 to 1300°C
0 to 1700°C
0 to 1700°C
B
0 to 1800°C
W
Au7Fe3
0 to 2300°C
0 to 300K
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
IM DL850E-03EN
6
App
Index
DC to 15 Hz
DC to 15 Hz
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Reference junction compensation K, E, J, T, L, U, N:
accuracy (when the input terminal R, S, B, W:
temperature is balanced)
Au7Fe:
5
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
Except, 0 to 200°C: ±8°C
200 to 800°C: ±5°C
±(0.1% of reading + 2°C)
Except, 400 to 700°C: ±8°C
Effective range is 400 to 1800°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
0 to 50K:
±4K
50 to 300K: ±2.5K
Both temperature and voltage input:
[Voltage measurement]
[Voltage measurement]
4
±(0.1% of reading + 1.5°C)
Except ±(0.2% of reading + 1.5°C) for −200°C to 0°C
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
[Voltage measurement]
3
Accuracy
Both temperature and voltage input:
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
±5 div
Binding post
Approx. 1 MΩ
[Voltage measurement]
[Temperature measurement]
2
Specifications
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Maximum input voltage4
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth5
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical resolution
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Temperature (thermocouple) or voltage measurement (switchable)
[Voltage measurement]
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
TC, DC, and GND
TC:
Temperature (thermocouple) measurement
DC:
Voltage measurement (DC coupling)
125 Hz
Isolated unbalanced
[Voltage measurement]
Voltage sensitivity: 100 μV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
Voltage accuracy:
±(0.08% of 10 div + 2 µV)
[Temperature measurement]2
During voltage input:
2400 LSB/div
When measuring temperature: 0.1°C
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
120 dB or more (50/60 Hz, with 2-Hz filter ON, signal source
resistance of 500 Ω or less) (typical value6)
±4 µV or ±0.01 div, whichever is greater (typical value6)
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Zero point: ±(0.01% of 10 div)/°C + 0.05µV/°C) (typical value6)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
±1°C
±1.5°C
±1K
6-37
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Bandwidth limit
Specifications
Line filter:15 Hz
Cutoff characteristic: -6 dB/OCT(typical value6)
Digital filter: Select from Full, 8 Hz, 1 HZ, and 0.1 Hz
Cutoff characteristic: -24 dB/OCT
20 nA or less
The zero point appears to be offset when the input is open due to the effects of bias current
on this module. However, this is not a malfunction.
Connect the input to the object to be measured.
Input bias current
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 Does not include the reference junction temperature compensation accuracy.
3 This module supports Au7Fe with 0.07% metal content with respect to gold.
H
L
4
5
6 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-38
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Strain Module (NDIS) (701270)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurementrange
Number of input channels
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Auto balance type
Auto balance range
Bridge voltage
Gauge resistance
Gauge factor
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
mV/V range support
Measurement range (FS) and
measurement range
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration and auto balance
−FS to +FS (set using upper and lower limits)
2
100 kS/s
DC bridge (auto balancing), balanced differential input, and isolated
Electronic auto balance
±10000 µSTR (1 gauge method)
Select from 2 V, 5 V, and 10 V.
120 Ω to 1000 Ω (bridge voltage: 2 V)
350 Ω to 1000 Ω (bridge voltage: 2 V, 5 V, and 10 V)
1.90 to 2.20 (set in 0.01 steps)
DC to 20 kHz
2
3
4
5
Supports the strain gauge transducer unit system.
mV/V range = 0.5×(µSTR range/1000)
When using STR range
6
Measurement Range
−500 µSTR to +500 µSTR
−1000 µSTR to +1000 µSTR
−2000 µSTR to +2000 µSTR
−5000 µSTR to +5000 µSTR
−10000 µSTR to +10000 µSTR
−20000 µSTR to +20000 µSTR
Specifications
Measurement Range (FS)
500 µSTR
1000 µSTR
2000 µSTR
5000 µSTR
10000 µSTR
20000 µSTR
App
When using mV/V range
Measurement Range (FS)
0.25 mV/V
0.5 mV/V
1 mV/V
2.5 mV/V
5 mV/V
10 mV/V
DC accuracy1
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Input connector
Common mode rejection ratio
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Function
Standard accessories
Compatible accessories (sold
separately)
IM DL850E-03EN
Measurement Range
−0.25 mV/V to +0.25 mV/V
−0.5 mV/V to +0.5 mV/V
−1 mV/V to +1 mV/V
−2.5 mV/V to +2.5 mV/V
−5 mV/V to +5 mV/V
−10 mV/V to +10 mV/V
±(0.5% of FS + 5 µSTR)
Between Input+ and Input−:
10 V (DC+ACpeak)
Between each terminal and earth ground:
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Index
NDIS connector (Recommended by JSNDI (The Japanese Society for Non-destructive
Inspection)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value2 )
16 bit (4800 LSB/div: Upper = +FS, Lower = −FS)
Zero point:
±5 µSTR/°C (typical value2)
Gain:
±(0.02% of FS)/°C (typical value2)
Select from Full, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, and 10 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value2)
mV/V support. Supports the strain gauge transducer unit system.
NDIS connector (for external connection: PRC03-12A10-7M10.5 by Tajimi) A1002JC: 2 pieces
Recommended bridge head 701955 (NDIS 120 Ω, enhanced shield version, comes with a
5-m cable)
Recommended bridge head 701956 (NDIS 350 Ω, enhanced shield version, comes with a
5-m cable))
6-39
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Precautions
Specifications
•Highly sensitive measurements are made in the µV level in strain measurements.
Therefore, take measures against noise at the strain sensor perimeter, bridge head, and
cable wiring.
•Depending on the noise environment, an error may result in the balance. Check the
influence before making measurements.
• The bridge head specified by YOKOGAWA has high noise resistance.
•Some of the strain gauge sensors and bridge heads made by other manufacturers
do not have sensing wires connected. (No such problems with bridge heads made by
YOKOGAWA.) If such products are used, an error may result in the bridge voltage leading
to measurement errors, because sensing does not work effectively. If possible, it is
desirable that sensing be done very close to the bridge. However, if this is not possible, use
the NDIS conversion cable (DV450-001) that is sold separately by YOKOGAWA.
Outline specifications of the DV450-001:Sensing cable, NDIS male-female, 30 cm in
length, insert it as close to the bridge as possible
• The connector shell is connected to the case potential.
•When a bridge head (701955 or 701956) is used, the connector shell, cable shield, and the
bridge head case are all connected to the case potential of the DL850E/DL850EV.
•When a bridge head (701955 or 701956) is used, the floating GND is connected to the
bridge head case inside the bridge head.
•Be sure to execute balancing again when you change the range or the bridge voltage.
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
Module front View
A
B
C
G
F
E
D
A: Bridge+ (positive bridge voltage)
B: Input- (negative measurement signal)
C: Bridge- (negative bridge voltage)
D: Input+ (positive measurement signal)
E: Floating common
F: Sense+ (positive bridge voltage sensing)
G: Sense- (positive bridge voltage sensing)
The connector shell is connected to the case potential.
6-40
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Strain Module (DSUB, Shunt-Cal) (701271)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurementrange
Number of input channels
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Auto balance type
Auto balance range
Bridge voltage
Gauge resistance
Gauge factor
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
mV/V range support
Measurement range (FS) and
measurement range
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration and auto balance
−FS to +FS (set using upper and lower limits)
2
100 kS/s
DC bridge (auto balancing), balanced differential input, and isolated
Electronic auto balance
±10000 µSTR (1 gauge method)
Select from 2 V, 5 V, and 10 V.
120 Ω to 1000 Ω (bridge voltage: 2 V)
350 Ω to 1000 Ω (bridge voltage: 2 V, 5 V, and 10 V)
1.90 to 2.20 (set in 0.01 steps)
DC to 20 kHz
2
3
4
5
Supports the strain gauge transducer unit system.
mV/V range = 0.5×(µSTR range/1000)
When using STR range
6
Measurement Range
−500 µSTR to +500 µSTR
−1000 µSTR to +1000 µSTR
−2000 µSTR to +2000 µSTR
−5000 µSTR to +5000 µSTR
−10000 µSTR to +10000 µSTR
−20000 µSTR to +20000 µSTR
Specifications
Measurement Range (FS)
500 µSTR
1000 µSTR
2000 µSTR
5000 µSTR
10000 µSTR
20000 µSTR
App
When using mV/V range
Measurement Range (FS)
0.25 mV/V
0.5 mV/V
1 mV/V
2.5 mV/V
5 mV/V
10 mV/V
DC accuracy1
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Input connector
Common mode rejection ratio
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Function
Standard accessories
Compatible accessories (sold
separately)
IM DL850E-03EN
Measurement Range
−0.25 mV/V to +0.25 mV/V
−0.5 mV/V to +0.5 mV/V
−1 mV/V to +1 mV/V
−2.5 mV/V to +2.5 mV/V
−5 mV/V to +5 mV/V
−10 mV/V to +10 mV/V
±(0.5% of FS+5 µSTR)
Between Input+ and Input−:
10 V (DC+ACpeak)
Between each terminal and earth ground:
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Index
9-pin D-Sub connector (female)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value2 )
16 bit (4800 LSB/div: Upper = +FS, Lower = −FS)
Zero point: ±5 µSTR/°C (typical value2)
Gain:
±(0.02% of FS)/°C (typical value2)
Select from Full, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, and 10 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value2)
mV/V support. Supports the strain gauge transducer unit system.
Shunt calibration support. Built-in shunt calibration relay (1 gauge method).
Connector shell set for soldering
A1520JD (9-pin D-Sub): 2 pieces, A1618JD (connector shell): 2 pieces
Recommended bridge head 701957 (D-Sub 120 Ω, shunt-Cal, enhanced shield version,
comes with a 5-m cable)
Recommended bridge head 701958 (D-Sub 350 Ω, shunt-Cal, enhanced shield version,
comes with a 5-m cable)
6-41
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Precautions
Specifications
•Highly sensitive measurements are made in the µV level in strain measurements.
Therefore, take measures against noise at the strain sensor perimeter, bridge head, and
cable wiring.
•Depending on the noise environment, an error may result in the balance. Check the
influence before making measurements.
• The bridge head specified by YOKOGAWA has high noise resistance.
•When executing shunt calibration, be sure to calculate the shunt resistance in advance,
and execute it in a range so that the measured values do not exceed the range even
when the shunt resistance is ON.
•Some of the strain gauge sensors and bridge heads made by other manufacturers
do not have sensing wires connected. (No such problems with bridge heads made by
YOKOGAWA.) If such products are used, an error may result in the bridge voltage leading
to measurement errors, because sensing does not work effectively. Perform sensing as
close to the bridge head as possible. (There is no conversion cable for sensing on D-Sub
connector types.)
• The connector shell is connected to the case potential.
•When a bridge head (701957 or 701958) is used, the connector shell, cable shield, and
the bridge head case are all connected to the case potential of the DL850E/DL850EV.
•When a bridge head (701957 or 701958) is used, the floating GND is connected to the
bridge head case inside the bridge head.
• Be sure to execute balancing again when you change the range or the bridge voltage.
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
Module front View
5
4
9
6-42
3
8
2
7
1
6
1: Floating common
2: Sense- (positive bridge voltage sensing)
3: Shuntcal- (negative shunt signal)
4: Shuntcal+ (positive shunt signal)
5: Sense+ (positive bridge voltage sensing)
6: Bridge- (negative bridge voltage)
7: Input- (negative measurement signal)
8: Input+ (positive measurement signal)
9: Bridge+ (positive bridge voltage)
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Acceleration/Voltage Module (with AAF) (701275)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
Compatible probes/cables
Sensor supply current (voltage)
Applicable acceleration sensor
IM DL850E-03EN
2
3
4
5 mV/div to 10 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Acceleration (±5 V = ×1 range): ×0.1 to ×1 to ×100 (in 1-2-5 steps)
42 V (DC+Acpeak)2
5
Working voltage of safety standard
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)3
Waveform measurement mode DC accuracy:
±(0.25% of 10 div)
Acceleration measurement mode:
±(0.5% of 10 div) at 1 kHz
BNC connector (metalic type)
1 MΩ±1%, approx. 35 pF
0.4 Hz or less (0.04 Hz or less when using the 701940) (typical value4)
6
Specifications
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, GND, ACCL (acceleration), and GND
100 kS/s
Isolated unbalanced
Waveform observation mode:
DC to 40 kHz
Acceleration measurement mode:
0.4 Hz to 40 kHz
App
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value4)
±100 µV or ±0.01 div, whichever is greater (typical value4)
16 bits (2400LSB/div)
When in waveform measurement mode (excluding AUTO filter)
Zero point: ±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Select from Full, Auto, 4 kHz, 400 Hz, and 40 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value4, excluding AUTO)
Cutoff frequency (fc) when set to AUTO
Sample rate of 100 kHz or higher:
fc = 40 kHz
Sample rate of 100 Hz to 50 kHz:
fc = 40% of the sampling rate
Sample rate of 50 Hz or less:
fc = 20 Hz
Cutoff characteristics when set to AUTO: −65 dB at 2×fc (typical value4)
Voltage probe 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, or 1000:1
Current probe 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A:1 V (for the 701930/701931)
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip × 2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
Voltage probe (10:1 passive probe)
701940 17 to 46 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
Clamp-on probe
720930 (50 A), 720931 (200 A)
OFF/4 mA ± 10% (approx. 22 VDC)
Built-in amplifier type
Kistler Instrument Corporation: Piezotron, PCB Piezotronics Incorporated: ICP, ENDEVCO
Corporation: ISOTRON, etc.
6-43
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Table of Cutoff Frequency
Characteristics of the AntiAliasing Filter (AAF)
Specifications
When the filter is set to Auto, the anti-aliasing filter and low-pass filter are automatically set
according to the sample rate.
Sample Rate
100 kS/s
50 kS/s
20 kS/s
10 kS/s
5 kS/s
2 kS/s
1 kS/s
500 S/s
200 S/s
100 S/s
50 S/s
20 S/s to 5 S/s
2 S/s or less
Ext sample
AAF
40 kHz
20 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
800 Hz
400 Hz
200 Hz
80 Hz
40 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
20 Hz
40 kHz
Low-pass filter
OFF
OFF
OFF
4 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 10:1 passive probe
(701940)
Direct input (cable that does not comply
with the safety standards)
H
H
BNC
2
L
3
2
L
3
4 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-44
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Frequency Module (701281)
Item
Standard operating conditions
IM DL850E-03EN
6-45
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Measurement function
Frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, duty cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse
integration, and velocity
Effective measurement range
20 div (display range: 10 div)
Number of input channels
2
Data update rate
1 MHz (1 µs)
Output delay time
Approx. 3 µs
Input format
Isolated unbalanced
Input connector
BNC connector (isolated type)
Maximum input voltage
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
420 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):4
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Working voltage of safety standard
Between input and case
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):3
Between each input
300 Vrms (CAT II)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):5
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Withstand voltage
2300 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
Insulation resistance
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
Minimum measurement resolution 625 ps
Measured data resolution
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Measurement accuracy1
• When in frequency, RPM, RPS, or velocity measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input frequency
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input frequency)
[Accuracy dependent on the input frequency]
When input frequency is 2 kHz or less:
0.05% of the input frequency + 0.001 Hz
Input frequency of 2 kHz to 50 kHz:
0.05% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 50 kHz to 100 kHz:
0.1% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 100 kHz to 200 kHz:
0.2% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 200 kHz to higher:
0.5% of the input frequency
• When in power supply frequency mode7
When the center frequency is 50/60 Hz:
±0.03 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
When the center frequency is 400 Hz:
±0.3 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
(Input set to AC100 V or AC200 V with sine wave input)
• When in period measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input period
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input period)
[Accuracy dependent on the input period]
Input period of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input period
Input period of 20 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input period + 0.1 µs
Input period of 10 µs to 20 µs:
0.2% of the input period + 0.1 µs
Input period of 10 µs or less:
0.5% of the input period + 0.1 µs
• When in duty cycle measurement mode8
Dependent on the input frequency
Input frequency of 50 kHz or less:
±0.1%
Input frequency of 50 kHz to 100 kHz:
±0.2%
Input frequency of 100 kHz to 200 kHz:
±0.5%
Input frequency of 200 kHz to 500 kHz:
±1.0%
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Input voltage range (±FS)
Input impedance
Input coupling settings
Probe attenuation setting
Minimum voltage width for pulse
detection
Bandwidth limit
Threshold
Hysteresis
Preset function
Slope selection
Lower −3 dB point when AC
coupled
Chatter elimination function
Input status indication function
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
• When in pulse width measurement mode8
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input pulse width
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input pulse width)
[Accuracy dependent on the input pulse width]
Input pulse width of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input pulse width
Input pulse width of 20 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
Input pulse width of 10 µs to 20 µs:
0.2% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
Input pulse width of 10 µs or less:
0.5% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
When using 1:1 probe attenuation:
±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±20 V, ±50 V (±FS)
1 MΩ ± 1 approx. 35 pF
Pull-up function:
10 kΩ, approx. 5 V (pull-up can be turned ON only when the input
is set to Pull-up 5 V)
AC, DC
10:1, 1:1
200 mVP-P
Select from Full, 100 kHz, 10 kHz, 1 kHz, and 100 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value9)
Set within the FS of the voltage range. Set in units of 1% of the FS.
Select ±1%, ±2.5%, or ±5% of the FS of the voltage range
Logic (5 V/3 V/12 V/24 V), electromagnetic pickup, zero crossing, pull-up, AC100 V, AC200 V,
and user-defined
Select rising or falling
0.5 Hz or less (0.05 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.005 Hz or less when
using the 701947) (typical value9)
OFF or 1 to 1000 ms (1 ms resolution)
Eliminates the chatter that occurs such when the contact input is turned ON/OFF.
Can discard the signal changes over the specified interval.
Input status indication through the LEDs of each channel function
When in operation:
Illuminates in green when pulse input is detected
When overdriven:
Illuminates in red when the input voltage exceeds the range
Connection cable (1:1): Recommended 1
366926
Voltage probe: Recommended 2
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
700929
702902
701947
6
7
8
9
6-46
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) or
direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
H
2
BNC
L
3
4
L
5
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 1 µs (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 90 Vrms, sine wave (input range: AC100 V, bandwidth limit 100 kHz, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 5 ns (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Specifications by Measurement Modes
Item
Frequency
Measurable frequency range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
RPMs
Measurable RPMs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable pulse/rotate range
RPSs
Measurable RPSs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Center frequency setting
Minimum resolution
Pulse width
Measurable pulse width
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Pulse integration
Maximum pulse count
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Frequency measuring range
Computation function
Selectable Unit/Pulse range
Counter reset
Velocity
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable Distance/Pulse range
IM DL850E-03EN
0.01 Hz to 500 kHz
0.1 Hz/div to 100 kHz/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.001 Hz
2
0.01 rpm to 100000 rpm (where the input frequency is DC to 500 kHz).
0.1 rpm/div to 10 krpm/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPMs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value) × 60
1 to 99999
3
4
0.001 rps to 2000 rps (where the input frequency is DC to 500 kHz).
0.01 rps/div to 200 rps/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPSs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value)
1 to 99999
5
2 µs to 50 s (where the minimum pulse width is 1 µs)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 µs
6
0 to 100%
1 %/div to 20 %/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz
Select positive or negative pulse
0.1 µs
Specifications
Selectable pulse/rotate range
Period
Measurable period range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
Duty cycle
Measurable duty cycle range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurable frequency range
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Power supply frequency
Measurable frequency range
Specifications
App
30 Hz to 70 Hz (when the center frequency is 50 Hz), 40 Hz to 80 Hz (when the center
frequency is 60 Hz), 380 Hz to 420 Hz (when the center frequency is 400 Hz)
0.1 Hz/div to 2 Hz/div (0.01 Hz resolution)
Select 50 Hz, 60 Hz, or 400 Hz
0.01 Hz
1 µs to 50 s (where the input frequency is up to 500 kHz)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
Select positive or negative pulse
0.1 µs
2×109 pulses
500.0E+18 value/div to 10.00E−21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz (where the minimum pulse width is 1 µs)
Set the physical amount per pulse and display by converting the values intophysical
values such as distance and flow rate.
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
Manual reset and over-limit reset
500.0E+18 value/div to 10.00E−21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
Set the amount of displacement per pulse and compute the velocity from the frequency
Automatic unit time conversion of s, min, and hour.
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
6-47
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Functional Specifications
Item
Deceleration prediction
Stop prediction
Smoothing
Pulse average
Offset function
6-48
Specifications
Computes the deceleration condition in realtime when the pulse input is cut off.
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Sets the frequency to 0 after a certain time elapses after the pulse input is cut off.
Stop interval setting: Set in the range of 1.5 to 10 times (10 settings) the period of the
pulse measured last
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Computes the moving average of the measured data using the specified time
Specified time: 0.1 to 1000 ms (0.1 ms resolution)
Can be specified on all measurement parameters
Performs frequency measurement per specified number of pulses. When fluctuation
exists periodically in the pulse interval, the fluctuation can be eliminated.
Specified number of pulses: 1 to 4096
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, power supply frequency,
period, pulse integration, and velocity
Observe fluctuation with respect to the offset frequency
Offset range: Can be set up to 1000 times the maximum div value
• Frequency:
0 Hz to 500 kHz
• RPMs:
0 rpm to 50 krpm
• RPSs:
0 rps to 1000 rps
• Period:
0 s to 50 s
• Duty cycle:
0% to 100%
• Pulse width:
0 s to 50 s
• Pulse integration:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
• Velocity:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Frequency Module (720281)
Item
Standard operating conditions
IM DL850E-03EN
6-49
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Measurement function
Frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, duty cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse
integration, and velocity
Effective measurement range
20 div (display range: 10 div)
Number of input channels
2
Data update rate
1 MHz (1 µs)
Output delay time
Approx. 3 µs
Input format
Isolated unbalanced
Input connector
BNC connector (isolated type)
Maximum input voltage
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
420 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):4
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Working voltage of safety standard
Between input and case
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):3
Between each input
400 Vrms (CAT II)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):5
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Withstand voltage
2300 VACrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
Insulation resistance
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
Minimum measurement resolution 625 ps
Measured data resolution
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Measurement accuracy1
• When in frequency, RPM, RPS, or velocity measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input frequency
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input frequency)
[Accuracy dependent on the input frequency]
When input frequency is 2 kHz or less:
0.05% of the input frequency + 0.001 Hz
Input frequency of 2 kHz to 50 kHz:
0.05% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 50 kHz to 100 kHz:
0.1% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 100 kHz to 200 kHz:
0.2% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 200 kHz to higher:
0.5% of the input frequency
• When in power supply frequency mode7
When the center frequency is 50/60 Hz:
±0.03 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
When the center frequency is 400 Hz:
±0.3 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
(Input set to AC100 V or AC200 V with sine wave input)
• When in period measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input period
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input period)
[Accuracy dependent on the input period]
Input period of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input period
Input period of 20 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input period + 0.1 µs
Input period of 10 µs to 20 µs:
0.2% of the input period + 0.1 µs
Input period of 10 µs or less:
0.5% of the input period + 0.1 µs
• When in duty cycle measurement mode8
Dependent on the input frequency
Input frequency of 50 kHz or less:
±0.1%
Input frequency of 50 kHz to 100 kHz:
±0.2%
Input frequency of 100 kHz to 200 kHz:
±0.5%
Input frequency of 200 kHz to 500 kHz:
±1.0%
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Input voltage range (±FS)
Input impedance
Input coupling settings
Probe attenuation setting
Minimum voltage width for pulse
detection
Bandwidth limit
Threshold
Hysteresis
Preset function
Slope selection
Lower −3 dB point when AC
coupled
Chatter elimination function
Input status indication function
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
• When in pulse width measurement mode8
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input pulse width
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input pulse width)
[Accuracy dependent on the input pulse width]
Input pulse width of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input pulse width
Input pulse width of 20 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
Input pulse width of 10 µs to 20 µs:
0.2% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
Input pulse width of 10 µs or less:
0.5% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
When using 10:1 probe attenuation
±10 V, ±20 V, ±50 V, ±100 V, ±200 V, ±500 V
(combined with the 700929):
(±FS)
1 MΩ ± 1 approx. 35 pF
Pull-up function:
10 kΩ, approx. 5 V (pull-up can be turned ON only when the input
is set to Pull-up 5 V)
AC, DC
10:1, 1:1
200 mVP-P
Select from Full, 100 kHz, 10 kHz, 1 kHz, and 100 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (typical value9)
Set within the FS of the voltage range. Set in units of 1% of the FS.
Select ±1%, ±2.5%, or ±5% of the FS of the voltage range
Logic (5 V/3 V/12 V/24 V), electromagnetic pickup, zero crossing, pull-up, AC100 V, AC200 V,
and user-defined
Select rising or falling
0.5 Hz or less (0.05 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.005 Hz or less when
using the 701947) (typical value9)
OFF or 1 to 1000 ms (1 ms resolution)
Eliminates the chatter that occurs such when the contact input is turned ON/OFF.
Can discard the signal changes over the specified interval.
Input status indication through the LEDs of each channel function
When in operation:
Illuminates in green when pulse input is detected
When overdriven:
Illuminates in red when the input voltage exceeds the range
Connection cable (1:1): Recommended 1
366926
Voltage probe: Recommended 2
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
700929
702902
701947
6
7
8
9
6-50
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) or
direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
H
2
BNC
L
3
4
L
5
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 1 µs (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 90 Vrms, sine wave (input range: AC100 V, bandwidth limit 100 kHz, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 5 ns (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
Specifications by Measurement Modes
Item
Frequency
Measurable frequency range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
RPMs
Measurable RPMs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable pulse/rotate range
RPSs
Measurable RPSs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Center frequency setting
Minimum resolution
Pulse width
Measurable pulse width
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Pulse integration
Maximum pulse count
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Frequency measuring range
Computation function
Selectable Unit/Pulse range
Counter reset
Velocity
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable Distance/Pulse range
IM DL850E-03EN
0.01 Hz to 500 kHz
0.1 Hz/div to 100 kHz/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.001 Hz
2
0.01 rpm to 100000 rpm (where the input frequency is DC to 500 kHz).
0.1 rpm/div to 10 krpm/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPMs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value) × 60
1 to 99999
3
4
0.001 rps to 2000 rps (where the input frequency is DC to 500 kHz).
0.01 rps/div to 200 rps/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPSs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value)
1 to 99999
5
2 µs to 50 s (where the minimum pulse width is 1 µs)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 µs
6
0 to 100%
1 %/div to 20 %/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz
Select positive or negative pulse
0.1 µs
Specifications
Selectable pulse/rotate range
Period
Measurable period range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
Duty cycle
Measurable duty cycle range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurable frequency range
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Power supply frequency
Measurable frequency range
Specifications
App
30 Hz to 70 Hz (when the center frequency is 50 Hz), 40 Hz to 80 Hz (when the center
frequency is 60 Hz), 380 Hz to 420 Hz (when the center frequency is 400 Hz)
0.1 Hz/div to 2 Hz/div (0.01 Hz resolution)
Select 50 Hz, 60 Hz, or 400 Hz
0.01 Hz
1 µs to 50 s (where the input frequency is up to 500 kHz)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
Select positive or negative pulse
0.1 µs
2×109 pulses
500.0E+18 value/div to 10.00E−21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
0.1 Hz to 500 kHz (where the minimum pulse width is 1 µs)
Set the physical amount per pulse and display by converting the values intophysical
values such as distance and flow rate.
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
Manual reset and over-limit reset
500.0E+18 value/div to 10.00E−21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
Set the amount of displacement per pulse and compute the velocity from the frequency
Automatic unit time conversion of s, min, and hour.
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
6-51
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Functional Specifications
Item
Deceleration prediction
Stop prediction
Smoothing
Pulse average
Offset function
6-52
Specifications
Computes the deceleration condition in realtime when the pulse input is cut off.
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Sets the frequency to 0 after a certain time elapses after the pulse input is cut off.
Stop interval setting: Set in the range of 1.5 to 10 times (10 settings) the period of the
pulse measured last
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Computes the moving average of the measured data using the specified time
Specified time: 0.1 to 1000 ms (0.1 ms resolution)
Can be specified on all measurement parameters
Performs frequency measurement per specified number of pulses. When fluctuation
exists periodically in the pulse interval, the fluctuation can be eliminated.
Specified number of pulses: 1 to 4096
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, power supply frequency,
period, pulse integration, and velocity
Observe fluctuation with respect to the offset frequency
Offset range: Can be set up to 1000 times the maximum div value
• Frequency:
0 Hz to 500 kHz
• RPMs:
0 rpm to 50 krpm
• RPSs:
0 rps to 1000 rps
• Period:
0 s to 50 s
• Duty cycle:
0% to 100%
• Pulse width:
0 s to 50 s
• Pulse integration:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
• Velocity:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module (720210 and 720211)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
2
3
4
10 mV/div to 20 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
1000 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):4
200 V (DC+ACpeak)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):6
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
In combination with 700929 (10:1)/702902 (10:1)/701947 (100:1),3 or in combination with
701901+701954 (1:1):5
1000 Vrms (CAT II)
Combined with the 702902 (10:1):3
1000 V (DC+ACpeak)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):7
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
10 mV/div to 20 V/div: ±(0.5% of 10 div)
5
6
Specifications
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, and GND
100 MS/s
Isolated unbalanced
DC to 20 MHz
App
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
10 Hz or less (1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.1 Hz or less when using the
700929)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value8)
±1.1 mV or ±0.15 /div whichever is greater (typical value8)
5400 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
12 bit (150 LSB/div)
Zero point:
10 mV/div to 20 V/div: ±(0.1% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Gain:
±(0.05% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Select from Full and 2 MHz
Cut-off characteristics: −12 dB/OCT (typical value8)
Cutoff frequency:
1.28 MHz, 640 kHz, 320 kHz, 160 kHz, 80 kHz, 40 kHZ, 20 kHz, 10 kHz
Filter format:
IIR
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
IM DL850E-03EN
6-53
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
H
700929
702902
701947
2
L
Combined with the 701901 + 701954
701901
H
701954 4
3
L
5
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
BNC
6
L
7
8 Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
Note
You can install up to four 720210 modules, and these modules must be installed in the top slots.
6-54
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
16-CH Voltage Input Module (720220)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Bandwidth limit
Wiring
2
3
4
0.2 V/div to 2 V/div (in 1-2-5 steps)
±20 V
Direct input:
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
5
The Working Voltage in the safety standards
Direct input:
42 V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
6
± (0.3% of 10 div)
Spring terminal blocks. Each 8-channel unit is removable.
1 MΩ ± 1%
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value4)
±0.05 div
16 bits, 2400 LSB/div
Zero point:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value4)
Can be set to Full or 500 Hz on each sub channel
Recommended: 0.20 mm2 to 1.00 mm2. AWG size: 24-18.
Specifications
Effective measurement range
Number of input sub channels
Input coupling settings
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave with
an amplitude of ±3 div is applied)
Selectable voltage sensitivity range
Max. measurement voltage range
Maximum input voltage2
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth3
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
DC vertical-axis (voltage-axis) accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level (input section shorted)
A/D converter resolution
Temperature coefficient
Specifications
Ambient temperature:23 ± 5°C
Ambient humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After the DL850E/DL850EV has been warmed up for 30 minutes and then
calibration has been performed
20 div (display range: 10 div)
16
DC, GND, and OFF
200 kS/s for a single channel, 16 ch × 10 kS/s
All isolated unbalanced
DC to 5 kHz
App
Index
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
H
L
2
3
4 Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
6-55
6.13 Module Specifications
16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module (720221)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Function
Effective measurement range
Number of input sub channels
Input coupling
Data update period
Input format
Measurement range/accuracy1
For the thermocouple
standards, see the 701261
specifications.
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Temperature (thermocouple) or voltage measurement (DC coupling)
[Voltage measurement]
20 div (display range: 10 div)
16
TC, DC, OFF, and GND
TC:
Temperature (thermocouple) measurement
DC:
Voltage measurement (DC coupling)
Can be set separately for each sub channel
100 ms, 300 ms, 1 s, 3 s
Isolated unbalanced
[Voltage measurement]
Voltage sensitivity:
1 mV/div to 2 V/div (1-2-5 steps)
Voltage accuracy:
±(0.15% of 10 div)
[Temperature measurement]2
Type
K
E
J
T
L
U
N
R
S
Measurement Range
−200 to 1300°C
−200 to 800°C
−200 to 1100°C
−200 to 400°C
−200 to 900°C
−200 to 400°C
0 to 1300°C
0 to 1700°C
0 to 1700°C
B
0 to 1800°C
W
Au7Fe3
0 to 2300°C
0 to 300K
Accuracy
±(0.1% of reading + 1.5°C)
Except ±(0.2% of reading + 1.5°C) for −200°C to 0°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
Except, 0 to 200°C: ±8°C
200 to 800°C: ±5°C
±(0.1% of reading + 2°C)
Except, 400 to 700°C: ±8°C
Effective range is 400 to 1800°C
±(0.1% of reading + 3°C)
0 to 50K:
±4K
50 to 300K: ±2.5K
Maximum input voltage4
Both temperature and voltage input:
42 V (DC + ACpeak)
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth5 Both temperature and voltage input:
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical resolution
[Voltage measurement]
During voltage input:
2400 LSB/div
[Temperature measurement] When measuring temperature:
0.1°C
Common mode rejection ratio
[Voltage measurement]
100 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
[Temperature measurement] 140 dB or more (50/60 Hz, with data update period = 3
seconds) (typical value6)
6
Residual noise level
±0.01 div (typical value )
(Input section shorted)
A/D conversion resolution
[Voltage measurement]
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
Temperature coefficient
Zero point:
±(0.025% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Gain:
±(0.01% of 10 div)/°C (typical value6)
Reference junction compensation K, E, J, T, L, U, N:
±1°C
accuracy (when the input terminal R, S, B, W:
±1.5°C
temperature is balanced)
Au7Fe:
±1K
Bandwidth limit (typical value6)
Data update period:
100 ms: 600 Hz
(−3 dB point)
300 ms: 200 Hz
1 s: 50 Hz
3 s: 10 Hz
Input connector
Screw type
Input impedance
Approx. 1 MΩ
Interference between sub
100 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value6)
channels:
External scanner box
Model number: 701953, built-in reference junction
Length of included cable: 1 m, 3 m (selectable)
6-56
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
2 Does not include the reference junction temperature compensation accuracy.
3 This module supports Au7Fe with 0.07% metal content with respect to gold.
1
+
2
−
4
5
6 Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
3
4
5
6
Specifications
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
6-57
6.13 Module Specifications
Logic Input Module (720230)
Item
Standard operating
conditions
Number of input ports
Number of input bits
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Compatible probes
Chatter suppression time
settings
6-58
Specifications
Ambient temperature: 23 ± 5°C
Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH
2
8 bits per port
10 MS/s
Use a non-isolated, dedicated probe (automatic detection)
700986 (non-isolated 8-bit input)
700987 (isolated 8-bit input)
702911 (non-isolated 8-bit input)
702912 (non-isolated 8-bit input)
Off, 5 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, and 100 ms
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
CAN Bus Monitor Module (720240)
Item
Standard operating
condition
Number of input ports
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Maximum input voltage
Maximum rated voltage to
earth
Between input and case
Between each input
Input connector
Terminator
Supported protocol
Supported bit rates1
2
3
D-sub 9 pin (male)
Internal, can be enabled or disabled for each port
Physical layer: ISO-11898 (High Speed Communication)
10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps, 66.7 kbps, 83.3 kbps, 100 kbps, 125 kbps,
250 kbps, 500 kbps, 800 kbps, 1 Mbps
Illuminates to indicate that the terminator is enabled
60 sub channels/ports
Frames can be output in single shots
110 to 130 Ω
4
5
6
16 bits, 2400 LSB/div
Specifications
LED display
Number of sub channels
One shot output
Terminator resistance
(when the terminator is
enabled)
A/D converter resolution
(when Value Type is set to
Float)
Specifications
Ambient temperature: 23±5°C
Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH
2
100 kS/s
Isolated unbalanced
–3 to +10 V (between CAN_H and GND or CAN_L and GND)
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
App
1Low-speed CAN at low-speed transceiver levels is not supported.
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
6-59
6.13 Module Specifications
CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module (720241)
Item
Standard operating
condition
Number of input ports
Maximum sample rate
Input format
CAN port
Item
Maximum input voltage
Maximum rated voltage to
earth
Between input and case
Between each input
Input connector
Terminator
Terminator resistance
(when the terminator is
enabled)
LED display
Supported protocol
Supported bit rates1
Supported data length
Number of sub channels
One shot output
A/D converter resolution
(when Value Type is set to
Float)
Specifications
Ambient temperature: 23±5°C
Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH
CAN port: 1. LIN port: 1.
100 kS/s
Isolated unbalanced
Specifications
–3 to +10 V (between CAN_H and GND or CAN_L and GND)
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
D-sub 9 pin (male)
Internal, can be enabled or disabled
110 to 130 Ω
Illuminates to indicate that the terminator is enabled
Physical layer: ISO-11898 (High Speed Communication)
10 kbps, 20 kbps, 33.3 kbps, 50 kbps, 62.5 kbps, 66.7 kbps, 83.3 kbps, 100 kbps, 125 kbps,
250 kbps, 500 kbps, 800 kbps, 1 Mbps
4 bytes maximum
60 sub channels
Frames can be output in single shots
16 bits, 2400 LSB/div
1Low-speed CAN at low-speed transceiver levels is not supported.
LIN port
Item
Maximum input voltage
Maximum rated voltage to
earth
Between input and case
Between each input
Input connector
Supported protocol
Supported bit rates
Supported data length
Number of sub channels
Supported check sums
6-60
Specifications
–0.3 to +18 V (between LIN.VBAT and GND)
30 Vrms (CAT I and II)
D-sub 9 pin (male)
Physical layer: Complies with ISO9141
2400 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps
4 bytes maximum
60 sub channels
Standard check sum, extended check sum
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
1
SENT Monitor Module (720243)
Item
Standard operating
condition
Number of input ports
Maximum data update rate
Input format
Input connector
Input impedance
Supported protocol
Supported clock tick span
Supported number of nibbles
Number of analysis sub
channels
Fast channel analysis
function
Low level input voltage
High level input voltage
Maximum input voltage
Probe attenuation setting
Compatible probes/cables
1
2
3
4
5
1.5 V (typical value1)
3.5 V (typical value1)
Combined with the 700929 (10:1) or 702902 (10:1):2
420 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with the
safety standards):4
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
2300 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
Input status indication through the LEDs of each port function
When in operation:
Illuminates in green when pulse input is detected
When overdriven:
Illuminates in red when the input voltage exceeds 20 V
10:1, 1:1
Voltage probe: Recommended
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1)
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type)
red/black 2-piece set) is required separately
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2)
Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
Combined with the 700929 or 702902
700929
702902
IM DL850E-03EN
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) or
direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
H
BNC
2
L
3
4
L
5
6-61
6
Specifications
Maximum rated voltage to
earth
Between input and case
Between each input
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
Input status indication
function
pecifications
Ambient temperature: 23±5°
Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH
2
100 kS/s (10 µs)
Isolated unbalanced
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ±1%, approx. 35 pF
SAE J2716
1 µs to 100 µs
Resolution: 0.01 µs
1 to 8
8 channels total including fast channels and slow channels
Fast channel
Up to 8
Slow channel
Up to 5
Status & communication
1 ch (4 bit)
Error trigger
1 ch (5 bit)
Error count
1 ch
Handles fast channel multiplexing
App
Index
6.13 Module Specifications
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (720254)
Item
Standard operating conditions
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine wave
of amplitude ±3 div is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Vertical (voltage) axis accuracy
DC accuracy1
Input connector
Input impedance
−3 dB point when AC coupled
low frequency attenuation point
Common mode rejection ratio
Residual noise level
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
Insulation resistance
A/D conversion resolution
Temperature coefficient
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
6-62
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
4
AC, DC, and GND
1 MS/s
Isolated unbalanced
DC to 300 kHz
10 mV/div to 50 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
600 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):4
200 V (DC+ACpeak) (as a value that meets the safety standard)
400 V (DC + ACpeak) (maximum allowable voltage, as a value that does not damage the
instrument when applied)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):6
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
In combination with 700929 (10:1)/702902 (10:1)/701947 (100:1),3 or in combination with
701901+701954 (1:1)5
400 Vrms (measurement category Other (O)), 300 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards):7
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
±(0.25% of 10 div)
BNC connector (isolated type)
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
1 Hz or less (0.1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.01 Hz or less when using
the 701947)
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (typical value8)
±0.05 div (typical value8)
10 mV/div, 20 mV/div
±0.025 div (typical value8)
50 mV/div to 20 V/div
2300 Vrms for 2 seconds (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
16 bit (2400 LSB/div)
Zero point:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (typical value8)
Select from Full and 40 kHz
Cut-off characteristics: −12 dB/OCT (typical value8)
Digital filter
Cutoff frequency:
12.8 kHz, 6.4 kHz, 3.2 kHz, 1.6 kHz, 800 Hz, 400 Hz, 200 Hz,
100 Hz, 50 Hz, 25 Hz, 12.5 Hz, 6.25 Hz
Filter format:
IIR
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
IM DL850E-03EN
6.13 Module Specifications
Item
Compatible probes/cables
Specifications
Voltage probe: Recommended
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF: For measuring 600 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV. Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
High voltage differential probe (connect the GND cable provided with the probe to the
DL850E/DL850EV case)
700924 (1000:1, 100:1/1400 V (DC+ACpeak)): For measuring 1400 V (DC+ACpeak) or
less
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1)
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2: For measuring 200 V
(DC+ACpeak) or less), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type) red/black 2-piece set) is
required separately
Connection cable (for low voltage 1:1)
366926 (non-isolated type BNC-alligator clip ×2: For measuring low voltage less than or
equal to 42 V (DC+ACpeak))
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
H
700929
702902
701947
2
L
3
L
Specifications
L
App
Index
7
8 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
4
6
5
H
6
3
H
701954 4
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
BNC
2
5
Combined with the 701901+701954
701901
1
6-63
6.14 Logic Probe Specifications
High-Speed Logic Probe (700986)
Item
Number of inputs
Input format
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz or less)
Response time
Input impedance
Threshold level
Specifications
8
Non-isolated (all the bits share the same ground with the DL850E/DL850EV and each other)
42V (DC + ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms), between the probe tip and ground
Within 1 μs (typical value1)
100 kΩ or more
Approx. 1.4 V
1 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
Isolated Logic Probe (700987)
Item
Number of inputs
Input format
Input connector
Input switching
Input signal display
Applicable input range
Specifications
8
Isolated (all bits are isolated)
Safety terminal type (for banana plug) × 8
Each bit can be switched to AC or DC input.
The H/L state of each bit is indicated with LEDs (the LEDs illuminate to indicate H).
During DC input: H/L detection of 10 VDC to 250 VDC
During AC input: H/L detection of 80 VAC to 250 VAC at 50/60 Hz
Threshold level
During DC input: 6 V ± 50% (High level: 10 to 250 VDC, Low level: 0 to 3 VDC)
During AC input: 50 VAC ± 50% (High level: 80 to 250 VAC, Low level: 0 to 20 VAC)
Response time
During DC input: 1 ms (typical value1)
During AC input: 20 ms (typical value1)
Input impedance
Approx. 100 kΩ
Maximum input voltage
250 Vrms2 (CAT II) (between the H and L terminals of each bit)
Maximum rated voltage to earth 250 Vrms2 (CAT II) (between input terminal H or L and the ground)
Between input and case
Between each input
Maximum allowable voltage
250 Vrms2 (CAT II)
between bits
Withstand voltage
2000 VAC for 1 minute (between the input terminals and the ground)
Insulation resistance
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or greater (between the input terminals and the ground)
Fuse3
Location:
H side of input terminal
Max. rated voltage:
250 V
Max. rated current:
50 mA
Type:
Time lag
Standard:
VDE/SEMKO approved
1 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
2Make sure that the peak AC voltage does not exceed 350 V and that the DC voltage does not exceed 250 V when the
frequency is 1 kHz or less.
3Because the fuses used by this instrument are all inside the case, you cannot replace them yourself. If you believe that the
fuse inside the case has blown, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Logic Probe (702911 and 702912)
Item
Number of inputs
Input format
Maximum input voltage
Response time
Input impedance
Threshold level
Input methods
Specifications
8
Non-isolated (all the bits share the same ground with the DL850E/DL850EV and each other)
±35 V
Within 3 μs (typical value1)
10 kΩ or more
Approx. 1.4 V
TTL level or contact input (switchable). During contact input: Pulled up to 5 V
1 The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
6-64
IM DL850E-03EN
6.14 Logic Probe Specifications
Note
Before using logic probes (702911, 702912) or isolated logic probe 700987, flip the attenuation switch back
and forth several times. The switch’s electrical contacts can weaken if not used for long periods of time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
App
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
6-65
6.15 16-CH Scanner Box Specifications
For the specifications other than the dimensions of the 16-CH Scanner Box, see the 16-CH
temperature/voltage input module (720221) specifications.
External Dimensions
Unit: mm
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±3% (however, tolerances are ±0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
16-CH Scanner Box
21
35
74
148
Attaching plate
177
70
3.5
Φ3.5
164.5
5
6
6-66
IM DL850E-03EN
6.16 External Dimensions
1
DL850E/DL850EV
Unit: mm
Unless otherwise specified, tolerances are ±3% (however, tolerances are ±0.3 mm when below 10 mm).
2
3
4
5
Rear view
6
Specifications
App
8
259
Index
16.5
355
11
11.7
180
23
DC Power Model
11.7
IM DL850E-03EN
202
8
6-67
Appendix
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis
Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module Is Installed
When the Record Length Is 1 kpoint, 2.5 kpoint, 5 kpoint, 10 kpoint, or 25 kpoint
100 ns
200 ns
500 ns
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
Display
Record
Length
2.5 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 kpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
100
200
500
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
200
500
1k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
50
20
20
20
10
10
10
5
1k
600
800
1k
600
800
1k
1k
100
50
50
50
20
20
20
10
5
2k
1.5 k
2k
2.5 k
1.2 k
1.6 k
2k
2k
1.5 k
200
100
100
100
50
50
50
20
10
5
4k
3k
4k
5k
3k
4k
5k
4k
3k
3k
500
200
200
200
100
100
100
50
20
10
5
5
10 k
6k
8k
10 k
6k
8k
10 k
10 k
6k
6k
6k
9k
(Points)
(Points)
(Points)
(Points)
25 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
100 M
100
100 M
200
100 M
500
100 M
1k
100 M
2k
100 M
5k
100 M
10 k
100 M
20 k
50 M
25 k
20 M
20 k
10 M
20 k
5M
25 k
2M
20 k
1M
20 k
500 k
25 k
200 k
20 k
100 k
20 k
50 k
25 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
20 k
5k
25 k
2k
20 k
1k
500
500
500
200
200
200
100
50
20
20
10
10
5
5
5
20 k
15 k
20 k
25 k
12 k
16 k
20 k
20 k
15 k
12 k
24 k
18 k
24 k
15 k
18 k
21 k
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
IM DL850E-03EN
App-1
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Time/div
Record
1 kpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
1
Index
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 50 kpoint, 100 kpoint, 250 kpoint, 500 kpoint, or 1 Mpoint
Time/div
Record Length
50 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
100 ns
200 ns
500 ns
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
200
100
50
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
30 k
40 k
50 k
30 k
40 k
50 k
40 k
30 k
30 k
24 k
36 k
48 k
30 k
36 k
42 k
48 k
27 k
30 k
36 k
45 k
100 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
250 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
50
50
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
5
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
10
5
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
20
10
5
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
500
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
50
20
10
5
5
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
600 k
800 k
1M
600 k
800 k
1M
1M
600 k
600 k
600 k
900 k
480 k
600 k
720 k
840 k
960 k
540 k
600 k
720 k
900 k
900 k
720 k
720 k
540 k
720 k
900 k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
60 k
80 k
100 k
60 k
80 k
100 k
100 k
60 k
60 k
60 k
90 k
48 k
60 k
72 k
84 k
96 k
54 k
60 k
72 k
90 k
90 k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
150 k
200 k
250 k
120 k
160 k
200 k
200 k
150 k
120 k
240 k
180 k
240 k
150 k
180 k
210 k
240 k
108 k
120 k
144 k
180 k
180 k
180 k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
400 k
300 k
300 k
240 k
360 k
480 k
300 k
360 k
420 k
480 k
270 k
300 k
360 k
450 k
360 k
360 k
360 k
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
App-2
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 2.5 Mpoint, 5 Mpoint, 10 Mpoint, 25 Mpoint, or 50 Mpoint
Time/div
Record Length
2.5 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
25 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
100 ns
200 ns
500 ns
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
200
200
200
200
100
50
20
20
10
10
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
200
100
50
20
20
20
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
5M
4M
5M
5M
4M
5M
5M
4M
3M
4M
5M
3M
4M
5M
4M
3M
3M
2.4 M
3.6 M
4.8 M
3M
3.6 M
4.2 M
4.8 M
2.7 M
3M
3.6 M
4.5 M
3.6 M
3.6 M
3.6 M
2.16 M
2.88 M
3.6 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
50
50
50
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
200
100
100
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
(Points)
(Points)
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
6M
8M
10 M
6M
8M
10 M
10 M
6M
6M
6M
9M
4.8 M
6M
7.2 M
8.4 M
9.6 M
5.4 M
6M
7.2 M
9M
9M
7.2 M
7.2 M
5.4 M
7.2 M
9M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
25 M
20 M
20 M
25 M
20 M
20 M
15 M
20 M
25 M
12 M
16 M
20 M
20 M
15 M
12 M
24 M
18 M
24 M
15 M
18 M
21 M
24 M
10.8 M
12 M
14.4 M
18 M
18 M
18 M
14.4 M
21.6 M
14.4 M
18 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
50 M
40 M
50 M
50 M
40 M
30 M
40 M
50 M
30 M
40 M
50 M
40 M
30 M
30 M
24 M
36 M
48 M
30 M
36 M
42 M
48 M
27 M
30 M
36 M
45 M
36 M
36 M
36 M
21.6 M
28.8 M
36 M
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
IM DL850E-03EN
2
App-3
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
2.5 M
2M
2M
2.5 M
2M
2M
2.5 M
2M
2M
1.5 M
2M
2.5 M
1.2 M
1.6 M
2M
2M
1.5 M
1.2 M
2.4 M
1.8 M
2.4 M
1.5 M
1.8 M
2.1 M
2.4 M
1.08 M
1.2 M
1.44 M
1.8 M
1.8 M
1.8 M
1.44 M
2.16 M
1.44 M
1.8 M
1
Index
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
2.5 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
10
5
5
5
5
5
2.16 M
1.26 M
1.44 M
1.62 M
1.8 M
2.16 M
5 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
20
10
10
10
10
10
5
4.32 M
2.52 M
2.88 M
3.24 M
3.6 M
4.32 M
4.32 M
(Points)
10 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
25 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
5
100
50
50
50
50
50
20
10
5
5
5
200
100
100
100
100
100
50
20
10
10
10
5
5
5
(Points)
4.32 M
5.04 M
5.76 M
6.48 M
7.2 M
8.64 M
8.64 M
8.64 M
(Points)
21.6 M
12.6 M
14.4 M
16.2 M
18 M
21.6 M
17.28 M
17.28 M
12.96 M
17.28M
21.6M
(Points)
43.2 M
25.2 M
28.8 M
32.4 M
36 M
43.2 M
43.2 M
34.56 M
25.92 M
34.56M
43.2M
25.92M
34.56M
43.2M
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
When the Record Length Is 100 Mpoint, 250 Mpoint, 500 Mpoint, 1 Gpoint, or 2 Gpoint
Time/div
Record Length
100 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
250 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
2 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
100 ns
200 ns
500 ns
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
2M
2M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
5M
5M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
20 M
20 M
20 M
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
1G
600 M
800 M
1G
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
50 M
50 M
20 M
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
1.5 G
2G
1G
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
100 M
60 M
80 M
100 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
250 M
200 M
200 M
150 M
200 M
250 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
500 M
400 M
300 M
400 M
500 M
(Points)
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
App-4
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
1
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
100 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
250 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
2 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
20 days
1M
1M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
500
500
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
50
20
20
20
10
10
10
5
2M
2M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
500
200
100
50
50
50
20
20
20
10
5M
5M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
100
100
50
50
50
20
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
100
100
100
50
600 M
800 M
1G
1G
600 M
600 M
600 M
900 M
480 M
600 M
720 M
840 M
960 M
540 M
600 M
720 M
900 M
900 M
720 M
720 M
540 M
720 M
900 M
432 M
504 M
576 M
648 M
720 M
864 M
864 M
864 M
518.4 M
691.2M
864M
518.4M
691.2M
864M
864M
20 M
20 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
1k
500
500
200
200
200
200
100
1.2 G
1.6 G
2G
2G
1.5 G
1.2 G
1.2 G
1.8 G
1.2 G
1.5 G
1.8 G
840 M
960 M
1.08 G
1.2 G
1.44 G
1.8 G
1.8 G
1.8 G
1.44 G
1.08 G
1.44 G
1.8 G
1.08 G
1.26 G
1.44 G
1.62 G
1.8 G
864 M
1.728 G
1.728 G
1.296 G
1.728G
864M
1.0368G
1.3824G
1.728G
1.728G
(Points)
(Points)
120 M
160 M
200 M
200 M
150 M
120 M
240 M
180 M
240 M
150 M
180 M
210 M
240 M
108 M
120 M
144 M
180 M
180 M
180 M
144 M
216 M
144 M
180 M
216 M
126 M
144 M
162 M
180 M
216 M
172.8 M
172.8 M
129.6 M
172.8M
216M
103.68M
138.24M
172.8M
172.8M
(Points)
300 M
400 M
500 M
400 M
300 M
300 M
240 M
360 M
480 M
300 M
360 M
420 M
480 M
270 M
300 M
360 M
450 M
360 M
360 M
360 M
216 M
288 M
360 M
432 M
252 M
288 M
324 M
360 M
432 M
432 M
345.6 M
259.2 M
345.6M
432M
259.2M
345.6M
432M
345.6M
(Points)
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
IM DL850E-03EN
App-5
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
60 M
80 M
100 M
100 M
60 M
60 M
60 M
90 M
48 M
60 M
72 M
84 M
96 M
54 M
60 M
72 M
90 M
90 M
72 M
72 M
54 M
72 M
90 M
43.2 M
50.4 M
57.6 M
64.8 M
72 M
86.4 M
86.4 M
86.4 M
51.84 M
69.12M
86.4M
51.84M
69.12M
86.4M
86.4M
2
Index
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 4 Gpoint, 5 Gpoint, 10 Gpoint, 20 Gpoint, or 50 Gpoint
Time/div
Record Length
4 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
20 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
1M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
3G
3.6 G
4.2 G
4.8 G
2.7 G
3G
3.6 G
4.5 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
2.88 G
3.6 G
1M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
(Points)
100 ns
200 ns
500 ns
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
2.4 G
3G
3.6 G
2.1 G
2.4 G
2.7 G
3G
3.6 G
1.8 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
2.88 G
3.6 G
(Points)
(Points)
5.4 G
6G
7.2 G
9G
9G
7.2 G
7.2 G
5.4 G
7.2 G
9G
(Points)
18 G
18 G
14.4 G
10.8 G
14.4 G
18 G
(Points)
36 G
36 G
21.6 G
28.8 G
36 G
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
App-6
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
1
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
4 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
20 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
20 days
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1k
500
500
500
200
200
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
200
4.32 G
2.52 G
2.88 G
3.24 G
3.6 G
4.32 G
4.32 G
3.456 G
2.592 G
3.456G
4.32G
2.592G
3.456G
4.32G
3.456G
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
(Points)
2.16 G
2.52 G
2.88 G
3.24 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
1.728 G
3.456 G
2.592 G
3.456G
2.16G
2.592G
3.456G
1.728G
3.456G
(Points)
(Points)
4.32 G
5.04 G
5.76 G
6.48 G
7.2 G
8.64 G
8.64 G
8.64 G
5.184 G
6.912G
8.64G
5.184G
6.912G
8.64G
8.64G
(Points)
10.8 G
12.6 G
14.4 G
16.2 G
18 G
8.64 G
17.28 G
17.28 G
12.96 G
17.28G
8.64G
10.368G
13.824G
17.28G
17.28G
2
(Points)
43.2 G
25.2 G
28.8 G
32.4 G
36 G
43.2 G
43.2 G
34.56 G
25.9 G
34.56G
43.2G
25.92G
34.56G
43.2G
34.56G
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-7
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the High-Speed 100 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module Is Not
Installed
When the Record Length Is 1 kpoint, 2.5 kpoint, 5 kpoint, 10 kpoint, or 25 kpoint
Time/div
Record Length
1 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
20
20
10
10
10
5
100
200
500
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
600
800
1k
600
800
1k
1k
2.5 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 kpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
50
50
20
20
20
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
100
100
50
50
50
20
10
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
5k
5k
4k
3k
4k
5k
3k
4k
5k
4k
3k
3k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
2.5 k
2k
2k
1.5 k
2k
2.5 k
1.2 k
1.6 k
2k
2k
1.5 k
(Points)
10 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
25 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
100
100
100
50
20
10
5
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
500
500
200
200
200
100
50
20
20
10
10
5
5
5
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
6k
8k
10 k
6k
8k
10 k
10 k
6k
6k
6k
9k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
25 k
20 k
20 k
25 k
20 k
20 k
25 k
20 k
20 k
25 k
20 k
20 k
15 k
20 k
25 k
12 k
16 k
20 k
20 k
15 k
12 k
24 k
18 k
24 k
15 k
18 k
21 k
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
App-8
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 50 kpoint, 100 kpoint, 250 kpoint, 500 kpoint, or 1 Mpoint
Time/div
Record Length
50 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
200
100
50
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
50 k
50 k
40 k
30 k
40 k
50 k
30 k
40 k
50 k
40 k
30 k
30 k
24 k
36 k
48 k
30 k
36 k
42 k
48 k
27 k
30 k
36 k
45 k
250 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
50
50
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
20
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
500
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
50
20
10
5
5
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
600 k
800 k
1M
600 k
800 k
1M
1M
600 k
600 k
600 k
900 k
480 k
600 k
720 k
840 k
960 k
540 k
600 k
720 k
900 k
900 k
720 k
720 k
540 k
720 k
900 k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
60 k
80 k
100 k
60 k
80 k
100 k
100 k
60 k
60 k
60 k
90 k
48 k
60 k
72 k
84 k
96 k
54 k
60 k
72 k
90 k
90 k
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
250 k
200 k
200 k
150 k
200 k
250 k
120 k
160 k
200 k
200 k
150 k
120 k
240 k
180 k
240 k
150 k
180 k
210 k
240 k
108 k
120 k
144 k
180 k
180 k
180 K
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
500 k
500 k
400 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
300 k
400 k
500 k
400 k
300 k
300 k
240 k
360 k
480 k
300 k
360 k
420 k
480 k
270 k
300 k
360 k
450 k
360 k
360 k
360 k
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
IM DL850E-03EN
2
App-9
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
100 kpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1
Index
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 2.5 Mpoint, 5 Mpoint, 10 Mpoint, 25 Mpoint, or 50 Mpoint
Time/div
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
Record Length
2.5 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
200
200
200
200
100
50
20
20
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
2.5 M
2M
2M
2.5 M
2M
2M
1.5 M
2M
2.5 M
1.2 M
1.6 M
2M
2M
1.5 M
1.2 M
2.4 M
1.8 M
2.4 M
1.5 M
1.8 M
2.1 M
2.4 M
1.08 M
1.2 M
1.44 M
1.8 M
1.8 M
1.8 M
1.44 M
2.16 M
1.44 M
1.8 M
2.16 M
1.26 M
1.44 M
1.62 M
1.8 M
2.16 M
5 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
200
100
50
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
5
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
5M
4M
5M
5M
4M
3M
4M
5M
3M
4M
5M
4M
3M
3M
2.4 M
3.6 M
4.8 M
3M
3.6 M
4.2 M
4.8 M
2.7 M
3M
3.6 M
4.5 M
3.6 M
3.6 M
3.6 M
2.16 M
2.88 M
3.6 M
4.32 M
2.52 M
2.88 M
3.24 M
3.6 M
4.32 M
4.32 M
(Points)
10 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
25 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
50
50
50
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
200
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
50
20
10
5
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
100
100
50
20
10
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
6M
8M
10 M
6M
8M
10 M
10 M
6M
6M
6M
9M
4.8 M
6M
7.2 M
8.4 M
9.6 M
5.4 M
6M
7.2 M
9M
9M
7.2 M
7.2 M
5.4 M
7.2 M
9M
4.32 M
5.04 M
5.76 M
6.48 M
7.2 M
8.64 M
8.64 M
8.64 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
25 M
20 M
20 M
15 M
20 M
25 M
12 M
16 M
20 M
20 M
15 M
12 M
24 M
18 M
24 M
15 M
18 M
21 M
24 M
10.8 M
12 M
14.4 M
18 M
18 M
18 M
14.4 M
21.6 M
14.4 M
18 M
21.6 M
12.6 M
14.4 M
16.2 M
18 M
21.6 M
17.28 M
17.28 M
12.96 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
50 M
40 M
30 M
40 M
50 M
30 M
40 M
50 M
40 M
30 M
30 M
24 M
36 M
48 M
30 M
36 M
42 M
48 M
27 M
30 M
36 M
45 M
36 M
36 M
36 M
21.6 M
28.8 M
36 M
43.2 M
25.2 M
28.8 M
32.4 M
36 M
43.2 M
43.2 M
34.56 M
25.92 M
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
App-10
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
1
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
2.5 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
5 Mpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
(Points)
10 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
(Points)
25 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5
5
10
10
5
5
5
(Points)
17.28M
21.6M
2
(Points)
34.56M
43.2M
25.92M
34.56M
43.2M
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-11
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 100 Mpoint, 250 Mpoint, 500 Mpoint, 1 Gpoint, or 2 Gpoint
Time/div
Record Length
100 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
250 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
2 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
2M
2M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
500
500
200
200
200
200
200
200
100
50
20
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
5M
5M
2M
2M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
500
500
500
500
200
100
50
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
5M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
1k
1k
500
200
100
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
500
200
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
300 M
400 M
500 M
600 M
800 M
1G
1G
600 M
600 M
600 M
900 M
480 M
600 M
720 M
840 M
960 M
540 M
600 M
720 M
900 M
900 M
720 M
720 M
540 M
720 M
900 M
432 M
504 M
576 M
648 M
720 M
864 M
864 M
864 M
518.4 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
5k
5k
2k
2k
1k
500
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
300 M
400 M
500 M
600 M
800 M
1G
2G
1.5 G
1.2 G
1.2 G
1.8 G
1.2 G
1.5 G
1.8 G
840 M
960 M
1.08 G
1.2 G
1.44 G
1.8 G
1.8 G
1.8 G
1.44 G
1.08 G
1.44 G
1.8 G
1.08 G
1.26 G
1.44 G
1.62 G
1.8 G
864 M
1.728 G
1.728 G
1.296 G
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
100 M
60 M
80 M
100 M
60 M
80 M
100 M
100 M
60 M
60 M
60 M
90 M
48 M
60 M
72 M
84 M
96 M
54 M
60 M
72 M
90 M
90 M
72 M
72 M
54 M
72 M
90 M
43.2 M
50.4 M
57.6 M
64.8 M
72 M
86.4 M
86.4 M
86.4 M
51.84 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
150 M
200 M
250 M
120 M
160 M
200 M
200 M
150 M
120 M
240 M
180 M
240 M
150 M
180 M
210 M
240 M
108 M
120 M
144 M
180 M
180 M
180 M
144 M
216 M
144 M
180 M
216 M
126 M
144 M
162 M
180 M
216 M
172.8 M
172.8 M
129.6 M
(Points)
100
200
500
1k
2k
5k
10 k
20 k
50 k
100 k
200 k
500 k
1M
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
300 M
400 M
500 M
300 M
400 M
500 M
400 M
300 M
300 M
240 M
360 M
480 M
300 M
360 M
420 M
480 M
270 M
300 M
360 M
450 M
360 M
360 M
360 M
216 M
288 M
360 M
432 M
252 M
288 M
324 M
360 M
432 M
432 M
345.6 M
259.2 M
(Points)
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
App-12
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
1
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
100 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
250 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
500 Mpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
2 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
20 days
20
20
10
10
10
5
50
50
20
20
20
10
100
100
50
50
50
20
200
200
100
100
100
50
691.2M
864M
518.4M
691.2M
864M
864M
500
200
200
200
200
100
1.728G
864M
1.0368G
1.3824G
1.728G
1.728G
(Points)
69.12M
86.4M
51.84M
69.12M
86.4M
86.4M
(Points)
172.8M
216M
103.68M
138.24M
172.8M
172.8M
(Points)
345.6M
432M
259.2M
345.6M
432M
345.6M
(Points)
2
(Points)
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-13
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
When the Record Length Is 4 Gpoint, 5 Gpoint, 10 Gpoint, 20 Gpoint, or 50 Gpoint
Time/div
1 μs
2 μs
5 μs
10 μs
20 μs
50 μs
100 μs
200 μs
500 μs
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
6s
8s
10 s
20 s
30 s
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
8 min
9 min
10 min
12 min
15 min
30 min
1h
2h
3h
4h
5h
6h
7h
8h
9h
10 h
12 h
1 day
2 days
3 days
Record Length
4 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
20 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
2k
1k
1M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
3G
3.6 G
4.2 G
4.8 G
2.7 G
3G
3.6 G
4.5 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
2.88 G
3.6 G
4.32 G
2.52 G
2.88 G
3.24 G
3.6 G
4.32 G
4.32 G
3.456 G
2.592 G
1M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
50 k
20 k
20 k
10 k
5k
1M
500 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
200 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
(Points)
2.4 G
3G
3.6 G
2.1 G
2.4 G
2.7 G
3G
3.6 G
1.8 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
2.88 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
2.52 G
2.88 G
3.24 G
3.6 G
2.16 G
1.728 G
3.456 G
2.592 G
(Points)
(Points)
5.4 G
6G
7.2 G
9G
9G
7.2 G
7.2 G
5.4 G
7.2 G
9G
4.32 G
5.04 G
5.76 G
6.48 G
7.2 G
8.64 G
8.64 G
8.64 G
5.184 G
(Points)
18 G
18 G
14.4 G
10.8 G
14.4 G
18 G
10.8 G
12.6 G
14.4 G
16.2 G
18 G
8.64 G
17.28 G
17.28 G
12.96 G
(Points)
36 G
36 G
21.6 G
28.8 G
36 G
43.2 G
25.2 G
28.8 G
32.4 G
36 G
43.2 G
43.2 G
34.56 G
25.9 G
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
(Continued on next page)
App-14
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting, Record Length, and Sample Rate
1
(Continued from previous page)
Time/div
Record Length
4 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
5 Gpoint
Sample
Rate
(S/s)
Display
Record
Length
10 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
20 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
50 Gpoint
Sample
Display
Rate
Record
(S/s)
Length
4 days
5 days
6 days
8 days
10 days
20 days
1k
500
500
500
200
200
1k
1k
500
500
500
200
3.456G
4.32G
2.592G
3.456G
4.32G
3.456G
2k
2k
1k
1k
1k
500
5k
2k
2k
2k
2k
1k
10 k
10 k
5k
5k
5k
2k
(Points)
3.456G
2.16G
2.592G
3.456G
1.728G
3.456G
(Points)
(Points)
6.912G
8.64G
5.184G
6.912G
8.64G
8.64G
(Points)
17.28G
8.64G
10.368G
13.824G
17.28G
17.28G
2
(Points)
34.56G
43.2G
25.92G
34.56G
43.2G
34.56G
When the time axis setting is 100 ms or greater (the settings surrounded by bold lines) and the trigger mode is Auto or Auto Level,
waveforms are displayed in roll mode.
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-15
Appendix 2 Relationship between the Main Channel
Sample Rate, Sub Channel Data Update
Rate, and Acquisition Memory Writing Rate
16-CH Voltage Input Module
Rate at Which Data Is Written to the Acquisition Memory
Number of Sub Channels Used
1
2
3 to 4
5 to 8
9 to16
Sub Channel Sample Rate
(Data Update Rate)
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
Main Channel Sample 100 M
Rate Setting (S/s)
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
10 k
10 k
5k
1k
1k
500
100
100
50
10
10
5
1
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
500 k
500 k
500 k
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
: Some data will not be updated. If this occurs, previous data is displayed consecutively.
If you set the sample rate (the main channel sample rate setting) of the DL850E/DL850VE to a rate
that exceeds the sub channel data update rate, all data within the sub channel data update interval
will be the same.
App-16
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 2 Relationship between the Main Channel Sample Rate, Sub Channel Data Update Rate, and Acquisition Memory Writing Rate
1
16-CH Temperature/Voltage Input Module
Rate at Which Data Is Written to the Acquisition Memory
Number of Sub Channels Used
1 to 16
100 ms
300 ms
1s
3s
Main Channel Sample 100 M
Rate Setting (S/s)
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
2
3
4
5
6
App
Index
: Some data will not be updated. If this occurs, previous data is displayed consecutively.
If you set the sample rate (the main channel sample rate setting) of the DL850E/DL850VE to a rate
that exceeds the data update period, all data within the sub channel data update interval will be the
same.
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix
Data Update Period Setting
App-17
Appendix 2 Relationship between the Main Channel Sample Rate, Sub Channel Data Update Rate, and Acquisition Memory Writing Rate
CAN Bus Monitor Module, CAN & LIN Bus Monitor Module, and SENT
Monitor Moudule
Rate at Which Data Is Written to the Acquisition Memory
Number of Sub Channels Used
1
2
3 to 4
5 to 8
9 to 16
17 to 32 33 to 60
Sub Channel Sample Rate
(Data Update Rate)
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
Main Channel Sample 100 M
Rate Setting (S/s)
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
10 k
10 k
5k
1k
1k
500
100
100
50
10
10
5
1
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
–
100 k
100 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
–
–
–
–
If you set the sample rate (the main channel sample rate setting) of the DL850E/DL850VE to a rate
that exceeds the sub channel data update rate, all data within the sub channel data update interval
will be the same.
4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
Sample Rate of the 4-CH 1 MS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module
Main Channel Sample 100 M
Rate Setting (S/s)
50 M
20 M
10 M
5M
2M
1M
500 k
200 k
100 k
50 k
20 k
10 k
5k
2k
1k
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
App-18
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
500 k
100 k
100 k
50 k
10 k
10 k
5k
1k
1k
500
100
100
50
10
10
5
1
The sample rate (data update rate) of the 4-CH 1MS/s,
16-bit isolation module is always one-half that of the twochannel module regardless of the number of sub channels
to be used.
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Record
Length and the Acquisition Mode
1
Maximum Record Length That Can Be Set
The maximum record length varies as indicated below for each model depending on the number of
displayed channels.
When Dual Capturing and Hard Disk Recording Are Off
Number of Displayed Channels
9 to 16 channels
5 to 8 channels
3 to 4 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Model
Standard
10 M
25 M
50 M
100 M
250 M
/M1 (1 G)
50 M
100 M
250 M
500 M
1G
2
3
/M2 (2 G)
100 M
250 M
500 M
1G
2G
4
Unit of record length: Point
5
When Dual Capturing Is Off and Hard Disk Recording Is On
Number of Displayed Channels
9 to 16 channels
5 to 8 channels
3 to 4 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Model
Standard
500 M
1G
2G
5G
10 G
/M1 (1 G)
2G
5G
10 G
20 G
20 G
6
/M2 (2 G)
5G
10 G
20 G
20 G
50 G
App
Appendix
Unit of record length: Point
When Dual Capturing Is On and Hard Disk Recording Is Off
Number of Displayed Channels
9 to 16 channels
5 to 8 channels
3 to 4 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Model
Standard
5M
10 M
25 M
50 M
100 M
/M1 (1 G)
25 M
50 M
100 M
250 M
500 M
Index
/M2 (2 G)
50 M
100 M
250 M
500 M
1G
Unit of record length: Point
When Dual Capturing and Hard Disk Recording Are On
Number of Displayed Channels
9 to 16 channels
5 to 8 channels
3 to 4 channels
2 channels
1 channel
Model
Standard
500 M
1G
2G
5G
10 G
/M1 (1 G)
2G
5G
10 G
20 G
20 G
/M2 (2 G)
5G
10 G
20 G
20 G
50 G
Unit of record length: Point
IM DL850E-03EN
App-19
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Record Length and the Acquisition Mode
Maximum Number of History Waveform Acquisitions
The maximum number of acquisitions varies for each module as indicated below.
Record Length
1k
2.5 k
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
1M
2.5 M
5M
10 M
25 M
50 M
100 M
250 M
500 M
1G
2G
Model
Standard
5000
5000
2976
1487
593
295
144
57
28
13
4
1
1
11
12
13
14
0
0
0
/M1 (1 G)
5000
5000
5000
5000
2381
1189
583
236
116
54
22
10
4
1
1
11
12
13
14
0
/M2 (2 G)
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
2381
1168
474
235
111
46
22
10
3
1
1
11
12
13
14
Unit of record length: Point
1 When there are eight displayed channels
2 When there are four displayed channels
3 When there are two displayed channels
4 When there is one displayed channel
Maximum Sample Rate at Which Hard Disk Recording Is Possible
The maximum sample rate varies as indicated below depending on the number of channels that are
recorded.
Maximum Number of Channels
16 channels
8 channels
3 channels
1 channel
App-20
Maximum Sample Rate
100 kS/s
200 kS/s
500 kS/s
1 MS/s
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 3 Relationship between the Record Length and the Acquisition Mode
1
Dual Capture Count
The dual capture count varies depending on the maximum number of main waveform capturing
channels and the record length of DCAP waveforms as shown below.
IM DL850E-03EN
Maximum number
of main waveform
capturing
channels
16
8
4
2
1
Standard Model
HD
HD
Recording Recording
Off
On
1488
743
743
371
296
147
147
73
72
35
28
13
13
6
2977
743
1488
371
594
147
296
73
145
35
58
13
28
6
5000
743
2977
371
1190
147
594
73
291
35
118
13
58
6
5000
743
5000
371
2382
147
1190
73
584
35
237
13
117
6
5000
743
5000
371
4765
147
2382
73
1169
35
475
13
236
6
/M1 Model
HD
Recording
Off
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
5000
5000
2382
1190
584
237
117
5000
5000
4765
2382
1169
475
236
5000
5000
5000
4765
2339
952
473
5000
5000
5000
5000
4680
1905
948
HD
Recording
On
2977
1488
594
296
145
58
28
2977
1488
594
296
145
58
28
2977
1488
594
296
145
58
28
2977
1488
594
296
145
58
28
2977
1488
594
296
145
58
28
/M2 Model
HD
Recording
Off
5000
5000
2382
1190
584
237
117
5000
5000
4765
2382
1169
475
236
5000
5000
5000
4765
2339
952
473
5000
5000
5000
5000
4680
1905
948
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
3812
1898
HD
Recording
On
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
5000
2977
1190
594
291
118
58
App-21
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Record
length
of DCAP
waveforms
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
5k
10 k
25 k
50 k
100 k
250 k
500 k
Index
Appendix 4 Default Values
Operation Key Soft Key
CH1 to 16 (HS10M12 (701250))
V/div
Position
Label
Coupling
Probe
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
Invert
Linear Scale
CH1 to 16 (HS1M16 (701251))
V/div
Position
Label
Coupling
Probe
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
Invert
Linear Scale
CH1 to 16 (NONISO_10M12 (701255))
V/div
Position
Label
Coupling
Probe
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
Invert
Linear Scale
CH1 to 16 (HV (with RMS) (701267))
V/div
Position
Label
Coupling
Probe
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
Invert
Linear Scale
CH1 to 16 (HV (with RMS) (701268))
V/div
Position
Label
Coupling
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
App-22
Setting
50.0 V/div
0.00 div
Channel number
DC
10:1
Full
DIV
×1
0.0 V
OFF
OFF
50.0 V/div
0.00 div
Channel number
DC
10:1
Full
DIV
×1
0.00 V
OFF
OFF
50.0 V/div
0.00 div
Channel number
DC
10:1
Full
DIV
×1
0.0 V
OFF
OFF
5.000 V/div
0.00 div
Channel number
DC
1:1
Full
DIV
×1
0.000 V
OFF
OFF
Operation Key Soft Key
Setting
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (UNIVERSAL (701261)/UNIVERSAL (AAF) (701262))
V/div
5.000 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
BandWidth
Full
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.000 V
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (TEMP/HPV (701265/720266))
V/div
5.000 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
BandWidth
Full
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.000 V
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (STRAIN_NDIS (701270)/STRAIN_DSUB (701271))
Value/div
4000.0 µSTR/div
Range
±20000 µSTR
Label
Channel number
Excitation
2V
Gauge Factor
2
BandWidth
Full
Upper
20000 µSTR
Lower
–20000 µSTR
Range Unit
µSTR
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (ACCL/VOLT (701275))
V/div
50.0 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
Probe
10:01
BandWidth
Full
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.00 V
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
5.000 V/div
0.00 div
Channel number
DC
Full
DIV
×1
0.000 V
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 4 Default Values
IM DL850E-03EN
Operation Key Soft Key
Bit Rate
Sample Point
Sync Jump Width
Bit Sample Num
Listen Only
Terminator
Scale
One Shot Out
Message Format
ID (Hex)
Frame
DLC
Data (Hex)
1
Setting
500 Kbps
85%
2
1
OFF
OFF
Auto
2
STD
000
Data
0
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
CH13 to 16 (CAN & LIN (720241))
The values for CAN are the same as the
values for the 720240.
All SubChannels Setup
Input
OFF
Label
Channel number
ID (Hex)
Start Bit
Bit Count
Byte Order
Value Type
Factor
Offset
Port Setup
Bit Rate
Frame Setup
Data Length
Check Sum
Scale
CH9 to 16 (SENT (720243))
SENT Format Setup
Clock Tick
Data Nibbles Number
Pause Pulse
CRC Type
Slow CH Type
0
0
8
Little
Unsigned
1
0
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Operation Key Soft Key
Setting
CH1 to 16 (FREQ (701281))
Value/div
1 kHz/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
FV Setup
Frequency
Input Setup
User
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.000 Hz
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (HS100M12 (720210 and 720211))
V/div
50.0 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
Probe
10:01
BandWidth
Full
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.0 V
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (16CH VOLT (720220))
V/div
2.000 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
BandWidth
Full
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0 mV
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (16CH TEMP/VOLT (720221))
V/div
2.000 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Data Update Period
100 ms
Label
Channel number
Coupling
DC
V Scale
DIV
V Zoom
×1
Offset
0.0 mV
Invert
OFF
Linear Scale
OFF
CH1 to 16 (LOGIC (720230))
Position
0.00 div
Label
Channel number
Bit Mapping
Auto
CH13 to 16 (CAN MONITOR (720240))
All SubChannels Setup
Input
OFF
Label
Channel number
Message Format
STD
ID (Hex)
0
Byte Count
Auto
Start Bit
0
Bit Count
8
Byte Order
Big
Value Type
Unsigned
Factor
1
Offset
0
Port Setup
19200 bps
Index
1
Classic
Auto
3.00 µs
6
ON
Recommended
Enhanced (ID 8 bit
+ Data 12 bit)
OFF
Fast Channel
Multiplexing
Error Channel Setup
Fast Channel CRC
Detect
─
Error Trigger
ON
Error Count
ON
Slow Channel CRC
Detect
─
Error Trigger
ON
Error Count
ON
Nibble Value
Detect
─
Error Trigger
ON
Error Count
ON
Successive Calibration Pulses (Option2)
Detect
OFF
Error Trigger
ON
Error Count
ON
App-23
Appendix 4 Default Values
Operation Key Soft Key
Setting
Pulse Number
Detect
─
Error Trigger
ON
Error Count
ON
Error Count Reset on Start
ON
Input Setup
Probe
1:1
Time Out
2000.0ms
All SubChannels Setup
Sub channel number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Data Type
FastCH
FastCH
FastCH
S&C
SlowCH
SlowCH
SlowCH
SlowCH
SlowCH
Error Trigger
Error Count
Input
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Label
CH<x>_F1
CH<x>_F2
CH<x>_F3
CH<x>_SC
CH<x>_S1
CH<x>_S2
CH<x>_S3
CH<x>_S4
CH<x>_S5
CH<x>_ET
CH<x>_EC
(When Data Type is set to FastCH)
FC
0x00
Endian
Big
Start Bit
FastCH 1
0
FastCH 2
12
FastCH 3
0
Bit Size
12
Value Type
Unsigned
Factor
1.00
Offset
0.00
Unit
“”
(When Data Type is set to S&C)
Bit 0
Display
ON
Label
Bit0
Bit 1
Display
ON
Label
Bit1
Bit 2
Display
ON
Label
Bit2
Bit 3
Display
ON
Label
Bit3
V Zoom
×1.0
(When Data Type is set to SlowCH)
ID
0x00
Start Bit
0
Bit Size
12
Value Type
Unsigned
Factor
1.00
Offset
0.00
Unit
“”
(When Data Type is set to Error Trigger)
V Zoom
×1.0
CH1 to 16 (4CH 1M16 (720254))
V/div
50.00 V/div
Position
0.00 div
Label
App-24
Operation Key Soft Key
Sub channel number 1
Sub channel number 2
Coupling
Probe
BandWidth
V Scale
V Zoom
Offset
Invert
Linear Scale
START/STOP
STOP
TIME/DIV
1 ms/div
ACQUIRE
Record Length
Acquisition Mode
Trigger Mode
Acquisition Count
HD Recording
Time Base
DUAL CAPTURE
Mode
Capture Setup
Time/div
Capture Length
Capture Mode
Select Number
Mag
Position
Window
Main Ratio
Window Layout
Format
Event Display
FILE
Save_Waveform
Auto Naming
Data Type
Range
Save_Setup
Auto Naming
Save_Others
Auto Naming
Data Type
Format
Color
MENU
Waveform Save
Waveform Save Setup
Auto Naming
Data Type
Image Save
Image Save Setup
Auto Naming
Image Format
Color
Back Ground
DISPLAY
Format
Extra Window
Graticule
Setting
CH<x>_1
CH<x>_2
DC
10:1
Full
DIV
×1
0.00 V
OFF
OFF
10 k
Normal
Auto
Infinite
OFF
Int
OFF
100 µs/div
10 k
Auto
Current
100 µs/div
0.0 div
ON
50%
Side
Main
OFF
Numbering
Binary
Main
Numbering
Numbering
Screen Image
PNG
ON
ON
Numbering
Binary
OFF
Numbering
PNG
ON
Normal
Quad
OFF
Grid
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 4 Default Values
Operation Key Soft Key
Scale Value
Setup
Allocation Mode
Trace Label
Dot Connect
Accumulate
Manual Event
Ch. Information
X-Y
Window1/2
Display
Start Point
End Point
MODE
IM DL850E-03EN
Auto
OFF
Line
OFF
OFF
Narrow
OFF
OFF
–5 div
5 div
Auto
50.0%
0.0 µs
Simple
CH1
Rising
0V
0.00 µs
OFF
CH1
3.00 div
–3.00 div
CH1
–4.000 div
4.000 div
Marker1 X
CH1
–3.000 div
Mark
CH1
–4.000 div
4.000 div
360
–2.000 div
2.000 div
CH1
–4.000 div
4.000 div
3.00 div
–3.00 div
OFF
%
90.0%
50.0%
10.0%
Auto
Operation Key Soft Key
Setting
Mode
OFF
Polarity
Rising
Edge Count
1
Reference
Trace
Range
Main
Time Range1
–5.00 div
Time Range2
5.00 div
(When Mode is set to ON, Statistics)
1-Cycle Mode
OFF
(When Mode is set to Cycle Statistics)
Cycle Trace
CH1
GO/NO-GO
Mode
OFF
Logic
AND
ActCondition
Fail
Sequence
Continue
Acquisition Count
Infinite
Remote
OFF
Beep
OFF
Print Image
OFF
Save Waveform
OFF
Save Image
OFF
Send Mail
OFF
Time Range1
–5.00 div
Time Range2
5.00 div
HISTORY
Display Mode
1 Record
Select Record
0
Start Record
0
End Record
Oldest number
Search Mode
OFF
MATH
Mode
OFF
Select Math Trace
1
Opeartion:Math1
OFF
Opeartion:Math2
OFF
Opeartion:Math3
OFF
Opeartion:Math4
OFF
Opeartion:Math5
OFF
Opeartion:Math6
OFF
Opeartion:Math7
OFF
Opeartion:Math8
OFF
Scaling Mode
Auto
Start Point
–5.00 div
End Point
5.00 div
FFT Points
1k
Window
Hanning
FFT
Display
OFF
Trace
CH1
Start Point
–5.00 div
FFT Points
1k
Window
Hanning
Vert. Scale Mode
Auto
Main Ratio
50%
Window Layout
Side
Horiz. Axis
Log Hz
ZOOM
Display (Zoom1)
ON
Display (Zoom2)
OFF
Position
0.00 div
Main Ratio
50%
App-25
1
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
POSITION/DELAY
Position
Delay
SIMPLE/ENHANCED
Setting
Source
Slope
Level
Hysteresis
Hold Off
CURSOR
Type
Horizontal
Trace
Cursor1
Cursor2
Vertical
Trace
Cursor1
Cursor2
Marker
Marker #
Trace
Position
Marker From
Degree
Trace
Cursor1
Cursor2
RefValue
Ref1
Ref2
H&V
Trace
V-Cursor1
V-Cursor2
H-Cursor1
H-Cursor2
MEASURE
Mode
Distal/Mesial/Proximal
Mode
Distal
Mesial
Proximal
High/Low
Delay Setup
Setting
ON
Index
Appendix 4 Default Values
Operation Key Soft Key
Window Layout
Format Zoom1
SEARCH
Type
Edge
Trace
Level
Polarity
Hysteresis
Count
Result Window
Pattern No.
Event
Select Number
Result Window
Select Event
Logic Pattern
Trace
Bit Setting
Result Window
Pattern No.
Start Point
End Point
Time
Absolute Time
Result Window
PRINT MENU
UTILITY
App-26
Print To
System Config
Date/Time
Display
Format
Time Synchro
Time Synchro
IRIG Format
Modulation
Impedance
Language
Menu
Message
LCD
Auto OFF
Auto OFF Time
Brightness
Storage Manager
Media
USB Keyboard
USB Function
Remote Ctrl
Device
USB Function
Network
TCP/IP
DHCP
DNS
FTP/Web Server
User Name
TimeOut(s)
TimeOut (s)
Setting
Side
Main
Edge
CH1
0.0 V
Rising
1
Zoom1
No Match
1
Zoom1
Capture
Installation channel
X
Zoom1
No Match
–5.00 div
5.00 div
Current date and
time
Zoom1
Builtin
ON
Year/Month/Day
OFF
A
AM
50
English
English
OFF
1 min
3
HD
English
TMC
Operation Key Soft Key
Mail
Attached Image File
TimeOut (s)
Net Print
LPR Name
TimeOut (s)
Net Drive
LoginName
Passive
TimeOut (s)
SNTP
TimeOut (s)
Adjust at PowerON
Preference
Power On Action
Start
Action
Logic Setup
Numerical Format
Cursor Order
Bit Order
Terminal Setup
Remote Stop
Trigger Out
Pulse Width
Display Setup
Menu Font Size
Base Color
Scale Font Size
Scale On Item
Level Indicator
Horozontal Axis
Display Mode
Intensity
Grid
Cursor
Marker
Key/Knob Setup
Click Sound
START/STOP
Response Time
Key Protect
Type
Release Type
Analysis Setup
Cursor Read Mode
Action Folder Mode
Input Setup DC Offset
& Adjust
Self Test
Setting
OFF
15
PASSTHRU
15
anonymous
ON
1800
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
Bit
1 -> 8
1 -> 8
On
Normal
1 msec
Large
Blue
Large
All
On
Auto
2
8
8
ON
Quick
All
Key
Display
ON
OFF
Keyboard
USB
TMC
ON
Auto
anonymous
1800
15
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 5 USB Keyboard Key Assignments
IM DL850E-03EN
USB Keyboard
CTRL+A
CTRL+B
CTRL+C or PRINT SCREEN
CTRL+D
CTRL+F
CTRL+G
CTRL+H
CTRL+I
CTRL+J
CTRL+K
CTRL+L
CTRL+M
CTRL+N
CTRL+P
CTRL+Q
CTRL+R
CTRL+S
CTRL+T
CTRL+U
CTRL+X
CTRL+W
CTRL+Z
CTRL+1
CTRL+2
CTRL+3
CTRL+4
CTRL+5
CTRL+6
CTRL+7
CTRL+8
CTRL+9
CTRL+0
CTRL+ENTER
CTRL+\
CTRL+/
CTRL+F1
CTRL+F2
CTRL+F3
CTRL+F4
CTRL+F5
CTRL+F6
CTRL+INSERT
CTRL+HOME
CTRL+DELETE
CTRL+END
CTRL+* or F12
CTRL+SHIFT+A
CTRL+SHIFT+B
CTRL+SHIFT+C
CTRL+SHIFT+D
CTRL+SHIFT+I
CTRL+SHIFT+M
CTRL+SHIFT+T
CTRL+SHIFT+Z
CTRL+SHIFT+\
E when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
K when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
App-27
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
DL850E/DL850EV
AQUIRE
MATH
Execute PRINT
DISPLAY
FILE
HELP
HISTORY
Execute SAVE
MANUALTRIG
KEY PROTECT
ALL CH
MEASURE
NUM LOCK
POSITION/DELAY
Execute CLEAR TRACE
Execute RESET
SHIFT
MODE (TRIGGER)
CURSOR
ANALYSIS
SIMPLE/ENHANCED
ZOOM
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
SET
SETUP
UTILITY
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
Turn ZOOM POSITION to the right
Turn VERTICAL POSITION to the right
Turn ZOOM POSITION to the left
Turn VERTICAL POSITION to the left
START/STOP
DUAL CAPTURE
FFT
PRINT MENU
X-Y
MENU
GO/NO-GO
ACTION
SEARCH
CAL
EXP (CH key)
k (CH key) + ENTER (CH key)
1
Index
Appendix 5 USB Keyboard Key Assignments
DL850E/DL850EV
m (CH key) + ENTER (CH key)
1 (CH key)
2 (CH key)
3 (CH key)
4 (CH key)
5 (CH key)
6 (CH key)
7 (CH key)
8 (CH key)
9 (CH key)
0 (CH key)
ENTER (CH key)
. (CH key)
– (CH key)
ESC
Select soft key 1
Select soft key 2
Select soft key 3
Select soft key 4
Select soft key 5
Select soft key 6
Select soft key 7
SNAPSHOT
Turn ZOOM MAG to the right
Turn VERTICAL SCALE to the right
Turn HORIZONTAL TIME/DIV to the right
Turn ZOOM MAG to the left
Turn VERTICAL SCALE to the left
Turn HORIZONTAL TIME/DIV to the left
Right arrow
Left arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
App-28
USB Keyboard
M when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
1 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
2 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
3 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
4 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
5 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
6 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
7 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
8 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
9 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
0 when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
ENTER when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
. when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
– when NUM LOCK is illuminated on the DL850E/DL850EV
ESC or F8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
PAUSE
INSERT
HOME
PAGE UP
DELETE
End
PageDown
→
←
↑
↓
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 6 Block Diagrams
1
2
Block Diagram of the DL850E/DL850EV
CPU Block Diagram
Acquisition Block Diagram
3
CPU
ACQ Memory
250 Mpoint - 2 Gpoint
(/M1 or /M2
option1)
Main Memory
4
Printer
Controller
(/B5 option)
Plug-in
Module
CH1-CH16
Internal Thermal
Printer (100 mm width)
5
Graphic
Controller
GIGAZoom
Engine2
10.4 Color TFT
XGA 1024 × 768
VIDEO OUT (XGA)
(ACQ-ASIC)
6
SD Memory Card
External HDD, eSATA support
(/HD0 option2)
EXT HDD Terminal
Internal HDD (/HD1 option2)
Real Time Math
(including Digital Filter)
(/G3 option)
Ext. Clk In
Ext. trig In/out
App
USB Port
GP-IB Port
IRIG (/C20 option3)
IRIG Terminal
GO/NO-GO
1000 BASE-LAN
GO/NO-GO Port
Ethernet Port
1 The /M1 and /M2 options cannot be installed
on the same instrument.
2 The /HD0 and /HD1 options cannot be
installed on the same instrument.
3 The /C1 and /C20 options cannot be installed
on the same instrument.
Signal Flow of the DL850E/DL850EV
The input terminal signal flow varies for each model. In this example, we will explain the signal flow
for the High-Speed 10 MS/s, 12-Bit Isolation Module, 701250 (HS10 M12). (For the signal flow of a
particular module, see the module’s block diagram.)
The input signal applied to the two input terminals is first processed by each module’s input section.
In the 701250 (HS10 M12), the signal is attenuated and amplified by an attenuator (ATT) and
amplifier (AMP). Then, the signal’s bandwidth is limited by a filter (FLT). Next, the signal is sampled
at a rate of 10 MS/s (10,000,000 times a second) by an A/D converter and converted into digital
data. Then, the signal passes through an isolator and an ASIC to a waveform-processing ASIC
(ACQ-ASIC).
The 16 channel of digital data that is sent to the CPU board passes through the GIGAZoom Engine2
waveform processor and is stored to the acquisition memory (ACQ Memory). The digital data stored
to the ACQ memory is compressed quickly by the GIGAZoom Engine2, and then it passes through
a graphic controller and is shown on the XGA TFT color display.
The realtime math feature (/G3 option) uses the A/D converted data of the analog input channels
or the math results of realtime math channels or both as its math sources and performs math
operations on the specified channels in real time.
You can use the DL850E/DL850EV to perform realtime math on up to 16 channels at the same
time.
IM DL850E-03EN
App-29
Appendix
USB
GP-IB (/C1 or /C20 option3)
Index
Appendix 6 Block Diagrams
Plug-in Module Block Diagram
701270 (STRAIN_NDIS)
701271 (STRAIN_DSUB)
701250 (HS10M12)
720250 (HS10M12)
ATT
ATT
FLT
AMP
FLT
AMP
12
A/D
FPGA
12
A/D
Inst.
AMP
ATT
FLT
AMP
A/D
FLT
AMP
16
ATT
ATT
AMP
AMP
ATT
ATT
FLT
AMP
12
ATT
H
L
FLT
AMP
FPGA
16
A/D
Isolator
Isolation Block
RJC
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
FLT
A/D
RJC
L
FLT
A/D
FPGA
16
AMP
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
A/D
L
16
AMP
Isolation Block
FPGA
FLT
COMP
Isolator
FLT
FLT
A/D
A/D
A/D
16
Isolator
12
FPGA
12
Isolator
16 M
FLT
U
X
A/D
16
FPGA
Isolator
701953 (16CH SCANNER BOX)
CPU
FPGA
ATT
COMP
Isolation Block
RJC
H
FLT
720220 (16CHVOLT)
701265 (TEMP/HPV)
720266 (TEMP/HPV)
RJC
16
Isolator
Isolation Block
AMP
H
L
AD
CH1-CH16
Isolator
Isolation Block
AMP
ATT
CPU
16
L
H
FPGA
720210 (HS100M12)
720211 (HS100M12)
701261 (UNIVERSAL)
701262 (UNIVERSAL (AAF))
H
FLT
Isolation Block
L
16
701281 (FREQ)
720281 (FREQ)
720243 (SENT)
16
A/D
AD
Isolation Block
701267 (HV (with RMS))
720268 (HV (AAF, RMS))
H
FLT
AMP
Current source
12
A/D
Isolator
Current source
FPGA
FPGA
FLT
16
Isolation Block
ATT
A/D
AD
DAC
Bridge
Power
701255 (NONISO_10M12)
FLT
FPGA
FLT
AMP
Isolator
Isolation Block
16
701275 (ACCL/VOLT)
16
A/D
AD
DAC
Inst.
AMP
701251 (HS1M16)
ATT
FLT
AMP
Bridge
Power
+
−
+
−
Isolator
Isolation Block
+
−
+
−
CH 1
H
L
CH 2
H
L
CH 16
H
L
720221 (16CH TEMP/VOLT)
AMP
CPU
A/D
FPGA
Isolator
RJC
720230 (LOGIC)
High-speed logic probe POD-A
Isolated logic probe
App-30
POD-B
8
16
8
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 6 Block Diagrams
1
720240 (CAN MONITOR)
CAN
Controller
Interface
CAN-H
CAN-L
CPU
CAN
Controller
Interface
CAN-H
CAN-L
FPGA
2
Isolator
720241 (CAN & LIN)
3
CAN
Controller
Interface
CAN-H
CAN-L
CPU
LIN
Controller
Interface
LIN
FPGA
4
Isolator
720254 (4CH 1M16)
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
ATT
AMP
FLT
FLT
FLT
FLT
Isolation Block
A/D
A/D
A/D
A/D
5
16
16
16
FPGA
6
16
Isolator
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-31
Appendix 7 High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit
Isolation Module (with RMS) (701260)
Specifications
The specifications for the High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS) (701260) are
provided below. This input module (701260) does not comply with safety standard EN 61010-1 or
EN 61010-2-030 as of September 30, 2013.
Item
Standard operating
conditions
Effective measurement
range
Number of input channels
Input coupling
Maximum sample rate
Input format
Frequency characteristics1
(−3 dB point when a sine
wave of amplitude ±3 div
is applied)
Voltage-axis sensitivity
setting
Maximum input voltage
(at a frequency of 1 kHz
or less)
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
AC, DC, GND, AC-RMS, and DC-RMS
100 kS/s
Isolated unbalanced
Waveform observation mode:
DC to 40 kHz
RMS observation mode:
DC, 40 Hz to 10 kHz
20 mV/div to 200 V/div (1-2-5 steps) (when using 1:1 probe attenuation)
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1) or 701947 (100:1):2
1000 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1):5
850 V (DC+ACpeak)
Direct input or cable not complying with the safety standard:8
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Maximum rated voltage to Working voltage of safety standard
earth
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1)
Between input and case
Across probe tip H and earth:3
1000 Vrms (CAT II)
Between each input
Across probe tip L and earth:4
400 Vrms (CAT II)
(at a frequency of 1 kHz
Combined with the 701901+701954 (1:1)
or less)
Across tip H and earth:6
700 Vrms (CAT II)
Across tip L and earth:7
400 Vrms (CAT II)
Direct input or cable not complying with the safety standard
Across the input terminal, H or L, and earth:9
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
Vertical (voltage) axis
Waveform observation mode
accuracy DC accuracy1
DC accuracy
±(0.25% of 10 div)
RMS observation mode
DC accuracy
±(1.0% of 10 div)
AC accuracy (when a sine wave is input)
±(1.5% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 2 or less) ±(2.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
AC accuracy (when the crest factor is 3 or less) ±(3.0% of 10 div) At frequency of 40 Hz to 1 kH
Input connector
BNC connector (isolated type)
Input impedance
1 MΩ ± 1%, approx. 35 pF
−3 dB point when AC
1 Hz or less (0.1 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.01 Hz or less when using the
coupled low frequency
701947)
attenuation point
Common mode rejection
80 dB (50/60 Hz) or more (Typical10)
ratio
Residual noise level
±1 mV or ±0.02 div whichever is greater (Typical10)
(Input section shorted)
Withstand voltage
3700 Vrms for 1 minute (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
Allowable transient surge ±5200 Vpeak (across each input terminal and earth)
voltage (instantaneous)
Insulation resistance
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
A/D conversion resolution 16 bit (2400 LSB/div)
Temperature coefficient
Zero point:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (Typical10)
Gain:
±(0.02% of 10 div)/°C (Typical10)
Response time (only when Rising (0 to 90% of 10 div):
100 ms (Typical10)
observing RMS)
Falling (100 to 10% of 10 div): 250 ms (Typical10)
App-32
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 7 High-Voltage 100 kS/s, 16-Bit Isolation Module (with RMS) (701260) Specifications
Item
Bandwidth limit
Probe attenuation setting
Compatible probes/
cables
Specifications
Select from Full, 10 kHz,1 kHz, and 100 Hz
Cut-off characteristics: −12 dB/OCT (Typical10)
Voltage probe: 1:1, 10:1, 100:1, 1000:1
Current probe: 1 A:1 V, 10 A:1 V (for the 701932/701933), 100 A: 1 V (for the 701930/701931)
Connection cable (for high voltage 1:1): Recommended 1
701901 (isolated type BNC-safety alligator clip adapter ×2: For measuring 850 V (DC+ACpeak) or
less), 701954 (alligator clip (dolphin type) red/black 2-piece set) is required separately
Voltage probe: Recommended 2
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF: For measuring 1000 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF: For measuring 1000 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF: For measuring 1000 V (DC+ACpeak) or less
Current probe (power can be supplied from the DL850E/DL850EV. Option)
701930 (150 A), 701931 (500 A), 701932 (30 A), 701933 (30 A)
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
H
700929
702902
701947
2
L
4
3
1
2
3
4
Combined with the 701901+701954
701901
H
701954
5
7
5
6
L
6
Direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
H
BNC
8
L
9
App
Appendix
Withstand voltage: 3700 Vrms for 1 minute
Allowable transient surge voltage: ±5200 Vpeak
(between earth and input)
Index
10The typical value is a representative or standard value. It is not strictly warranted.
WARNING
• To receive high voltage with the module, use a 1:1 safety cable (combination of 701901
and 701954), isolated probe (700929, 701947), or passive probe 702902.
• Note that the overvoltage tolerance of the low and high sides of this module may differ
depending on the combination of the connected probe, measurement lead, and clip.
French
AVERTISSEMENT
• Pour recevoir une tension élevée avec le module, utiliser un câble de sécurité 1:1
(combinaison de 701901 et 701954), une sonde isolée (700929, 701947) ou une sonde
passive 702902.
• Noter que la tolérance de surtension des du bas et du haut de ce module peut être
différente suivant la combinaison de sonde reliée, de fil de mesure et de pince.
IM DL850E-03EN
App-33
Appendix 8 Frequency Module (701280)
Specifications
The specifications for the Frequency Module (701280) are provided below. This module does not
comply with environmental standard EN 50581.
Item
Standard operating conditions
Measurement function
Effective measurement range
Number of input channels
Data update rate
Output delay time
Input format
Input connector
Maximum input voltage
Maximum rated voltage to earth
Between input and case
Between each input
Withstand voltage
Allowable transient surge voltage
(instantaneous)
Insulation resistance
Minimum measurement resolution
Measured data resolution
Measurement accuracy1
App-34
Specifications
Temperature: 23 ±5°C
Humidity:
20 to 80% RH
After a 30-minute warm-up and after calibration
Frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, duty cycle, power supply frequency, pulse width, pulse
integration, and velocity
20 div (display range: 10 div)
2
25 kHz (40 µs)
Up to 2 computation periods
Isolated unbalanced
Metal BNC connector
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):2
420 V (DC+ACpeak)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):4
42 V (DC+ACpeak)
Working voltage of safety standard
Combined with the 700929 (10:1), 702902 (10:1), or 701947 (100:1):3
300 Vrms (CAT II)
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) (1:1) or direct input (cable that does not comply with
the safety standards):5
42 V (DC+ACpeak) (CAT II, 30 Vrms)
1500 Vrms for 1 minute (across each terminal and earth) (60 Hz)
±2100 Vpeak (across each input terminal and earth)
500 VDC, 10 MΩ or more (across each input terminal and earth)
50 ns
16 bits (2400 LSB/div)
• When in frequency, RPM, RPS, or velocity measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input
frequency
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input frequency)
[Accuracy dependent on the input frequency]
When input frequency is 2 kHz or less:
0.05% of the input frequency + 0.001 Hz
Input frequency of 2 kHz to 10 kHz:
0.1% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 10 kHz to 20 kHz:
0.3% of the input frequency
Input frequency of 20 kHz or higher:
0.5% of the input frequency
• When in power supply frequency mode7
When the center frequency is 50/60 Hz:
±0.03 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
When the center frequency is 400 Hz:
±0.3 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution)
(Input set to AC100 V or AC200 V with sine wave input)
• When in period measurement mode6
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input period
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input period)
[Accuracy dependent on the input period]
Input period of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input period
Input period of 100 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input period
Input period of 50 µs to 100 µs:
0.3% of the input period
Input period of 50 µs or less:
0.5% of the input period + 0.1 µs
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 8 Frequency Module (701280) Specifications
Item
Input voltage range (±FS)
Input impedance
Input coupling settings
Probe attenuation setting
Minimum voltage width for pulse
detection
Bandwidth limit
Slope selection
Lower −3 dB point when AC
coupled
Chatter elimination function
Input status indication function
Compatible probes/cables
Select from Full, 100 kHz, 10 kHz, 1 kHz, and 100 Hz
Cutoff characteristics:
−12 dB/OCT (Typical9)
Set within the FS of the voltage range. Set in units of 1% of the FS.
Select ±1%, ±2.5%, or ±5% of the FS of the voltage range
Logic (5 V/3 V/12 V/24 V), electromagnetic pickup, zero crossing, pull-up, AC100 V, AC200 V,
and user-defined
Select rising or falling
0.5 Hz or less (0.05 Hz or less when using the 700929 or 702902, 0.005 Hz or less when
using the 701947) (Typical9)
OFF or 1 to 1000 ms (1 ms resolution)
Eliminates the chatter that occurs such when the contact input is turned ON/OFF.
Can discard the signal changes over the specified interval.
Input status indication through the LEDs of each channel function
When in operation:
Illuminates in green when pulse input is detected
When overdriven:
Illuminates in red when the input voltage exceeds the range
Connection cable (1:1): Recommended 1
366926
Voltage probe: Recommended 2
700929 (10:1 safety probe), 20 to 45 pF
702902 (10:1 safety probe), 25 to 40 pF
701947 (100:1 probe), 15 to 45 pF
1 Value measured under standard operating conditions.
Combined with the (701901 + 701954) or
direct input (cable that does not comply with the safety standards)
Combined with the 700929, 702902, or 701947
700929
702902
701947
H
H
2
L
3
BNC
4
L
5
Withstand voltage: 1500 Vrms for 1 minute
Allowable transient surge voltage (between earth and input): ±2100 Vpeak
6
7
8
9
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 1 ms (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 90 Vrms, sine wave (input range: AC100 V, bandwidth limit 100 kHz, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Input waveform of 1 Vpp, rectangular wave, rise/fall time within 5 ns (input range: ±10 V, bandwidth limit: Full, and hysteresis: ±1%)
Typical value represents a typical or average value. It is not strictly warranted.
IM DL850E-03EN
App-35
1
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Threshold
Hysteresis
Preset function
Specifications
• When in duty cycle measurement mode8
Dependent on the input frequency
Input frequency of 1 kHz or less:
±0.1%
Input frequency of 1 kHz to 10 kHz:
±0.2%
Input frequency of 10 kHz to 50 kHz:
±1.0%
Input frequency of 50 kHz to 100 kHz:
±2.0%
Input frequency of 100 kHz to 200 kHz:
±4.0%
• When in pulse width measurement mode8
Measurement accuracy is specified according to the measurement range and input pulse width
[Definition of measurement accuracy]
±(0.05% of 10 div + accuracy dependent on the input pulse width)
[Accuracy dependent on the input pulse width]
Input pulse width of 500 µs or greater:
0.05% of the input pulse width
Input pulse width of 100 µs to 500 µs:
0.1% of the input pulse width
Input pulse width of 50 µs to 100 µs:
0.3% of the input pulse width
Input pulse width of 50 µs or less:
0.5% of the input pulse width + 0.1 µs
When using 1:1 probe attenuation:
±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±20 V, ±50 V (±FS)
1 MΩ ± 1 approx. 35 pF
Pull-up function:
4.7 kΩ, approx. 5 V (pull-up can be turned ON only when the
input is set to Pull-up 5 V)
AC, DC
10:1, 1:1
200 mVP-P
Index
Appendix 8 Frequency Module (701280) Specifications
Specifications by Measurement Modes
Item
Frequency
Measurable frequency range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
RPMs
Measurable RPMs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable pulse/rotate range
RPSs
Measurable RPSs range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable pulse/rotate range
Period
Measurable period range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Minimum resolution
Duty cycle
Measurable duty cycle range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurable frequency range
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Power supply frequency
Measurable frequency range
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Center frequency setting
Minimum resolution
Pulse width
Measurable pulse width
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Measurement pulse selection
Minimum resolution
Pulse integration
Maximum pulse count
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Frequency measuring range
Computation function
Selectable Unit/Pulse range
Counter reset
Velocity
Selectable vertical axis sensitivity
Computing method
Selectable Distance/Pulse range
App-36
Specifications
0.01 Hz to 200 kHz
0.1 Hz/div to 50 kHz/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.001 Hz
0.01 rpm to 100000 rpm (where the input frequency is DC to 200 kHz).
0.1 rpm/div to 10 krpm/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPMs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value) × 60
1 to 99999
0.001 rps to 2000 rps (where the input frequency is DC to 200 kHz).
0.01 rps/div to 200 rps/div (1-2-5 steps)
Computed from the frequency based on the number of pulses per rotation
RPSs = Frequency/(pulse/rotate value)
1 to 99999
5 µs to 50 s (where the minimum pulse width is 2 µs)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 µs
0 to 100%
1 %/div to 20 %/div (1-2-5 steps)
0.1 Hz to 200 kHz
Select positive or negative pulse
0.01%
30 Hz to 70 Hz (when the center frequency is 50 Hz), 40 Hz to 80 Hz (when the center
frequency is 60 Hz), 380 Hz to 420 Hz (when the center frequency is 400 Hz)
0.1 Hz/div to 2 Hz/div (0.01 Hz resolution)
Select 50 Hz, 60 Hz, or 400 Hz
0.01 Hz
2 µs to 50 s (where the input frequency is up to 200 kHz)
10 µs/div to 5 s/div (1-2-5 steps)
Select positive or negative pulse
0.1 µs
2×109 pulses
500.0E+18 value/div to 10.00E−21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
0.1 Hz to 200 kHz (where the minimum pulse width is 2 µs)
Set the physical amount per pulse and display by converting the values intophysical
values such as distance and flow rate.
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
Manual reset and over-limit reset
Set the amount of displacement per pulse and compute the velocity from the frequency
Automatic unit time conversion of s, min, and hour.
500.0 E+18 value/div to 10.00 E-21 value/div (1-2-5 range: total of 123 ranges)
−9.9999E+30 to +9.9999E+30
IM DL850E-03EN
Appendix 8 Frequency Module (701280) Specifications
1
Functional Specifications
Item
Deceleration prediction
Stop prediction
Smoothing
Pulse average
Offset function
Specifications
Computes the deceleration condition in realtime when the pulse input is cut off.
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Sets the frequency to 0 after a certain time elapses after the pulse input is cut off.
Stop interval setting: Set in the range of 1.5 to 10 times (10 settings) the period of the
pulse measured last
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, period, and velocity
Computes the moving average of the measured data using the specified time
Specified time: 0.1 to 1000 ms (0.1 ms resolution)
Can be specified on all measurement parameters
Performs frequency measurement per specified number of pulses. When fluctuation
exists periodically in the pulse interval, the fluctuation can be eliminated.
Specified number of pulses: 1 to 4096
Can be specified when measuring the frequency, RPMs, RPSs, power supply frequency,
period, pulse integration, and velocity
Observe fluctuation with respect to the offset frequency
Offset range: Can be set up to 1000 times the maximum div value
• Frequency:
0 Hz to 200 kHz
• RPMs:
0 rpm to 50 krpm
• RPSs:
0 rps to 1000 rps
• Period:
0 s to 50 s
• Duty cycle:
0% to 100%
• Pulse width:
0 s to 50 s
• Pulse integration:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
• Velocity:
−1.0000×1022 to 1.0000×1022
2
3
4
5
6
App
Appendix
Index
IM DL850E-03EN
App-37
Download PDF
Similar pages